dataTaker

User’s Manual

www.dataTaker.comdataTaker. . . k e e p i n g a n e y e o n r e a l i t y

A complete guide to DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro:• DeLogger4 – for graphical dataTaker setup• DeLogger4 Pro – for managing a remote network of dataTakers• Data visualization• SCADA

DeLogger™4 and DeLogger™4 Pro

®

U70A0covers.qxd 21/8/02 1:29 PM Page 1

Software

© Discbell Limited 1997All rights reservedInformation in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Discbell Limited. The software (which includes any database supplied therewith) described in the document may be furnished subject to a licence agreement. It is against the law to copy the software except as specifically allowed in the licence.The customer, in applying the products and software described herein, accepts that the products are wholly or partly programmable electronic systems that are inherently complex and which cannot thus be guaranteed to be free from errors.

In doing so, the customer accepts the responsibility to ensure that the products are correctly programmed, configured, installed, commissioned, operated and maintained by competent and suitably trained staff and in accordance with any instructions provided or dictated by good engineering practices.The software and products described herein are subject to continuous development and improvement. All information of a technical nature is given by Discbell Limited in good faith, but Discbell Limited shall not be liable for any omissions or errors herein or within the software herein described.

Software Disclaimer

Discbell Limited will under no circumstances be responsible for direct, indirect, incidental, or consequential damages, death or personal injury arising from the use or misuse of this documentation or the products and software described herein.

Manual

© dataTaker Pty Ltd 2002

dataTaker is a registered trademark of dataTaker Pty Ltd. DeLogger is a trademark of dataTaker Pty Ltd.Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, FoxPro, Visual Basic and SQL Server are either

registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.Red Hat is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.

Crystal Reports is a registered trademark of Crystal Decisions (Crystal Decisions is a trademark of Seagate Technology LLC).Other brand and product names mentioned in this manual are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.

User’s Manual

for

DeLogger

™

4

and

DeLogger

™

4 Pro

UM-0070-A0

4

User’s Manual — DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro

UM

-007

0-A

0

About this User’s Manual

DeLogger

™

is graphical host software supplied by dataTaker Pty Ltd with each DT5/6xx and DT8xx

dataTaker

®

data logger. Also supplied is a

Getting Started…

guide, which is a step-by-step tutorial that introduces you to your

dataTaker

data logger and to DeLogger software.The manual you’re reading now — the

User’s Manual for DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro

— supplements the

Getting Started…

guide. It’s a detailed reference to DeLogger

™

4 and DeLogger

™

4 Pro.Unlike the

Getting Started…

manual, whose topics are presented in a logical workflow, this

User’s Manual for DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro

presents its information in categories. For example,• Chapter 2 covers DeLogger commands, menu-by-

menu• Chapter 3 covers windows• Chapter 4 covers toolbars.

Use the table of contents or the index to find exactly what you want, or browse through the manual to see what DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro can do.

Installing DeLogger

Installing DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro is covered in the

Getting Started…

guide supplied with your

dataTaker

.If you’re using Windows NT

®

, Windows

®

2000 or Windows

®

XP, see also “Installing DeLogger4 on Windows NT, 2000 and XP (iUser)” beginning on page 235.

TerminologyThe term dataTaker is a registered trademark of dataTaker Pty Ltd. In this manual, dataTaker refers to any of our DT50, DT500 or DT600 series of data loggers (DT5/6xx), and to our DT800 data loggers (DT8xx).In this manual, the term DeLogger refers to both DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro.

Pro Only The Pro symbol is used throughout this manual to indicate commands and dialog box items that are only available in DeLogger4 Pro.

0-A

0

Contents — OverviewAbout this User’s Manual ...................... 4

Contents — Overview............................ 5

Contents — Detailed .............................. 7

PART AMenus, Windows and Toolbars

CHAPTER 1THE BIG PICTURE1-1 Main Window (Project Window) ...................... 131-2 Document Windows........................................ 141-3 Viewing and Saving Data ................................ 161-4 Projects, Programs, Schedules and Channels ...... 171-5 DeLogger’s Folders.......................................... 18

CHAPTER 2MENUS2-1 Menu Overview.............................................. 192-2 The File Menu................................................. 212-3 The Edit Menu ................................................ 342-4 The View Menu .............................................. 372-5 The Connections Menu .................................... 382-6 The Configuration Menu .................................. 512-7 The dataTaker Menu ....................................... 632-8 The Seventh Menu........................................... 77

The Form Menu .......................................... 77The Chart Menu ......................................... 85The Text Menu ........................................... 91The Mimic Menu ........................................ 97The Spread Menu ..................................... 104The Analysis Menu .................................. 115The Program Menu — DT5/6xx ................. 124The Program Menu — DT8xx ..................... 126

2-9 The Reports Menu ......................................... 1272-10 The Tools Menu ............................................ 130

Tools > Internal Cards ............................... 130Tools > Memory Cards.............................. 130

2-11 The Window Menu ....................................... 1342-12 The Help Menu............................................. 1352-13 The Taskbar Menu ........................................ 135

CHAPTER 3WINDOWS3-1 The Project Window ......................................1363-2 The Form Window.........................................136

Formula One Workbook Designer...............1383-3 The Chart Window ........................................1393-4 The Text Window ..........................................1443-5 The Mimic Window .......................................1453-6 The Spreadsheet Window ..............................149

The Spreadsheet Worksheet .......................150The Spreadsheet Graph Area ....................151Using the Mouse with Worksheets ...............160

3-7 The Analysis Window ...................................161The Analysis Worksheet ............................162The Analysis Chart Area ...........................163

3-8 The DT5/6xx Program Builder Window ...........1643-9 The DT8xx Program Builder Window ...............1653-10 The Event Logs Window .................................167

CHAPTER 4TOOLBARS4-1 Repositioning Toolbars ...................................1684-2 The System Toolbar........................................1694-3 The Connection Toolbar .................................1694-4 The dataTaker Toolbar ...................................1694-5 The Configuration Toolbar ..............................1704-6 The Status Bar ...............................................1704-7 The Project Bar .............................................171

The Connections Sub-Bar............................172The Actions Sub-Bar...................................172

4-8 Window Toolbars..........................................173The Form Toolbar ......................................173The Chart Toolbar .....................................174The Text Toolbars ......................................174The Mimic Toolbar ....................................176The Spreadsheet Toolbar............................176The Analysis Toolbar ................................177The DT5/6xx Program Builder Toolbar ........177The DT8xx Program Builder Toolbar ............177

Contents — Overview 5

UM

-007

0-A

0

PART BNuts & Bolts

CHAPTER 5ACTIONS 5-1 Actions Overview ..........................................1795-2 Using Actions................................................1805-3 Action Macro Commands ..............................1845-4 Scheduling Actions (Schedule Utility) ............196

CHAPTER 6REPORTS 6-1 Reports Introduction .......................................1996-2 Report Tools and the Data Database ................1996-3 Installed Reports and Secondary Reports ..........2006-4 Global Formulas............................................2026-5 DIY Installed Reports ......................................202

CHAPTER 7DELOGGER UTILITY SOFTWARE7-1 Schedule Utility .........................................2037-2 SiteAdmin Utility ...........................................2037-3 iUser Utility ...................................................2077-4 Replay File Utilities.........................................207

CHAPTER 8SAVING — WHAT, WHEN, WHERE8-1 What’s Saved When .....................................208

Automatic Saves .......................................208Manual Saves...........................................208

8-2 What’s Stored Where ....................................209

CHAPTER 9ADVANCED TOPICS9-1 The Data Hub ...............................................210

Data Channels in the Data Hub...................211Data Hub Functions ...................................213Virtual Data Channels ................................215

9-2 Remote Data Sites and the Modem Manager ...2219-3 DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) .......................222

DDE Concepts ..........................................222DeLogger Pro Topics and Items ...................224DDE Between DeLogger Pro and Excel .........224

9-4 Databases ....................................................226Database Delicacies ..................................226DeLogger’s Default Databases ....................226Database Size and Performance Issues ........227Alternative Databases ................................227

9-5 DeLogger Pro Web Publishing ....................... 229Intranet (Local) Publishing .......................... 230Internet (WWW) Publishing ...................... 231Publishing Frequency................................. 232Publishing Reports..................................... 232Personalizing the Data Site ........................ 232

9-6 DeLogger OPC Server ................................... 2339-7 Installing DeLogger4 on Windows NT, 2000

and XP (iUser)............................................... 2359-8 DeLogger Messaging..................................... 237

PART CAppendixes

APPENDIX 1Keyboard Shortcuts 239

Menu-Specific Shortcuts ............................. 239General Shortcuts ..................................... 239

APPENDIX 2Worksheet Functions......................... 240

Index................................................ 285

6 User’s Manual — DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro

UM

-007

0-A

0

Contents — DetailedAbout this User’s Manual ...................... 4

Contents — Overview............................ 5

Contents — Detailed .............................. 7

PART AMenus, Windows and Toolbars

CHAPTER 1THE BIG PICTURE1-1 Main Window (Project Window) ...................... 131-2 Document Windows........................................ 141-3 Viewing and Saving Data ................................ 161-4 Projects, Programs, Schedules and Channels ...... 171-5 DeLogger’s Folders.......................................... 18

CHAPTER 2MENUS2-1 Menu Overview.............................................. 192-2 The File Menu................................................. 21

File > New ............................................ 21File > Open........................................... 22File > Close ........................................... 23File > Save Project.................................. 23File > Project Properties .......................... 23File > Performance ................................. 24File > Page Setup .................................. 25File > Print............................................. 26File > Print Preview................................. 27File > Print Setup .................................... 28File > Customize ................................... 29File > Register Product ............................ 33File > Recent Project Files (List) ................. 33File > Exit .............................................. 33

2-3 The Edit Menu ................................................ 34Edit > Undo........................................... 34Edit > Redo ........................................... 34Edit > Cut.............................................. 34Edit > Copy........................................... 34Edit > Paste ........................................... 34Edit > Paste Values ................................. 34Edit > Clear........................................... 35Edit > Insert ........................................... 35Edit > Delete.......................................... 35Edit > Copy Down.................................. 35Edit > Copy Right ................................... 35Edit > Find ............................................ 35

Edit > Replace ........................................35Edit > Go To Matching Brace ...................36Edit > Select All ......................................36

2-4 The View Menu ...............................................37View > Status Bar ...................................37View > Project Bar .................................37View > Toolbars .....................................37View > Show Alarm Events ......................37View > Show Error Events ........................37View > Show Message Events ..................37View > View Events.................................37

2-5 The Connections Menu.....................................38Connections > Connect ...........................38Connections > Manual Integrity Check .....39Connections > Disconnect ........................39Connections > Play .................................40Connections > Properties .........................42

Connections — Serial .......................... 43Connections — Network ...................... 45Connections — Modem ....................... 46Connections — Auto-Answer Modem .... 48Connections — File.............................. 49Connections — Database .................... 50

2-6 The Configuration Menu...................................51Configuration > Defaults ..........................52

Load Existing Message Entries............... 52Logging Errors and Alarms ................... 53Channel Logging Mode ....................... 53Connection Defaults............................. 54

Configuration > Actions ..........................55Configuration > Reports ..........................57Configuration > Web Publish ..................58Configuration > Data Hub Channels ........59Configuration > Database Channel Logging Sessions ................................................60

2-7 The dataTaker Menu ........................................63dataTaker > Data Logging .......................63dataTaker > Unload ................................64dataTaker > Quit Unload.........................66dataTaker > Clear ..................................67dataTaker > Job To Run On Hard Reset .....68dataTaker > Reset ...................................68dataTaker > Run .....................................69dataTaker > Halt ....................................69dataTaker > Set Date/Time ......................69dataTaker > Status ..................................70dataTaker > Test .....................................71dataTaker > Memory Card ......................71dataTaker > Run Card Program ................72dataTaker > Profile .................................73

Host Port Tab ...................................... 73Ethernet Tab ....................................... 73Host Modem Tab................................. 73FTP Server Tab .................................... 73PPP Tab.............................................. 75ISP Tab .............................................. 75

dataTaker > Upgrade Firmware................76

Contents — Detailed 7

UM

-007

0-A

0

2-8 The Seventh Menu ...........................................77The Form Menu...........................................77

Form > Pause .........................................77Form > Edit Mode...................................77Form > Column Template .........................78Form > Reset High ..................................78Form > Reset Low....................................78Form > Background Colour ......................78Form > Show Headers.............................78Form > Show Gridlines............................78Form > View Toolbar...............................79Form > Format........................................79

Form > Format > Alignment .................. 79Form > Format > Font .......................... 79Form > Format > Border....................... 80Form > Format > Pattern....................... 80Form > Format > General..................... 80Form > Format > Fixed......................... 80Form > Format > Fixed (1) to (5) ........... 80Form > Format > Percent % ................. 80Form > Format > Scientific ................... 80Form > Format > Date (yyyy/mm/dd).... 81Form > Format > Time (hh:mm:ss) ......... 81Form > Format > Date/Time (yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss.000) ............... 81Form > Format > Locale Date/Time ....... 81Form > Format > Custom Number ........ 81Form > Format > Default Font ............... 81

Form > Object .......................................81Form > Object > Insert Button .............. 81Form > Object > Insert Checkbox ......... 81Form > Object > Attach Action ............ 82Form > Object > Options ..................... 82

Form > Validation Rule ...........................82Form > Calculation ................................82Form > Define Name ..............................83Form > Set Print Range From Selection ......83Form > Insert Page Break .........................83Form > Remove Page Break .....................84Form > Publish .......................................84Form > Properties....................................84

The Chart Menu ..........................................85Chart > Pause ........................................85Chart > Edit Mode ..................................85Chart > Chart Properties ..........................86Chart > Select Channels ..........................88Chart > Edit Axis ....................................89Chart > Rotate........................................89Chart > Auto Re-Scale .............................89Chart > Allow Compressed Mode.............89Chart > Clear.........................................89Chart > XY Chart ...................................89Chart > View Toolbar..............................90Chart > Scale Text Up .............................90Chart > Scale Text Down .........................90Chart > Publish ......................................90Chart > Properties...................................90

The Text Menu............................................ 91Text > Display Screen ............................. 91

Text > Display Screen > Filter Data.......... 91Text > Display Screen > Display Data As.. 92Text > Display Screen > Capture Data To Disk............................................... 92Text > Display Screen > Font ................ 92Text > Display Screen > Save Screen Buffer As ............................................ 93Text > Display Screen > Clear Screen Buffer................................................. 93Text > Display Screen > Insert Text ....... 93Text > Display Screen > Pause .............. 93Text > Display Screen > View Toolbar ... 93Text > Display Screen > Properties ........ 94

Text > Entry Screen ................................. 94Text > Entry Screen > Command Edit Mode................................................. 94Text > Entry Screen > Open Text File ..... 95Text > Entry Screen > Load DLP Text ...... 95Text > Entry Screen > Save Text File ...... 95Text > Entry Screen > Send Line ............ 95Text > Entry Screen > Send Highlighted . 95Text > Entry Screen > Send Program...... 95Text > Entry Screen > Set User Buttons .. 96Text > Entry Screen > User Buttons ........ 96Text > Entry Screen > Clear Entry Buffer . 96Text > Entry Screen > Go To Matching Brace................................................. 96Text > Entry Screen > View Toolbar ....... 96

Text > Splitter View................................. 96The Mimic Menu......................................... 97

Mimic > Needle Meters .......................... 98Mimic > Arc Meters ............................... 98Mimic > Pie Meters ................................ 98Mimic > Temperature Meter .................... 99Mimic > Annunciator ............................. 99Mimic > Digital ................................... 100Mimic > LED Indicators ......................... 100Mimic > Buttons .................................. 101Mimic > Picture .................................... 101Mimic > Pause ..................................... 101Mimic > Edit Mode............................... 102Mimic > Edit Panel ............................... 102Mimic > Arrange.................................. 102

Mimic > Arrange > Back One............. 102Mimic > Arrange > Forward One........ 102Mimic > Arrange > Send To Back ....... 102Mimic > Arrange > Bring To Front ....... 102

Mimic > Lock ....................................... 103Mimic > Delete..................................... 103Mimic > Scale Text Up .......................... 103Mimic > Scale Text Down...................... 103Mimic > View Toolbar........................... 103Mimic > Publish ................................... 103Mimic > Properties ............................... 103

The Spread Menu ..................................... 104Spread > Load Session From Database ..105Spread > Load Session From File............ 105Spread > Import Sheet ......................... 106Spread > Export Sheet .......................... 106Spread > Load Into External Spreadsheet 106Spread > Chart Type ........................... 107


UM

-007

0-A

0

Spread > Update Chart ....................... 107Spread > Background Colour ............... 107Spread > Show Headers ....................... 108Spread > Show Gridlines ...................... 108Spread > View Toolbar......................... 108Spread > Format .................................. 109

Spread > Format > Alignment............. 109Spread > Format > Font ..................... 109Spread > Format > Border ................. 109Spread > Format > Pattern ................. 110Spread > Format > General ............... 110Spread > Format > Fixed ................... 110Spread > Format > Fixed (1) to (5) ...... 110Spread > Format > Percent % ............ 110Spread > Format > Scientific ............. 110Spread > Format > Date (yyyy/mm/dd) 110Spread > Format > Time (hh:mm:ss) ... 110Spread > Format > Custom Number ... 110Spread > Format > Default Font .......... 111

Spread > Calculation ........................... 111Spread > Sort ..................................... 112Spread > Define Name ........................ 112Spread > Set Print Range From Selection. 113Spread > Insert Page Break ................... 113Spread > Remove Page Break ............... 113Spread > Publish ................................. 113Spread > Properties.............................. 114

The Analysis Menu .................................. 115Analysis > Load Session From Database 116Analysis > Load Session From File ......... 116Analysis > Import Sheet ....................... 117Analysis > Export Sheet ....................... 117Analysis > Load Into External Spreadsheet ....................................... 117Analysis > Update Chart ...................... 117Analysis > Background Colour .............. 118Analysis > Show Headers .................... 118Analysis > Show Gridlines ................... 118Analysis > View Toolbar ...................... 118Analysis > Format ............................... 118

Analysis > Format > Alignment .......... 119Analysis > Format > Font ................... 119Analysis > Format > Border ............... 119Analysis > Format > Pattern ............... 119Analysis > Format > General ............. 119Analysis > Format > Fixed ................. 120Analysis > Format > Fixed (1) to (5) .... 120Analysis > Format > Percent % ........... 120Analysis > Format > Scientific ............ 120Analysis > Format > Date (yyyy/mm/dd) ................................. 120Analysis > Format > Time (hh:mm:ss) .. 120Analysis > Format > Custom Number .. 120Analysis > Format > Default Font ........ 120

Analysis > Calculation ......................... 121Analysis > Sort ................................... 121Analysis > Define Name ...................... 122Analysis > Set Print Range From Selection ............................................ 122Analysis > Insert Page Break ................. 122Analysis > Remove Page Break .............. 123Analysis > Publish ............................... 123Analysis > Properties ........................... 123

The Program Menu — DT5/6xx..................124Program > Send To Connection ..............124Program > Send To Card On Connection 124Program > Arrange Channels.................125Program > Next Analogue Channel ........125Program > Next Digital Channel.............125Program > Next HSC Channel ...............125Program > Edit Mode ............................125Program > View Toolbar........................125Program > Properties.............................125

The Program Menu — DT8xx......................126Program > Send To Connection ..............126Program > Send To Connection And Save As RESET Job................................126

2-9 The Reports Menu..........................................127Reports > Alarms ..................................127

Reports > Alarms > Full ...................... 127Reports > Alarms > Today .................. 127Reports > Alarms > Week To Date ...... 127Reports > Alarms > Month To Date ...... 127

Reports > Errors ....................................128Reports > Errors > Full........................ 128Reports > Errors > Today.................... 128Reports > Errors > Week To Date ........ 128Reports > Errors > Month To Date........ 128

Reports > Log Files ...............................128Reports > Log Files > Schedule ........... 128Reports > Log Files > Action ............... 128

Reports > Database Reports ..................1292-10 The Tools Menu.............................................130

Tools > Internal Cards................................130Tools > Memory Cards ..............................130

Tools > Memory Cards > 5/6xx Series ...130The Copy Option .............................. 131The Translate Option.......................... 131The Create Replay File Option ............ 132

Tools > Memory Cards > 8xx Series .......1322-11 The Window Menu........................................134

Window > Cascade..............................134Window > Tile Vertical..........................134Window > Tile Horizontal......................134Window > Arrange Icons ......................134Window > Project Windows (List) ...........134Window > More Windows ....................134

2-12 The Help Menu .............................................135Help > About DeLogger.........................135

2-13 The Taskbar Menu .........................................135


UM

-007

0-A

0

CHAPTER 3WINDOWS3-1 The Project Window ......................................1363-2 The Form Window.........................................136

Formula One Workbook Designer ...............1383-3 The Chart Window ........................................1393-4 The Text Window ..........................................1443-5 The Mimic Window .......................................145

Mimic Attribute Dialog Boxes .................1463-6 The Spreadsheet Window ..............................149

The Spreadsheet Worksheet .......................150The Spreadsheet Graph Area ....................151

Spreadsheet Chart Right-Click Dialog Boxes .................................................152Spreadsheet Chart Element Dialog Boxes 159

Using the Mouse with Worksheets ...............1603-7 The Analysis Window ...................................161

The Analysis Worksheet ............................162The Analysis Chart Area ...........................163

3-8 The DT5/6xx Program Builder Window ...........1643-9 The DT8xx Program Builder Window ...............1653-10 The Event Logs Window .................................167

CHAPTER 4TOOLBARS4-1 Repositioning Toolbars ...................................1684-2 The System Toolbar........................................1694-3 The Connection Toolbar .................................1694-4 The dataTaker Toolbar ...................................1694-5 The Configuration Toolbar ..............................1704-6 The Status Bar ...............................................1704-7 The Project Bar .............................................171

The Connections Sub-Bar............................172The Actions Sub-Bar...................................172

4-8 Window Toolbars..........................................173The Form Toolbar ......................................173The Chart Toolbar .....................................174The Text Toolbars ......................................174The Mimic Toolbar ....................................176The Spreadsheet Toolbar............................176The Analysis Toolbar ................................177The DT5/6xx Program Builder Toolbar.........177The DT8xx Program Builder Toolbar ............177

PART BNuts & BoltsCHAPTER 5ACTIONS 5-1 Actions Overview.......................................... 179

AutoRun — DeLogger Pro’s Startup Action1795-2 Using Actions ............................................... 180

Defining New Actions ........................... 180Editing Actions ..................................... 181Deleting Actions ................................... 181Creating Macro Scripts ......................... 181Running Actions ................................... 182

5-3 Action Macro Commands ............................. 184Macros for Managing Connections.........184Macros for Commanding a dataTaker.....185Macros for Unloading Data from a dataTaker ............................................ 187Macros for Managing DeLogger Pro Windows ............................................ 189Macros for Managing DeLogger Pro Projects ............................................... 190Macros for Managing Database Channel Logging Sessions .................................. 192Macros for Interacting with a User .......... 194Miscellaneous Macros........................... 195

5-4 Scheduling Actions (Schedule Utility) .............. 196Adding a New Schedule ....................... 197Editing a Schedule................................ 197Setting the Activity of a Schedule............ 197Running a Schedule Now ...................... 197Global Pause ....................................... 197

CHAPTER 6REPORTS 6-1 Reports Introduction ....................................... 1996-2 Report Tools and the Data Database................ 1996-3 Installed Reports and Secondary Reports .......... 200

Installed Reports ................................... 200Secondary Reports................................ 200

6-4 Global Formulas ........................................... 2026-5 DIY Installed Reports ...................................... 202

CHAPTER 7DELOGGER UTILITY SOFTWARE7-1 Schedule Utility ......................................... 2037-2 SiteAdmin Utility .......................................... 203

Administration Menu............................. 204Administration > Pack Database ........... 204Administration > Session Administration 204Administration > Log File Administration 205Administration > Archive Data Database 205

Reports Menu....................................... 206Reports > Site Listing.......................... 206Reports > Action Listing ...................... 206Reports > Port ................................... 206

Closing SiteAdmin ................................ 206


UM

-007

0-A

0

7-3 iUser Utility .................................................. 2077-4 Replay File Utilities ........................................ 207

CHAPTER 8SAVING — WHAT, WHEN, WHERE8-1 What’s Saved When..................................... 208

Automatic Saves....................................... 208Manual Saves .......................................... 208

8-2 What’s Stored Where ................................... 209

CHAPTER 9ADVANCED TOPICS9-1 The Data Hub............................................... 210

Data Channels in the Data Hub .................. 211Data Hub Functions .................................. 213

Setting a Channel’s Properties in the Data Hub ............................................ 213

Virtual Data Channels ............................... 215The Virtual Job Data Hub ...................... 215Store Channels .................................... 216Calculated Channels ............................ 218

9-2 Remote Data Sites and the Modem Manager .. 2219-3 DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange)....................... 222

DDE Concepts.......................................... 222Server and Client ................................. 222DDE Terminology ................................. 222DDE Message Structure......................... 223The ChannelName DDE Item ................. 223

DeLogger Pro Topics and Items................... 224DDE Between DeLogger Pro and Excel ........ 224

Excel Procedures .................................. 2259-4 Databases.................................................... 226

Database Delicacies ................................. 226DeLogger’s Default Databases.................... 226Database Size and Performance Issues ....... 227Alternative Databases ............................... 227

9-5 DeLogger Pro Web Publishing ....................... 229Intranet (Local) Publishing ......................... 230Internet (WWW) Publishing ...................... 231Publishing Frequency ................................ 232Publishing Reports .................................... 232Personalizing the Data Site ........................ 232

9-6 DeLogger OPC Server ................................... 2339-7 Installing DeLogger4 on Windows NT, 2000

and XP (iUser) .............................................. 235Access Rights to Windows..................... 235Configuring the Windows Registry ......... 236iUser Setup Upgrade ............................ 236

9-8 DeLogger Messaging .................................... 237

PART CAppendixes

APPENDIX 1Keyboard Shortcuts 239

Menu-Specific Shortcuts .............................239General Shortcuts......................................239

APPENDIX 2Worksheet Functions .........................240

Index ................................................285


UM

-007

0-A

0

PART AMenus, Windows and ToolbarsPART A covers all of the tools and commands of dataTaker’s DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro software:• Chapter 1: “The Big Picture” gives you an overview

of DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro.• Chapter 2: “Menus” begins on page 19.• Chapter 3: “Windows” begins on page 136.• Chapter 4: “Toolbars” begins on page 168.

Pro Only The “Pro” symbol is used throughout this manual to indicate commands and dialog box items that are only available in DeLogger Pro.

12 User’s Manual — DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro PART A: Menus, Windows and Toolbars

UM

-007

0-A

0

CHAPTER 1

THE BIG PICTURE

1-1 MAIN WINDOW (PROJECT WINDOW)In DeLogger, you open and work with one project at a time. This is why DeLogger’s main window is called the project window (Figure 1).

Toolbar gripper (handle)

Configuration toolbar — seedataTaker toolbar — seeConnection toolbar — seeSystem toolbar — seeMenu bar — seeThe title bar contains standard Windows controls (minimize, maximize,…) and the name of the front-most DeLogger window.

Watch the status bar for prompts when you pause the mouse over a button or a menu item. See

Activity indicators — see

DT5/6xx program builder window. Here you create a program ready to send to a DT50, 500 or 600 series dataTaker. SeeDT8xx program builder window. Here you create a program ready to send to a DT800 dataTaker. See

Event logs window

Double-click a window’s

tab to maximize

/restore the window (tick

Support Tabbed MDI in

to turn on

these tabs).

Minimized DeLogger windows

Project bar

FIGURE 1 The menus, toolbars, sub-windows and other tools that constitute DeLogger’s main (project) window

page 170page 169page 169

page 169page 19

page 164.

page 165.

— seepage 171

page 170. page 170

— seepage 168

— see page 167

Figure 28

CHAPTER 1: THE BIG PICTURE 1-1 Main Window (Project Window) 13

UM

-007

0-A

0

1-2 DOCUMENT WINDOWSFigures 2, 3 and 4 show the eight types of windows you can open within DeLogger’s main window.

Form window: view each channel’s latest data and other information,

one row per channel

Chart window: view live trend plots (data versus time) like traces on a chart recorder

Text window: view incoming data in the display screen; type commands

to send to the dataTaker in the entry screen

Mimic window: view data on meters, use buttons to perform actions, and

add background graphics

Dynamic data views — these DeLogger windows display realtime data and historical data “live”.

Note: You can open more than one of each of these window types in any DeLogger project (choose New from the File menu).

Load text file (.cmd, .dxc or .txt)

Capture data to disk as it arrives(as a text file .txt)Save screen buffer (.txt or .csv)

Save text file (.cmd, .dxc or .txt)

Send program to the dataTaker

Trigger actions

Trigger actions

Load program builder as text

Print

Print

Print

Print

Print

Databasesession

Replay file(.dlr)

Externalconnection

Historicaldata

Internalconnection

File and database connections — for historical dataSerial, network, modem and auto-answer modem connections — for realtime and unloaded data

Web publish

Web publish

Web publish

FIGURE 2 DeLogger document window types (sub-windows) 1 of 3 — the four dynamic data views

— see page 144

— see page 139

— see page 136

— see page 145


UM

-007

0-A

0

Static data views — load historical data into these DeLogger windows, then use standard worksheet tools to organize, calculate and analyze the data, and graph it.

Spreadsheet window: load a replay file or database session one row per timestamp, one column per channel.

Then manipulate the data, save it in a variety of formats, or export it.

DeLogger Pro also produces presentation-quality 2D and 3D

graphs of the data.


Analysis window (DeLogger Pro only): as for spreadsheet window, except

produces 2D charts for data analysis.

Load replay fileLoad into Excel(opens Excel)

Export worksheet

PrintLoad database session

Load replay file

Load into Excel(opens Excel)

Export worksheet

PrintLoad database session

Worksheetarea

Chartarea

Worksheetarea

Grapharea

Databasesession

Replay file(.dlr)

Internalconnection

File and database connections — for historical data

Historicaldata

FIGURE 3 DeLogger document window types (sub-windows) 2 of 3 — the two static data views

See page 149.

See page 161.

DT5/6xx program builder window: create a program and send it to a DT5/6xx dataTaker.



DT8xx program builder window: create a program and

send it to a DT8xx dataTaker.


FIGURE 4 DeLogger document window types (sub-windows) 3 of 3 — the two program builders

See page 164.

See page 165.

CHAPTER 1: THE BIG PICTURE 1-2 Document Windows 15

UM

-007

0-A

0

1-3 VIEWING AND SAVING DATAFigure 5 gives you an overview of the ways you can use DeLogger to view and save• data returning from a dataTaker in real time• logged data unloaded from a dataTaker’s memory.

TRANSFER REALTIME DATA

UNLOAD LOGGED DATA

UNLOAD LOGGED DATA REPLAY DATA

REPLAY DATA

REPLAY DATA

UNLOAD DATA

REPLAY DATA

REALTIMEDATA

dataTaker > Unload only

DatabasechannelloggingsessionRealtime

DatabasechannelloggingsessionLogged

Loggingsession

DYNAMICDATA

VIEWSFormwindow

Chartwindw

Textwindow

CAPTURE/SAVEDATA

Mimicwindow

Spreadsheetwindow

Analysiswindow

STATICDATA

VIEWS

Loggingsession

Unloadsession

Session

Replay file(.dlr)

CSV file(.csv)

LOAD SESSION

Replay file(.dlr)

LOAD FILE

FIGURE 5 Viewing and saving data

See “Initiating Unloads” on page 61.

See page 64.

See page 60.

See page 60.


UM

-007

0-A

0

1-4 PROJECTS, PROGRAMS, SCHEDULES AND CHANNELS

Figure 6 shows DeLogger’s hierarchy of project > program (job) > schedule > channel.

PROJECT AProgram Builder 1 (Program 1)

Schedule A (every 5 seconds)Channel 1 (details…)

Channel 2 (details…)

Schedule B (every hour)Channel 1 (details…)

Channel 3 (details…)

Schedule C (every day)Channel 1 (details…)

Schedule … (…)Channel … (details…)

Schedule K (…)Channel … (details…)

Channel … (details…)

Other commands

Comments

Program Builder 2 (Program 2)

Schedule …Channel … (details…)


Other commands

Comments

Program Builder … (Program …)


Other commands

Comments

PROJECT BProgram Builder … (Program …)




Other commands

Comments

Program Builder … (Program …)




Other commands

Comments

PROJECT …Program Builder … (Program …)


Other commands

Comments

A channel can be scanned by more than one schedule.

A DT5/6xx program can contain up to four schedules (“timetables”, “agendas”).They are labelled A, B, C and D.A DT8xx program can contain up to eleven schedules.They are labelled A, B, C, D, E,…K.

Hierarchy: project >program (job) >

schedule >channel

FIGURE 6 DeLogger’s conceptual hierarchy — a project contains programs (jobs), a program contains schedules, a schedule contains dataTaker channels

CHAPTER 1: THE BIG PICTURE 1-4 Projects, Programs, Schedules and Channels 17

UM

-007

0-A

0

1-5 DELOGGER’S FOLDERSFigure 7 shows what’s inside the DeLogger folder after a typical installation.

Your DeLogger project folders and files (seeWeb publishing folders and generated files (seeDeLogger replay files (seeInstalled reports (seeSound files used by DeLoggerSystem-related filesWeb publishing templates (seeDeLogger add-on toolsAutomatic unload destination (used by early dataTakers only)For future useVC++ redistributable files

Clip art (see

Screen captures (seeSetup for initializing a new DeLogger user (seeFoxPro menus for the SiteAdmin utilityMessaging components (seeOPC server components (seeDeCopy/DeImage image file destination (Windows 95, 98 or ME only)

DeLogger’s installation folder

Excel & HTML files exported from DeLogger (see

Data database and Admin database (seeExcel DDE add-ins (see

dataTaker firmware files (see

FIGURE 7 Contents of the DeLogger folder (folders only; individual files not shown)

Figure 14 on page 22)

“dataTaker > Upgrade Firmware” on page 76)“Spread > Load Into External Spreadsheet” on page 106)

“General Shortcuts” on page 239)

“Mimic > Picture” on page 101)

“Databases” on page 226)“DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange)” on page 222)

“Installing DeLogger4 on Windows NT, 2000 and XP

“DeLogger Messaging” on page 237)“DeLogger OPC Server” on page 233)

“DeLogger Pro Web Publishing” on page 229)“Connections > Play” on page 40)

“Installed Reports and Secondary Reports” on page 200)

Figure 297 on page 230 and “Personalizing the Data Site” on page 232)


UM

-007

0-A

0

CHAPTER 2

MENUS

2-1 MENU OVERVIEWThis chapter covers DeLogger’s menus, from left to right. Each menu’s commands and submenus are presented in descending order of appearance on the menu.

Pro Only The “Pro” symbol indicates menu and dialog box items that are only available in DeLogger Pro™.

Menu bar

DT8xx only

DT8xx only

DT5/6xx only

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

6

6

7 8 9 10 11

FIGURE 8 DeLogger’s menus (1 of 2)

Page 21 Page 34 Page 37


CHAPTER 2: MENUS 2-1 Menu Overview 19

UM

-007

0-A

0

7Menu changes according to which DeLogger window is front-most.

Menu bar1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

7 7 7

7

7 7 7

7 7

8 9

10 11

FIGURE 9 DeLogger’s menus (2 of 2)



Page 124 Page 126

Page 127

Page 130

Page 134

Page 135


UM

-007

0-A

0

2-2 THE FILE MENUThe File menu contains DeLogger project-related commands.

Some of these commands are duplicated by buttons on DeLogger’s system toolbar — see page 169.

File > NewChoose File > New to create a new DeLogger project, or to create a new document within the current project.In the New Document dialog box that opens, click the appropriate button for the document type you want.

You can also create new documents using• the system toolbar — see Figure 253 (page 169)• DeLogger Pro’s project bar — see Figure 258

(page 171). When you add a new document, DeLogger automatically saves the project’s master file (see “.dlw File” on page 22).

One Project at a TimeYou can have only one project open at a time in DeLogger. Therefore, if you click the Project button (Figure 11) while a project is already open, DeLogger warns you that it must close the current project before it can open the new one (Figure 12).

FIGURE 10 DeLogger’s File menu

Create a new form, chart, mimic, text, spreadsheet or analysis window.

Create a new DT8xx program builder.

Create a new DT5/6xx program builder.

Create a new project.

Within the currently-open project

FIGURE 11 Click a button to create a new project, or to add a new document to the currently-open project.

FIGURE 12 Warning messages when changing projects

CHAPTER 2: MENUS 2-2 The File Menu 21

UM

-007

0-A

0

Naming a New ProjectWhen you create a new project (Figure 11), the New Project dialog box opens requiring you to name the project.

When you type a name in the New Project dialog box and click OK, DeLogger creates a corresponding folder containing a default set of project files in …\DeLogger\Project — see Figure 14.

File > OpenChoose File > Open to open a DeLogger project.If a project is already open, DeLogger warns you that it must close the current project before it can open another — see “One Project at a Time” on page 21.The Open dialog box appears (Figure 15), ready to open Project Files (*.dlw) file types in DeLogger’s Project folder.

In the dialog box, open the folder of the project you want, select its .dlw file, and click Open (Figure 16).

The project opens in DeLogger’s workspace with its windows displayed exactly as they were when you last closed the project (see “What’s Saved When” on page 208).

.dlw FileEach project has a .dlw file, its project master file, which stores housekeeping information for that project, such as data hub channel details and document window details (types, sizes, positions,…). To open a project, you open its .dlw file from within DeLogger (Figures 15 and 16).Figure 14 shows this file and the other files contained in a typical DeLogger project.See also “Saving Data Hub Details (Project-Specific)” on page 208, and “Saving Project Details” on page 209.

FIGURE 13 Name the new project here


Your project folders

For each new project you create, DeLogger generates a folder

(in DeLogger\Projects) containing a default set of files.

This project’s project master file

FIGURE 14 Typical project folders and files

(see “.dlw File” on page 22)

FIGURE 15 Open the folder of the project you want.

FIGURE 16 Open the .dlw file for the project you want.


UM

-007

0-A

0

File > Close

Choose

File

>

Close

to close the current project. DeLogger warns you that the project has been modified and asks if you want to save the changes.

For information on what DeLogger saves when you click

Yes

in the dialog box above, and what it saves automatically (whether you click

Yes

or

No

in the dialog box above), see “What’s Saved When” on page 208.

File > Save Project

This command saves all of the current project’s files — its .dlw master file, and its document windows along with their contents, settings, locations and states.The DeLogger Busy Indicator (Figure 257 on page 170) flashes red to confirm the save operation.When closing a project or exiting DeLogger, clicking

Yes

when asked if you want to save changes is equivalent to choosing the

Save Project

command.See also “Saving Project Details” on page 209.

File > Project Properties

Opens a dialog box in which you• remove (de-activate) documents from the current project

(they are not deleted; you can restore them later)• rename documents• open documents that were closed using their Close

button (you can also do this using the project bar — see Figure 258)

• specify alternative administration and/or data databases to be used by the current project.

FIGURE 17 Closing a project — save changes?

F

IGURE

18

Project Properties dialog box

See “Setting Up an Alternative Database” on page 227.


UM

-007

0-A

0

File > Performance

This command opens the DeLogger Performance dialog box, which contains options that allow you to fine-tune how your computer services DeLogger, other programs, and its own communications and system tasks.

Laptop is the safest, most robust setting. It ensures that DeLogger communication (which is mainly data retrieval) is processed reliably — but at the possible expense of other DeLogger functions.However, if you have a fast computer and want smoother or faster DeLogger operation, try changing to Desktop or Server. This re-allocates computer resources for improved performance of many DeLogger tasks (smoother updating in DeLogger’s views, for example). When changing to a faster setting, be aware that this could cause data corruption and system crashes, which are typical symptoms of a computer unable to keep up with the tasks asked of it.

For high-performance computer

Balances the relative priority of DeLogger’s data retrieval and data display tasks. Data retrieval is handled by several individual process tasks. Data display is handled by a single display task that services all the dynamic data views.When set to High (the default), data retrieval is given higher priority than data display. Use this setting when secure data retrieval is more important than immediate display updating.When set to Normal, data retrieval is given the same priority as data display. Use this setting when you want immediate display updating. (Only useful for “low” input data rates — if the rate of data input to DeLogger is too high, it may hinder display updating.)

For low- performancecomputer

Select the size of DeLogger’s input buffer.The default is Standard Program Size, which allows for STATUS10 and STATUS14 returns to be up to 8kB. For large dataTaker programs that generate large STATUS14 returns, select Large Program Size, which allows for STATUS10 and STATUS14 returns to be up to 16kB (although this may reduce DeLogger’s performance).

F

IGURE

19

Fine-tuning DeLogger’s performance

See also “Data Hub — Automatic Updating” on page 212.


UM

-007

0-A

0

File > Page Setup

When printing a form, spreadsheet or analysis window from DeLogger Pro, the Page Setup dialog box gives you control over headers and footers, margins, page order, centering, scaling, grid lines, and row and column headings.

Any plain text and/or special formatting codes you enter in the Header field and the Footer field of the Page Setup dialog box is added to every page of your printout.

Header and Footer Formatting Codes

Formatting codes allow you to align and format header and footer text, and to insert information from the current worksheet.There are three types of formatting codes and they must be entered in the following order:• alignment codes• font codes• worksheet codes

Enter codes in upper or lower case. Separate them with a space.

Alignment Codes

&L Left-aligns the characters that follow&C Centers the characters that follow&R Right-aligns the characters that followHeaders and footers are centered by default.Using an alignment code restarts a section.

&A, the default header code, prints the worksheet name.&P, the default footer code, prints the page number.

FIGURE 20 Page Setup dialog box (only available for form, spread and analysis windows in DeLogger Pro)

Font Codes

&B Use a bold font&I Use an italic font&U Underline the header&S Strikeout the header&"fontname" Use the specified font&nn Use the specified font size (must be a two-

digit number)

Worksheet Codes

&D Prints the current date&T Prints the current time&F Prints the workbook name&A Prints the worksheet name&P Prints the page number&P+n Prints the page number plus n (a number)&P–n Prints the page number minus n (a number)&& Prints an ampersand&N Prints the total number of pages


UM

-007

0-A

0

File > Print

To print the contents of any of DeLogger’s windows (except a DT800 program builder, which cannot be printed), bring the window to the front and choose

File

>

Print

. This opens one of the dialog boxes shown in Figure 21.

Before you print any window, set your printer and paper details (see “File > Print Setup” below). You can also preview the print job (see “File > Print Preview” next).

Printing a Mimic Window

The mimic window is a complete module and has its own dialog box for printing — see Figure 22 (it doesn’t use the standard Microsoft

®

Windows

®

Print dialog box). When you click

OK

in Figure 22 to print the front-most mimic window, DeLogger uses the computer’s default printer

1

. Therefore, if your system has more than one printer installed, you must set the printer that you want to

use to print the mimic window to be the computer’s default printer before you choose

File

>

Print

.

1

Default printer: choose

Start

>

Control Pane

l >

Printers

, right-click the printer you want to use, then choose

Set as Default

in the menu that pops up.

For chart, text and DT5/6xx program builder windows

For form, spread and analyse windows

For mimic windows

Opens the Print Preview dialog box

FIGURE 21 Print dialog boxes

(see Figure 22)

Tick Graph Window Background to print a light gray background behind each mimic object (similar to the background displayed when an object is selected on-screen in edit mode).

Select Exact Size to print the mimic window at a position on the page where the top-left corner is as defined in the Left and Top fields.

Tick Plotting Area Background to fill-in the background of mimic objects with a shade that contrasts to the active plot.

Select Proportionate to scale the mimic window to fit the page (if necessary).

Tick Border to print a border around the page.

Select Print Graphs to Max Size to print the mimic window the same size as on the screen.

Tick Maintain Aspect Ratio to retain the screen width-to-height ratio of the image on the printout.

F

IGURE

22

The mimic window “print” dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

File > Print Preview

Before printing, you can check that the current• form window• chart window• text window — entry screen only• spread window• analysis window• DT5/6xx program builder window

will print as you want by choosing

File

> Print Preview. There is no print preview for text window display screens, mimic windows or DT800 program builder windows.)

The print preview window replaces DeLogger’s main window.Therefore you must close the Print Preview window in order to continue working in DeLogger.Some sample print previews are shown in Figure 23.

Chart window print preview

Form, spread or analyse window

print preview

DT5/6xx program builder print preview

View one page at a time, or two pages at a time.

FIGURE 23 Typical print preview windows


UM

-007

0-A

0

File > Print SetupBefore printing, you must specify the printer you want to use along with its paper size, paper source and paper orientation. To do this, choose File > Print Setup.

FIGURE 24 Print Setup dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

File > Customize Choose File > Customize to set your preferences for many aspects of DeLogger Pro’s appearance.

Changes you make here are made current when you click Apply or OK in the Customize dialog box, and are automatically saved to the Windows system registry when you quit DeLogger (even when you click No in the “Do you wish to save the changes?” exit dialog box). Customize the background of DeLogger’s

workspace.See

Customize DeLogger’s startup splash screen.See

Customize the document tabs you see in DeLogger’s MDI (Multiple Document Interface) — that is, its main window.See

Hide/show DeLogger’s main toolbars and tooltips, create your own toolbars, and change their appearance.See

Customize DeLogger’s system tray icon.See

Specify whether window and toolbar sizes and positions are automatically remembered when you quit DeLogger (and reinstated the next time you launch DeLogger). Also turn off the display of the above pages in the Customize dialog box.See

FIGURE 25 Customize DeLogger Pro’s appearance

Figure 26.

Figure 27.

Figure 28.

Figure 29.

Figure 30.

Figure 31.

Click Apply to preview your changes.

Tick to apply an image (for example, a logo or a layout) as a background to DeLogger’s workspace, menu bar and toolbars.

Choose either• to Tile the image or Stretch it to fill

the background, or• to place it in one of nine locations

(and, if the image doesn’t completely cover the background, choose a color).

Tick to restrict the background image to the workspace only.

Choose the bitmap image file to be used as the background.

FIGURE 26 Customize dialog box (page 1) — Background Painter


UM

-007

0-A

0

When ticked, an image (as specified below) is displayed while DeLogger starts up.

Show the image for a fixed time during startup, or until startup is complete.

Choose the image file to be used as the splash window.

If you want a color in the splash window image file to appear "transparent", specify the color by doing one of the following:• Select, from a palette, a Color nearest to the color you want to appear transparent. If necessary,

expand the Color tolerance until you achieve the transparent effect (use the Preview button).• Select None for no transparent effect.• Enter the coordinates of pixels that are the color you want to appear transparent. (Open the

image file in a pixel-capable program such as MS Paint, move the pointer to the color, and read the coordinates on the status bar.) Use the Preview button to check the effect.

FIGURE 27 Customize dialog box (page 2) — Splash Window


Show or hide a tab for each window in DeLogger’s workspace.

explains the use of tabs.

Choose where the window tabs appear in the workspace.

FIGURE 28 Customize dialog box (page 3) — Tabbed MDI (the tabs in DeLogger’s main window)

Figure 1


UM

-007

0-A

0

Show or hide the system toolbar.Show or hide the connection toolbar.Show or hide the dataTaker toolbar.Show or hide the configuration toolbar.

These tick boxes duplicate the commands on the View > Toolbars submenu(see

Show or hide the small information windows that pop up when you move the pointer over a toolbar button.

These buttons are not yet supported.

Add or remove bevelled edges to toolbar buttons.Show or hide the toolbar grippers (handles) when Cool Look is turned on.Change the width of the toolbar borders.

FIGURE 29 Customize dialog box (page 4) — Toolbars

page 37).

Windows’ taskbar System tray

DeLogger icon context menu

Tick to display the DeLogger icon in Windows’ system tray. Then you can left- or right-click the icon to pop up a DeLogger context menu.Define the tray icon’s tooltip text.

Either select the default system tray icon, or locate another.


FIGURE 30 Customize dialog box (page 5) — Tray Icon


UM

-007

0-A

0

When ticked, these characteristics are automatically saved, then automatically reinstated the next time you start DeLogger.

Show or hide these five pages of the Customize dialog box (that is, customize the Customize dialog box).

FIGURE 31 Customize dialog box (page 6) — Workspace State

See “Text Screen Splitter” on page 91.


UM

-007

0-A

0

File > Register ProductOpens a dialog box in which you enable DeLogger Pro by entering your Pro serial number.2

File > Recent Project Files (List)Choose a project file from this list to open the project. DeLogger warns you that it must close the current project first (see “One Project at a Time” on page 21).

File > ExitThis command quits (shuts down) DeLogger. You’re asked if you want to save changes — see “What’s Saved When” on page 208.

2 If you’re using DeLogger (not Pro), the serial number field (Figure 32) contains 0000-0000, DeLogger’s default serial number.

Type your Pro serial number here.

FIGURE 32 Enabling DeLogger Pro


UM

-007

0-A

0

2-3 THE EDIT MENUThe entries that appear on the Edit menu change according to which DeLogger window is front-most (Figure 33).

Edit > UndoUndoes your last action.

Edit > RedoRedoes/re-applies your last action (multiple redo).

Edit > CutDeletes the selected text or object from DeLogger after copying it to the Windows clipboard.

Edit > CopyCopies the selected text, object or worksheet cell values to the clipboard.

Edit > PasteCopies the contents of the clipboard into DeLogger.

Edit > Paste ValuesFor form, spread and analysis windows only. Pastes previously-copied worksheet values (one or more cells) into the current worksheet.

Form.dlf

Chart.dlc

Text.dlt

Mimic.dlm

Spread.dls

Analyse.dla

Prog.dlp

Prog.dl8

FIGURE 33 DeLogger’s Edit menu


UM

-007

0-A

0

Edit > ClearFor form, spread and analysis windows only. Opens a dialog box that allows you to clear cell formatting and/or values. To remove• the formatting of the selected cells, select Formats• the data values from the selected cells, select Values• both formatting and values from the selected cells,

select All.

Edit > InsertFor form, spread and analysis windows only. Opens a dialog box that allows you to insert blank cells, rows or columns. Selected cells, rows or columns are displaced (shifted), not removed.To insert blank cells, select a range of cells of the size you want to insert and where you want them inserted, then choose Insert. In the dialog box that opens (Figure 35), select either Shift Cells Right or Shift Cells Down to specify where you want the displaced cells to go, then click OK.To insert blank rows or columns, select the number of rows or columns you want to insert (or just a few representative cells) where you want them inserted, then choose Insert. In the dialog box that opens (Figure 35), select either Entire Row or Entire Column, then click OK. New blank rows are inserted above the selected rows; new blank columns are inserted to the left of the selected columns.

Edit > DeleteFor form, spread and analysis windows only. Removes the selected cells, rows or columns.

Edit > Copy DownFor form, spread and analysis windows only. Copies the upper cell(s) in a selected group of cells into all of the lower cells in the group.

Edit > Copy RightFor form, spread and analysis windows only. Copies the left cell(s) in a selected group of cells into all cells to the right in the group.

Edit > FindOpens a dialog box that allows you to find strings (values, text or formulas)• in cells within the current form, spread or analysis

worksheet• in the current text window entry screen.

You can also bookmark them if you want (see Figure 220 on page 144).

Edit > ReplaceOpens a dialog box that allows you to find and replace strings (values, text or formulas)• in cells within the current form, spread or analysis

worksheet• in the current text window entry screen.

See Figure 36.

FIGURE 34 DeLogger’s worksheet Clear dialog box

FIGURE 35 DeLogger’s worksheet Insert dialog box

For worksheetsFor text windows (entry screen)

Marks every line containing the Find What text with a bookmark icon at the left-hand end of the line

FIGURE 36 DeLogger’s Find and Replace dialog boxes

CHAPTER 2: MENUS 2-3 The Edit Menu 35

UM

-007

0-A

0

Edit > Go To Matching BraceTo locate the mate of a brace character ( or ) in a text window’s edit screen, click the I -beam cursor on either side of the brace then choose Go To Matching Brace. The cursor jumps to the matching brace.See also “Text > Entry Screen > Go To Matching Brace” on page 96.

Edit > Select AllFor DT5/6xx program builder windows only. Allows you to select all channel icons on the front-most schedule tab at once.


UM

-007

0-A

0

2-4 THE VIEW MENU

View > Status BarShows or hides DeLogger Pro’s status bar (Figure 257 on page 170).

View > Project Bar Shows or hides DeLogger Pro’s project bar (Figure 258 on page 171).

View > ToolbarsCommands on this submenu show or hide• the system toolbar (Figure 253)• the connection toolbar (Figure 254)• the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255)• the configuration toolbar (Figure 256).

View > Show Alarm EventsWhen Show Alarm Events is ticked, DeLogger opens3 the event logs window at the Alarms tab whenever a dataTaker alarm is received.

View > Show Error EventsWhen Show Error Events is ticked, DeLogger opens3 the event logs window at the Errors tab whenever a dataTaker error is received.

View > Show Message EventsWhen Show Message Events is ticked, DeLogger opens3 the event logs window at the Messages tab whenever a DeLogger event occurs. You can alter the amount and scope of this reporting using the Confirmation Level slider (Figure 57).In addition, DeLogger considers some messages to be important enough to present you with the Messages tab even when Show Message Events is un-ticked. Instead of pop-up alert boxes, this is DeLogger’s way of warning you of serious problems that will affect the outcome of the current operation (for example, being unable to open a file).

View > View EventsShows or hides the event logs window (Figure 249 on page 167).

3 Or, if the event logs window is already open, brings it to the front.

FIGURE 37 DeLogger’s View menu

CHAPTER 2: MENUS 2-4 The View Menu 37

UM

-007

0-A

0

2-5 THE CONNECTIONS MENU

A DeLogger connection (or, more accurately, connection definition) is simply a group of communications settings; a user-defined and user-named software tool that you use to automate the process of linking DeLogger to a data site. See the “Data Site” Extras panel below, and Figure 43).DeLogger supports six types of connections and installs with several connections already defined. You can modify these, or create as many others as you want (see “Connections > Properties” beginning on page 42).

Multiple ConnectionsYou can connect DeLogger to more than one data site at a time:• DeLogger is limited to three connection types (serial,

network and file): it supports a maximum of four serial connections, and an unlimited number of network and file connections at the one time.

• DeLogger Pro supports any number of all six connection types.

Connections > ConnectOpens a dialog box that lists the available serial, network, modem and auto-answer modem connections. (For file and database connections, see “Connections > Play” on page 40.)In the dialog box (Figure 39), make a selection then click OK to begin the connection process.

You can also open this dialog box using• the Connect button on the connection toolbar —

see Figure 254 (page 169)• the F2 key on your keyboard• a right-click menu in DeLogger Pro’s project bar —

see Figure 258 (page 171).

FIGURE 38 DeLogger’s Connections menu

Data SiteA data site is any source of data that you connect to DeLogger. For example:• a DT500 connected by a serial comms cable• a DT800 connected by an Ethernet network or by a

modem link• a DeLogger replay file (a source of historical data)• a DeLogger Pro database session (another source of

historical data)The six types of DeLogger connections are• serial• network (Ethernet)• modem• auto-answer modem• file• database.

External DeLogger connections; for realtime data and unloaded data from dataTakers

Internal DeLogger connections; for replay (historical) data from replay files and database sessions

See also Figure 43.

See the Extras panel below.

Select a connection.Only available (not currently active) connections appear in the list.

Serial, network and modem connections appear here.Auto-answer modem connections appear here.

FIGURE 39 DeLogger’s Connect dialog box

Force the ConnectWhen the Force the connect option at the bottom of the Connect dialog box (Figure 39) is ticked, DeLogger does not validate or interrogate the device at the data site when connecting to it.Instead, DeLogger simply opens the computer’s comms port using the selected DeLogger connection’s baud rate and flow control settings.This is useful, for example• when using unreliable links• when using a pay-by-packet connection (saves

unnecessary traffic)• when the modems intercept certain characters (such as

the DEL character used for dataTaker identification).


UM

-007

0-A

0

Connections > Manual Integrity Check Forces DeLogger Pro to re-synchronise the contents of the appropriate data hub connection tab with the currently-connected4 dataTaker.

How the Data Hub Gets Its InformationWhen a dataTaker is programmed, it creates an internal listing of every item specified in the program (real channel details, calculations, system information and much more). These items return information when the program is running.This data-source list is available to any host software by means of the STATUS10 command (DT5/6xx) or the STATUS14 command (DT8xx). When connecting4 to a dataTaker, DeLogger automatically issues the appropriate5 STATUS command and creates the data hub listings from the responses (for example, see Figure 288).The value of this arrangement is that it allows dataTaker data loggers to be programmed by other means, and DeLogger is able to interrogate them during connection and know the data that will be returned.

DeLogger, DeLogger Pro and the Data HubWhen DeLogger disconnects from a dataTaker, DeLogger clears the data hub listing for that connection. Then, when DeLogger next connects to that connection, it once again establishes the data hub listing for that connection. When there is no active connection, the channel choice lists for the various DeLogger views have no available channels.However, when DeLogger Pro disconnects from a dataTaker, DeLogger Pro maintains the data hub listing for that connection. When there is no active connection, the channel choice lists for the various DeLogger views still show the available channels. When DeLogger Pro next connects to that same connection, it checks that the data hub listing matches the dataTaker in accordance with the Synchronise channel list to dataTaker tick box in the Configuration > Defaults dialog box (see Figure 57 on page 52, “Connection Defaults” on page 54 and “Data Hub — Automatic Updating” on page 212).

Re-SynchroniseHowever, the program in the dataTaker may change dynamically in a way that DeLogger Pro cannot detect, or other operational situations may develop where this synchrony between DeLogger Pro and the dataTaker is lost. This may be seen as data hub errors being reported in the Messages tab of the event logs window (Figure 249). The Connections > Manual Integrity Check command provides the means of forcing DeLogger Pro to re-synchronise its data hub with the current dataTaker.

Connections > DisconnectOpens a dialog box that lists the currently-active connections. Highlight a connection, then click OK to disconnect it.

You can also disconnect using• the Disconnect button on the connection toolbar

— see Figure 254 (page 169)• a right-click menu in DeLogger Pro’s Connections sub-

bar — see Figure 258 (page 171).

4 When there’s more than one connected site, DeLogger asks you to select the connection by opening a dialog box similar to that shown in Figure 66 (page 63).

5 So that DeLogger knows which command to use, you specify the dataTaker series when creating DeLogger connection definitions — see the dataTaker field in Figure 45, for example.

FIGURE 40 DeLogger’s Disconnect dialog box

CHAPTER 2: MENUS 2-5 The Connections Menu 39

UM

-007

0-A

0

Connections > PlayOpens a dialog box that lists available replay connections — that is, file and database connections.6

In the dialog box (Figure 42), make a selection then click OK to begin the connection process. If a default file or session is not specified in the connection definition — Figure 54 or Figure 55 — DeLogger asks you to select one.When the replay control panel opens (bottom of Figure 42), the channels in your chosen replay file or database session become available in the choice lists of the various DeLogger views. Choose the channels in the views you want, then click the replay control panel’s Play button to start the data flow.

The Play command is duplicated by the button on the Connection toolbar (Figure 254 on page 169).IMPORTANT File and database connections, and replay files and database sessions, are model-specific. (When you create file and database connections, you specify the model of dataTaker that the connection is intended for in the dataTaker field in Figures 54 and 55.) Therefore, you must take care to• play only DT5/6xx replay files using DT5/6xx file

and database connections• play only DT8xx replay files using DT8xx file and

database connections.

Historical Data, Replay DataHistorical data is stored data — data logged in a dataTaker or its memory card, data saved in DeLogger’s data database, or data saved in a text file (.txt) or a replay file (.dlr). The term is used to distinguish data that is not realtime data.Replay data is a specific type of historical data — it’s historical data that is saved• in a file (called a replay file; .dlr), or• in a data set in DeLogger’s data database

in a format that DeLogger can• replay to its dynamic data views (form, chart, text and

mimic windows), just as if the data was arriving in real time (except that you can control the speed of the replay — see the replay control panel in Figure 42), and

• load into its static data views (spreadsheet and analysis windows) for calculations, graphing, and so on.

Each data set saved in DeLogger’s data database is called a session — see “Logging Sessions” on page 60 and “Unload Sessions” on page 64. You can save both realtime data and logged data unloaded from a dataTaker as a session — see Figure 41.A replay file is just another data site: to link to it, you use a DeLogger file connection (Figure 54).A database session is just another data site: to link to it, you use a DeLogger database connection (Figure 55).As well as dataTaker data, historical data can contain configuration information, report entries, dataTaker alarms and dataTaker errors.See also “Replay File Utilities” on page 207.DeLogger can also replay dataTaker unload files (.dx8 and .dxu).

DeLogger / DeLogger ProHistorical Data

Transferrealtime data

Text file (.txt) —

Logging session —

Unloadlogged data

Replay file (.dlr)

Logging session —

Unload session

CSV file (.csv)

FIGURE 41 Creating historical data in DeLogger

see “Configuration > Database Channel Logging Sessions” (page 60)

see “Text > Display Screen > Capture Data To Disk” (page 92)

see “Configuration > Database Channel Logging Sessions” (page 60)

see “dataTaker > Unload” (page 64)

6 For the other connection types, see “Connections > Connect” on page 38.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Drag the pointer to adjust replay speed.

➌ The Replay control panel opens.Name of the file or session to be replayed

➊ Select a replay connection then click OK.

Not used

ResetPausePlay

➋ If there’s no Default File or Session assigned to the selected connection, the appropriate dialog box opens prompting you to select one.

Replay progress bar

Date and time of the data point currently being replayed

File and database connections (replay connections) appear here.

FIGURE 42 (Re)playing historical data (that is, a replay file, a database unload session, or a database logging session)

(To create these connections, see Figures 54 and 55.)

(Figure 54) (Figure 55)See Figure 145 (page 105).


UM

-007

0-A

0

Connections > PropertiesThe Connections > Properties command opens the Connections dialog box in which you create and edit• three types of connections in DeLogger — serial,

network and file connections• an additional three types of connections in DeLogger

Pro — modem, auto-answer modem and database connections.

This is covered in Figures 45 to 55.

You use DeLogger connections to link DeLogger to data sites. You create the connections you need, and DeLogger stores each one as a record in its administration database.NOTE The term connection as used in DeLogger is actually a truncation of connection definition.

Figure 44 shows how to use the control buttons that are common to the tabs in the Connections dialog box, and to other database configuration dialog boxes.

DeLogger / DeLogger ProSerial connection

Network connection

Modem connection

Auto-Answer Modem connection

File connection

Database connection

External data sitesdataTakers

(sources of realtimeand unloaded data)

Internal data sitesReplay files and

database sessions(sources of historical data)

DATASUPERVISION

Datahub

FIGURE 43 DeLogger connection types (see also the “Data Site” Extras panel on page 38)

➋ Click Edit to unlock the record.

➌ When you’ve made the changes you want, click Accept. Your changes are immediately saved.

➍ Make changes to other records then Close the dialog box.

➊ Locate the database record. (Some dialog boxes also have a Find field to help you do this.)

To locate an existing record, use the previous/next buttons, or type the first few characters of the record’s name in the Find field.

Create a New record.

FIGURE 44 Using the database dialog box controls


UM

-007

0-A

0

Connections — SerialTo create and edit serial connections (direct comms cable, or direct-link radio modems) in DeLogger, choose Connections > Properties and click the Serial tab in the dialog box that opens. Figure 45 explains.

DeLogger stores each serial connection as a record in its administration database.You can use the SiteAdmin utility to create a report that details these connection definitions — see “Reports > Site Listing” on page 206.

PC Serial Port PropertiesClicking the PC serial port Properties button in Figure 45 opens a dialog box in which you specify the selected serial port’s baud detection mode, baud rate and, for a DT8xx dataTaker, the type of flow control. Figures 46 and 47 explain.

Select the computer’s serial port to use for

the connection.

When ticked, DeLogger sends a line

feed character followed by a 300ms

pause before each command. This ensures that a

sleeping dataTaker has time to wake up

to receive the command.

DeLogger normally carries out a STATUS check when attempting to make a connection (see Tick Skip STATUS check if you don’t want DeLogger to do this (for example, if you want to establish the connection regardless of poor line quality or modem idiosyncracies that cause the STATUS check to fail). Un-tick Disconnect if STATUS check fails when you want DeLogger to carry out the STATUS check but not disconnect if the check fails.

Give every connection a

unique name.

When ticked, DeLogger ignores corrupt returned data (data records that fail error checks).

When ticked, DeLogger does not check that the dataTaker it connects to matches the dataTaker series defined in the dataTaker field above. Only use when connecting to dataTakers with very old firmware versions that do not support Device Check.

Select the model of the dataTaker that this connection is intended for (so that DeLogger can apply the appropriate protocol to the connection).

Set the Properties of the computer’s serial port. See

Host RS-232 port

RS-232 comms cable

Serial (COM) port

FIGURE 45 Connection properties dialog box — creating and editing serial connections

Figures 46 and 47.

See Figure 44 (page 42).

“Data Hub — Automatic Updating” on page 212).


UM

-007

0-A

0

DT5/6xx

Automatic baud rate detection DeLogger attempts to connect to a

dataTaker connected to the selected PC serial port beginning at the baud

rate selected in the drop-down list.If the baud rate does not match that of the

dataTaker’s RS-232 port, DeLogger re-attempts connection using the available

baud rates in turn until it finds a match.Manual baud rate detection DeLogger attempts to connect to a dataTaker connected to the selectedPC serial port ONLY at the baud rate selected in the drop-down list.The factory defaults are• 57600 baud for DT800• 9600 baud for DT5/6xx Series 3• 4800 baud for DT5/6xx Series 2.

DeLogger spends a longer period testing each baud rate in case the dataTaker is responding slowly to host communications (because of running a large program or scanning very quickly, for example).DeLogger tests each baud rate quickly.

Select a baud rate:• For automatic baud rate detection, this is the first baud

rate that DeLogger tries when attempting to match the dataTaker’s baud rate.

• For manual baud rate detection, this is the only baud rate that DeLogger uses.

FIGURE 46 Baud Rate Settings dialog box — DT5/6xx

DT8xx

Select Hardware if the dataTaker is set for hardware flow control (HWFC or RTS/CTS).

Select Software if the dataTaker is set for software flow control (SWFC or XON/XOFF).

The factory default is Software flow control.

FIGURE 47 Baud Rate Settings dialog box — DT8xx

See Figure 46.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Connections — NetworkTo create and edit Ethernet network connections in DeLogger, choose Connections > Properties and click the Network tab in the dialog box that opens. Figure 48 explains.DeLogger stores each network connection as a record in its administration database.

You can use the SiteAdmin utility to create a report that lists these network connection definitions — see “Reports > Port” on page 206.You can connect a DT8xx dataTaker directly to a TCP/IP or UDP network, but a DT5/6xx dataTaker requires a serial-to-Ethernet adaptor (such as a Lantronix Device Server).

Type the IP Address assigned to the

dataTaker that this connection is intended for.

We recommend Stream (TCP) mode.


unique name.

Select the model of the dataTaker that this connection is intended for.

Type 3001 for a DT5/6xx using a serial-to-Ethernet adaptor, 8 for a DT800 using TCP/IP, or 7 for a DT800 using UDP.

Ethernet

Tick if you want DeLogger to initiate network SO_KEEPALIVE packets, which avoids the computer timing-out an idle TCP/IP connection between DeLogger and a DT800.(This is not necessary for a DT5/6xx dataTaker and its requisite serial-to-Ethernet adaptor.)

When ticked, DeLogger ignores corrupt returned data (data records that fail error checks).

FIGURE 48 Connection properties dialog box — creating and editing Ethernet network connections


See Figure 45 onpage 43.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Connections — Modem To create and edit DeLogger Pro modem connections for remote DT5/6xx and DT8xx data sites, choose Connections > Properties and click the Modem tab in the dialog box that opens. Figure 49 explains.

DeLogger Pro stores each modem connection as a record in its administration database.


unique name.

Standard Windows dialing set-up

Data site phone details

Standard Windows device set-up

Tick if you want DeLogger to accept incoming calls from

the data site.

After the remote site has dialed-in to

DeLogger (and before disconnection),

DeLogger sends any text in this field back

to the site. You can use this, for example, to confirm successful

dial-outs, or reset any local alarm

annunciation.DeLogger does not

verify the syntax.

Select the model of the dataTaker that this connection is

intended for.

Wiredmodem link

Host computer’smodem

dataTaker’smodem

Wirelessmodem link

Satellitelink

Host RS-232port

Serial (COM)port

Tick if you want DeLogger Pro to delete the connected DT800’s alarms (if they’ve been automatically unloaded) prior to disconnecting.

Assign dial-in and dial-out passwords

Tick MM-1 Support if a Modem Manager is installed at the data site.

FIGURE 49 Connection properties dialog box — creating and editing modem connections

See Figure 50.See Figure 51.

— see Figure 52.

See Figure 45 on page 43.



UM

-007

0-A

0

FIGURE 50 Windows Dialing Properties dialog box

FIGURE 51 Typical Windows configure modem dialog box

FIGURE 52 DeLogger’s Security (password) dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

Connections — Auto-Answer Modem External data sites that are connected to DeLogger by modem (Figure 49) — such as DT5/6xx or DT8xx dataTakers, or Modem Managers — can dial in to DeLogger Pro for automatic unloading of their alarms7. If DeLogger Pro recognizes the remote device and dial-ins are allowed (see “Auto-Answer Prerequisites” below), DeLogger Pro automatically handles the call and supervises the unloading of alarms from the site. DeLogger Pro’s auto-answer modem connections manage this.To create and edit auto-answer modem connections, choose Connections > Properties and click the Auto Answer Modem tab in the dialog box that opens. Figure 53 explains. DeLogger Pro stores each auto-answer modem connection as a record in its administration database.Note the following:• You only need to create one auto-answer modem

connection per modem.• The modem specified in an auto-answer modem

connection can be different from any modem already specified in a modem connection. In fact, it’s often preferable for DeLogger Pro to dial out using one modem and receive calls on another.

The Auto-Answer ProcessWhen a Modem Manager or DT800 dials in, DeLogger Pro compares its password (the site ID for a Modem Manager; the serial number for a DT800) with the modem connection passwords in the database (Figure 52). If a password match exists and if that record has Accept Incoming Calls enabled, DeLogger Pro automatically manages the call and unloads the alarms from the data site.After unloading the alarms, DeLogger stays connected for 60 seconds in case there are any responses from the site. (You can adjust this delay using Regedit.exe to alter the key HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Discbell\ DeLogger\MM01\ActionResponseDelay (defined in ms).

Auto-Answer PrerequisitesBefore DeLogger Pro can recognize the data site and unload its alarms, you must do the following:• Create a modem connection for the site as described

in Figure 49.You do this to enter the data site’s details into the database so that DeLogger Pro can check the site’s password, device type and other information when it receives a call from the site.

• In the modem connection you create for the site (Figure 49), be sure to tick Accept Incoming Calls (in the Site Details area of the dialog box).

7 You can include an embedded action string in the alarm to unload data.


unique name.

Standard Windows device set-up —

specify the modem used (at the computer end of the link) by the

remote device.

FIGURE 53 Connection properties dialog box — creating and editing auto-answer modem connections


See Figure 51.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Connections — FileTo create and edit connections to DeLogger replay files, choose Connections > Properties and click the File tab in the dialog box that opens. Figure 54 explains.You use file connections to play replay files — see “Connections > Play” on page 40.DeLogger stores each file connection as a record in its administration database.

IMPORTANT When creating a file connection, be sure to select the dataTaker model (in the dataTaker field) that matches the replay file(s) you intend to play through it (replay files are model-specific). This is important because the model you select determines the protocol that DeLogger applies when playing replay files through the connection.We recommend that you create file connections named, say, MyFile500 and MyFile800, each with its appropriate model selected, to minimize possible confusion.


unique name.

Type the path to the replay file you want assigned to this connection, or click the Browse button and locate the file in the dialog box that opens.If you leave this field blank, DeLogger prompts you for a file when you use this connection — see

Select the model of the dataTaker that

created the file(s) you intend to replay using

this connection.

FIGURE 54 Connection properties dialog box — creating and editing file connections


“Connections > Play” on page 40.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Connections — Database To create and edit connections to DeLogger Pro database sessions (see “Logging Sessions” on page 60), choose Connections > Properties and click the Database tab in the dialog box that opens. Figure 55 explains.You use database connections to replay database sessions— see “Connections > Play” on page 40.DeLogger Pro stores each database connection as a record in its administration database.

IMPORTANT When creating a database connection, be sure to select the dataTaker model (in the dataTaker field) that matches the session(s) you intend to play through it (database sessions are model-specific). This is important because the model you select determines the protocol that DeLogger applies when playing database sessions through the connection.We recommend that you create database connections named, say, MySession500 and MySession800, each with its appropriate model selected, to minimize possible confusion.


unique name.

Select the logging session you want assigned to this connection.If you leave this field blank, DeLogger Pro prompts you for a session when you use this connection — see

Select the model of the dataTaker that

created the session(s) you intend to replay

using this connection.

FIGURE 55 Connection properties dialog box — creating and editing database connections


“Configuration > Database Channel Logging Sessions” on page 60.


UM

-007

0-A

0

2-6 THE CONFIGURATION MENU

Use the Configuration menu to specify and manage the following aspects of DeLogger:• Defaults General DeLogger preferences for global

settings, database channel logging mode filters and connection defaults — Figure 57.

• Actions Create and edit action definitions to automate tasks and processes — Figure 58.

• Reports Create and edit reports ready to run on the data database — Figure 61.

• Web Publishing Settings for DeLogger Pro’s web publishing capability — Figure 62.

• Data Hub Channels Manage data channels in DeLogger Pro’s data hub8 (set properties for primary and virtual channels, create virtual channels, and specify a channel’s visibility, conditions, dependancy, alarm and store settings) — Figure 63.

• Database Channel Logging Sessions Define up to 10 sessions (data sets). Each session can log data from one or more channels of any or all of the current connections into DeLogger Pro’s data database — Figure 64.

FIGURE 56 DeLogger’s Configuration menu

8 See the “Data Hub” Extras panel on page 62.

CHAPTER 2: MENUS 2-6 The Configuration Menu 51

UM

-007

0-A

0

Configuration > DefaultsThis command opens DeLogger’s Defaults dialog box (Figure 57) in which you set global9 preferences, and configure a variety of DeLogger functions such as• how DeLogger launches• the logging of dataTaker errors and alarms• the logging of dataTaker data• interaction with connected dataTakers• how much feedback DeLogger gives you in the

Messages tab of the event logs window.To change these settings, enable the dialog box by clicking its Edit button, make the changes, then click the Accept button. When you click Accept, the settings are immediately saved. Finally, close the dialog box by clicking Close.

Load Existing Message EntriesThe following happens when Load Existing Message Entries (in the Global Settings area of Figure 57) is ticked:• Any DeLogger message events that occur are logged

in the message.txt file in DeLogger’s installation directory.

• When DeLogger starts, the entire message.txt file is loaded into the Messages tab of the event logs window (Figure 249).

In the Messages tab, previous entries are shown in gray text and new entries are shown in black text. Any color attributes you see in the Messages tab are applied by DeLogger and are not contained in the messages.txt file.DeLogger automatically supervises message.txt (limits its maximum size) and, because it’s a simple text file, you 9 That is, common to all projects.

When Open Last Project is un-ticked, you’re presented with the Welcome dialog box (instead of the last project you used) when you start DeLogger.

Use this slider to set the amount of feedback that DeLogger gives you in the Messages tab of the event logs window

If you’re a new DeLogger user, start with High (the default). Then reduce the setting as you become more familiar and confident with DeLogger.

Maximum feedbackNo feedback (DeLogger alerts you

to critical events only)

Tick if you want dataTaker errors or

alarms automatically logged.

FIGURE 57 Configuring DeLogger — global Defaults


See “Logging Errorsand Alarms” on

page 53.

Data filters for database channel logging sessions — see “Channel Logging Mode” on page 53.

See “ConnectionDefaults” on

page 54.

(Figure 249 on page 167).

See “Load Existing Message Entries” on page 52.


UM

-007

0-A

0

can open it in a text editor (such as Notepad, WordPad or Word) for perusal or printing.

Logging Errors and AlarmsTick Log Errors and/or Log Alarms (Figure 57) if you want errors and alarms generated by connected dataTakers to be logged. Later you’ll be able to display this information and run reports on it.If you don’t tick these options, connected dataTakers still generate error and alarm messages but DeLogger doesn’t collect them or display them (in the Errors tab and the Alarms tab of the Event Logs window — Figure 249 on page 167). However, they can still be displayed in a text window.NOTE — ACTIONS AND ALARMS If you want DeLogger to run an action10 when an alarm is received from a connected dataTaker, you must tick Log Alarms.NOTE — ERROR AND ALARM LOGS To delete the error and alarm logs, you must use SiteAdmin — see “Administration > Log File Administration” on page 205.

Channel Logging Mode Using the data hub, you can log data arriving from a dataTaker into DeLogger Pro’s data database.11 And if you want, you can instruct the data hub to carry out conditional and dependancy checks12 on this data and apply an appropriate status flag13 (channel “quality" — invalid, partially-invalid, or valid). Each status flag is stored in the database along with its data point.This function allows you to specify the type of incoming data to be logged as sessions in DeLogger Pro’s data database. You set these general flag options in the Channel Logging Mode area of Figure 57:

10 See “Configuration > Actions” on page 55.

11 To do this, you must define one or more logging sessions — see “Configuration > Database Channel Logging Sessions” on page 60.

12 See the Conditional Settings and Dependant Settings screens in Figure 289 on page 213.

13 Don’t confuse this flag with those that appear in the Flags column of the Data Hub Channels dialog box (Figure 63) — they are not the same.

Radi

o bu

ttons

Log All Data All selected channel data is logged regardless of its status.

Log Only Valid and Partially Invalid Data

Data points can be flagged as partially-invalid if the result is obtained from a collection of data points of which some are invalid (that is, the data has failed conditional or dependancy checks).

Log Valid/Partially Invalid Data and Failed Conditional

As above but also allows data that has failed a conditional test.

Log Valid/Partially Invalid Data and Failed Dependant

As above but allows data that has failed a dependancy test.

Tick

box

Log only changed data values

If the new value of the data point is the same as its previous value, tick this option to stop the repeated data from being logged. This can be useful if you have a process that gives fixed readings when not operational.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Connection DefaultsIn the Connection Defaults area of Figure 57, you can tell DeLogger to do the following when connecting to a dataTaker:• Configure its data hub to reflect the list of data values

that the dataTaker is programmed to measure/ convert/calculate for each schedule. The list is then available to DeLogger’s data view windows so that incoming data can be served to them from the data hub.

• Check if a DT800’s firmware can be updated.• Specify ULAST (unload last) tracking — see “ULAST

List” on page 64.Here are the options:Synchronise channel list to dataTaker

This option determines the global default behaviour when making a connection to a dataTaker. With it ticked, DeLogger issues status commands to enable it to synchronise to the program and channels defined within the dataTaker. See also “Data Hub — Automatic Updating” on page 212, and “DeLogger, DeLogger Pro and the Data Hub” on page 39.

Do not synchronise channel list if dataTaker has reset

This option determines the global default behaviour when making a connection to a dataTaker. With it ticked, DeLogger does not synchronise to the dataTaker if there is no program even if the Synchronise channel list to dataTaker option is ticked. This stops the channel definitions from being removed from DeLogger if the dataTaker has been reset.

Allow firmware upgrade checking(DT800 only)

When ticked, DeLogger automatically checks the DT800’s firmware (operating system) version every time a connection is made to it. Then, if your version of DeLogger is capable of supporting newer firmware, DeLogger prompts you to upgrade.If you’re happy with your DT800’s existing firmware or don’t want to see these reminders, un-tick this option.

Track ULAST — unload from end of last unload (DT800 only)

When ticked, DeLogger Pro stores (in the Windows system registry) the date and time of the last record of the last DT800 unload operation. Then, the next time you carry out an unload operation, this date and time is displayed in the DT800 unload dialog box (Figure 68 on page 65) so that you can select it as the start point of the next unload.ULAST information is also displayed• in the Jobs tab of the DT8xx status

dialog box (Figure 75)• in the connections sub-bar

(Figure 259)• in the first DT8xx unload dialog

box (Figure 68).ULAST is Project specific

When ticked, DeLogger Pro adds a project-specific tag to each ULAST date/time pair that it stores, so that only the current project’s ULAST values appear in the ULAST list in Figure 68. Users who apply multiple projects to a single dataTaker may find this helpful.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Configuration > Actions DeLogger Pro has an inbuilt scripting capability. You use this to create scripts (macros) that instruct DeLogger Pro to perform actions (tasks or processes) automatically. Figure 59 shows the types of actions that DeLogger Pro can carry out.Actions can be as simple as running a sound file when you launch DeLogger (a siren alert, for example), or as complex as sequentially dialling a number of remote sites after midnight, downloading the data from each site, clearing the logged data from the dataTaker at each site, and preparing a plot or report of the logged data.The Configuration > Actions command opens the dialog box in which you create and edit DeLogger Pro actions (action definitions, to be precise). DeLogger Pro stores these actions in its administration database. Therefore they are global — that is, available to all projects.

For more information, see “Actions” beginning on page 179.You can use the SiteAdmin utility to create a report that lists the actions you create here — see “Reports > Action Listing” on page 206.NOTE These actions are internal to DeLogger Pro. Don’t confuse them with dataTaker alarm actions.

Action TriggersDeLogger Pro actions can be triggered as follows:• Manually in the form and mimic windows by means of

user-defined buttons. See• “Form > Object” on page 81• “Mimic > Buttons” on page 101.

• Manually from the Actions tab of the project bar. See “The Actions Sub-Bar” on page 172.

Select another action to run after

completing this one.

If you want the action to play a sound, type the path to the sound file here, or click the

Browse button and locate the file

in the dialog box that opens.

If you want the action to run a report, select

the report here.Also select the report

destination: a new Window, the

Printer specified in the report, or a .htm

file in DeLogger’s Publish folder

Every action you create must have a unique name.An action trigger uses this name to

identify its action.

If you want the action to run one or more DeLogger Pro macros, type the macros here, or click the Macro Builder button to open the Macro Builder dialog box

If you want the action to run a Windows executable file (.exe), type the path to the file here, or click the Browse button and locate the file in the dialog box that opens.Tick to run the .exe file minimized.Type any command-line parameters for the .exe file here.

If you want the action to set or clear a channel on a digital output board installed in the computer, select the Digital Board and its Channel.Click Set if you want the action to set the output TRUE.Click Clear if you want the action to set the output FALSE.

If a dataTaker alarm initiated the action, DeLogger Pro automatically sends any text you type here to the dataTaker that initiated the alarm.Use this to send commands back to the dataTaker in response to the action.

FIGURE 58 Configuring DeLogger — creating and editing an internal (DeLogger Pro) action


(Figure 59)

(see “DeLogger ProWeb Publishing” on

page 229).

(Figure 60).


UM

-007

0-A

0

• Externally by alarm messages from connected dataTaker data loggers. See “Triggering Actions from External Alarms” below.

• Internally by DeLogger Pro alarms. See Figure 290 on page 214.

• Automatically by the Schedule utility. See “Schedule Utility” on page 203.

• By another action See “Chaining Actions” below.Figure 59 illustrates these triggers, along with the tasks that an action can carry out.

Triggering Actions from External AlarmsdataTaker alarm messages can have the names of DeLogger Pro actions embedded within the message. The embedded action names must appear within {} braces in the alarm actionText . For example:

DeLogger Pro scans incoming dataTaker alarm messages for embedded action names. When it locates one, DeLogger Pro checks its administration database

for an action record with the same name. If it finds such a record, DeLogger Pro executes the action’s settings as specified in the actions dialog box (Figure 58).

Chaining ActionsAn action can run another action, allowing for complex action chains to be created. Specify this using the Chain to field in Figure 58.See also “Chaining Actions” on page 180.

AutoRun ActionSee “AutoRun — DeLogger Pro’s Startup Action” on page 179.

DeLogger ProActions Engine

External (dataTaker) alarms

Internal (DeLogger Pro) alarms

Schedule utility

Another action

Form window andmimic window buttons

Project bar’s Actions tab

TRIGGER

TRIGGER

TRIGGER

TRIGGER

TRIGGER

TRIGGERRun another DeLogger Pro action (chain).

Run a DeLogger Pro macro.

Play a sound.

Run a DeLogger Pro report.

Run a Windows program (.exe file).

Set or clear a channel on a digital output board installed in the computer.If a dataTaker alarm initiated the action, respond to the dataTaker.

Specify each action’s output(s)Action Triggers Actions

FIGURE 59 DeLogger Pro actions — triggers and tasks

in Figure 58.

Pump Failure{PumpOffAction}

List of DeLogger Pro macro templates

Select a DeLogger Pro macro template from the list, then click thePaste button.Repeat to build a macro sequence.In each macro template, remember to replace any placeholders (the text between double quotes " ") with your own quantifiers. Do this here, or in the Macro Text field when you’ve closed the Macro Builder.

FIGURE 60 Macro Builder dialog box (click the Macro Builder button in Figure 58)

(see “Action Macro Commands” beginning on page 184)

(Figure 58)

See also “Creating Macro Scripts” on page 181.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Configuration > Reports This command opens the dialog box in which you create and edit secondary reports14 (report definitions, to be precise). You run secondary reports on any of DeLogger’s databases.As Figure 61 shows, you supply one or more parameters (to define the chunk of data for the report), and a printer (DeLogger Pro formats the data accordingly). These become the report’s defaults. (You can temporarily change these later when you run the report.)Having created a secondary report, you can then employ it using either• the Reports > Database Reports command (see

page 129), or• an action (see “Configuration > Actions” on page 55

and “Actions” on page 179).DeLogger Pro stores each secondary report as a record in its administration database.

Parameter FieldsIn the Parameter fields in the secondary Reports dialog box (Figure 61), you can either make selections from the drop-down lists or type the parameter text strings directly.

The parameters are criteria (in the form of text strings) that define the information you want returned by the report, such as session names, DeLogger Pro global formulas (see “Global Formulas” on page 202), and internal DeLogger variables.See “Report-Writing Guidelines” beginning on page 202 (particularly step 4.) for more information about report parameters.NOTE For every Parameter field in which you select a parameter in the secondary report, there must be a corresponding Crystal Reports® formula defined in the installed report. For example, if a particular installed report only has fields for listing two data sets, then you can only specify two parameters in any secondary report based on this installed report.

Printer FieldIf you leave the Printer field blank in the secondary Reports dialog box (Figure 61), DeLogger Pro “prints” to the screen (and formats the report for the screen). Otherwise, select one of the computer’s printers from the list to be the report’s default printer.You could use this, for example, to create two secondary reports of the same session’s data — a “viewed session report” and a “printed session report”.

14 That is, reports based on DeLogger Pro installed reports — see “Installed Reports and Secondary Reports” on page 200.

Description of the secondary report (to help you remember

what the report does).The description

appears in the first screen of the

Reports meu > Database Reports

dialog box

List of installed reports.Select the installed report on which you want to

base the secondary report.

Select or type default report criteria here.You can change these when you run the report — see the second screen of the Reports meu > Database Reports dialog box

Type a short name for the secondary report.The name appears in the first screen of the Reports meu > Database Reports dialog box

Go to previous/next record.

FIGURE 61 Configuring DeLogger — creating and editing a secondary report


See also “Parameter Fields” above.

(Figure 192).

(Figure 192).

(Figure 192).

See “Printer Field”above.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Configuration > Web Publish This command opens the dialog box in which you configure DeLogger Pro to publish data views in HTML format to the following destinations:• To a local folder (the Publish folder in DeLogger’s

installation folder), from where they can be made available to a connected intranet and viewed using browser software (IE 5.5 or later is preferred) — called intranet (local) publishing.

• To the Internet or other web server using FTP — called Internet (WWW) publishing.

Data views you can publish in this way for browser viewing are form windows, chart windows, mimic windows, spreadsheet window charts and analysis window charts.See “DeLogger Pro Web Publishing” beginning on page 229 for more information.

FTP DelaysAs discussed in “Manual and Automatic Web Publishing” on page 229, the form, chart and mimic views can be set to publish• on update (controlled by Publish Delay in Figure 62),

or• by manual triggering (also uses Publish Delay).

When triggered, the view is placed in a queue awaiting actioning. Then when the Publish Delay timer has expired, the queue is serviced and the html/jpeg files are produced and put in the local hard disk’s Publish folder.If selected for internet publishing, the names of the files are placed on the FTP queue and the FTP delay to send timer is started. When this timer expires, Delogger attempts a connection to the FTP server and transfers the queued files.Once the transfer is complete, DeLogger remains connected to the FTP server for a time controlled by FTP delay to disconnect. During this period any other files added to the queue are sent immediately. When the timer expires, the FTP connection is dropped and the sequence starts again. By using this method, updates can be grouped to save connection costs, which is important if using a dial-up link.See also “Publishing Frequency” on page 232.

Tick to enable publishing to an

intranet (that is, to DeLogger’s

Publish folder).

The port number to use for FTP

(default is 21).Tick Passive

transfer mode if an NAT firewall

exists between the client and the

server.

When ticked, messages relating to web publishing

and FTP transfer are displayed in the

Messages tab of the event logs window.

Tick BOTH to enable publishing

to an Internet destination.

For access to the destination serverLocation (path on destination server) for the copies of published files

Type the URL of the FTP site to which you want DeLogger Pro to copy its published files.

FIGURE 62 Configuring DeLogger — Web Publish


See “FTP Delays” above.

See “FTP Delays” above.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Configuration > Data Hub Channels This command opens the Data Hub Channels dialog box (Figure 63), which allows you to see the current contents of DeLogger Pro’s data hub (see the “Data Hub” Extras panel on page 62).Pressing the F5 key on your keyboard also opens this dialog box.The Data Hub Channels dialog box lists the channels that are available for each job that DeLogger Pro is currently connected to, be it a dataTaker, a replay file,

or a database session. (To view a job’s details, click the appropriate tab at the bottom of the dialog box.) The dialog box also allows you to modify and process data channels in various ways. These concepts are covered fully in• “Data Channels in the Data Hub” on page 211• “Data Hub Functions” on page 213• “Virtual Data Channels” on page 215.

Channel FlagsThe following channel information codes appear in the Flags column of Figure 63:

Changes are automatically saved (in the project’s .dlw file) when you Close the dialog box.

Tick to prevent changes to the job currently visible in the dialog box (also prevents DeLogger Pro automatically updating the job’s details in the data hub if the connection is re-made).

Clear (delete) the current job tab (and its channels) from the data hub.Cleared jobs no longer appear in the choice lists of any DeLogger Pro views. If cleared channels are specified in any of the views, DeLogger Pro generates error messages in the events log window.Take care when clearing jobs — once cleared, they can’t be recovered until DeLogger Pro makes that connection again.

File connectionSerial connectionsVirtual channels

Job tabs

Channel display settings — see See Not usedThe rate of each channel’s schedule

FIGURE 63 Configuring channels — typical job tabs in the Data Hub Channels dialog box

Figure 289 (page 213)Figure 293 (page 219)

Screen 1 of Figure 289. “Channel Flags” below.

All Channels Additional Codes for Virtual ChannelsC Channel has conditional criteria defined (Screen 2 of

Figure 289)R Virtual channel has realtime input

D Channel has dependant channel defined (Screen 3 of Figure 289)

L Virtual channel has logged input

S Channel is logging to database session RL Virtual channel has both realtime and logged inputsA Channel on DDE advise list (ST) Virtual channel is store-type

(CA) Virtual channel is calculated-type


UM

-007

0-A

0

Configuration > Database Channel Logging Sessions Data presented to the data hub from any of the available external data sources (realtime data from a dataTaker, or logged data from a dataTaker15) can optionally be logged into DeLogger’s data database . The Database Channels Logging Sessions command opens the dialog box (Figure 64) in which you organize this.Once in the database, the data can be• replayed from the database into DeLogger’s dynamic

views (form, chart, text and mimic windows), just as if it were realtime data from a connected dataTaker (see “Connections > Play” on page 40)

• loaded from the database into DeLogger’s static views (spreadsheet and analysis windows)

• presented in reports.

Logging SessionsWhen you log data into the database, you create a set of data known as a database channel logging session, or simply a logging session. This is one of the two types of sessions you can create in DeLogger Pro. “Unload

Sessions” on page 64 describes the other type.Once you activate a logging session, it immediately begins accepting data from its specified channels. If you quit DeLogger Pro, the data flow into the session resumes automatically when you restart DeLogger Pro. If you de-activate the session, data flow stops; if you later re-activate the session, data flow resumes (new data is appended to the existing data in the session).Compare this cumulative, long-term functionality of logging sessions with unload sessions (page 64), which create a unique, detached set of data every time you initiate them.You can have up to 10 logging sessions operating at the same time, and each must have a unique name; unique to any other logging session currently running, and unique to any other session that exists in the database. (By the way: while it’s true that you could also refer to the set of data contained in a replay file as a “session”, we apply the term to database data sets only.)See also the “Historical Data, Replay Data” Extras panel on page 40.

You can run up to 10 concurrent (“parallel”) database channel logging sessions.Give the session a name. If you want, you can also Check that the name doesn’t already exist in DeLogger’s database — this saves DeLogger Pro halting the logging run (because of a duplicate name) when you click Apply or OK.

Tick Active to activate the session, then click Apply to start the session. Once the session is running, un-tick Active then click Apply to temporarily suspend the session; re-tick Active then click Apply to re-start the session.

Highlight a channel you want to include in the session, then click Add (or double-click the channel name).Ctrl+click and Shift+click selects multiple channels.

Starts the current database logging session (if Active is ticked) and leaves the dialog box open for you to create or edit other sessionsNot usedStarts the current database logging session (if Active is ticked) and closes the dialog box

FIGURE 64 Configuring database channel logging sessions

See “Sessions — Realtime or Logged” on page 61.

15 See the “Data Site” Extras panel on page 38, Figure 41 on page 40, and Figure 43 on page 42.


UM

-007

0-A

0

The data sets resulting from logging sessions or from unload sessions are known throughout DeLogger by their individual session names.Although database channel logging session definitions are project-specific (the definitions are stored in each project’s master file), the actual sessions (data sets) are global in that any project that has access to the database in which the sessions are stored can access them.

Initiating UnloadsFor database channel logging sessions, you initiate the unload of historical (logged) data from a dataTaker using any of the following methods:• An alarm action that triggers an unload. See “Action

Trigger — Externally by Alarm Messages from Connected dataTakers” on page 182.

• A mimic or form window button action that triggers a macro (UNLOAD_SITE). See “Action Trigger — Manually by Buttons Placed in the Form View and Mimic View” on page 182.

• A Schedule utility schedule that triggers an unload. See “Action Trigger — Automatically by the Schedule Utility” on page 183.

• A dataTaker U command sent from a text window.• Choosing dataTaker > Unload.16 See page 64.

Deleting SessionsAlthough you can modify each session’s details in the Database Channel Logging Sessions dialog box (Figure 64), you can’t delete a session or its data from here. You must use SiteAdmin to do this — see “SiteAdmin Utility” on page 203. (You also use SiteAdmin to archive, back-up, wholly delete, copy, clear and pack DeLogger’s data database.)

Sessions — Realtime or LoggedFor each session, you must choose to log one of the two following data types arriving from the dataTaker:• Realtime data — only data returning from the

dataTaker as it’s measured is logged in the session.No data arriving from the dataTaker’s internal memory/store is logged in the session.

• Logged data — only data returning from the internal memory/store of a dataTaker is logged in the session.17

No realtime data arriving from the dataTaker is logged in the session.

This allows you to send returning data to different destinations. For example, while realtime data is being returned from a dataTaker to DeLogger Pro dynamic views, historical (logged) data from a dataTaker can be received by a database logging session.

Setting Up Database Channel Logging SessionsWork through the following steps to set up Database Channel Logging Sessions:1. From the Configuration menu, choose Database

Channel Logging Sessions.2. In the dialog box that opens (Figure 64), click an

unused tab (1 to 10 across the top of the dialog box) to select the session to define.You don’t have to define these sessions sequentially, but being orderly (always starting from 1) may reduce the occurrence of forgotten or neglected sessions, which could unintentionally add unwanted data to the database.

3. Tick Active to enable the session.The session can later be disabled, but left defined, by un-ticking this box.

4. Type a name for the session in the Session field.The name must be unique, and is usually a brief title for the data source, such as PumpA-May2002 (including a time and/or date is a good idea). You can check the name’s uniqueness by clicking the Check button.

5. If you want, type a more information in the Notes field.This may help you in the future to identify the data set you’re about to log into the database, or prompt you concerning its purpose.

6. Choose the type of data you want to be logged by this session:• Choose Real Time Data if you want realtime data

from the dataTaker to be logged.• Choose Logged Data if you want data unloaded

from the dataTaker to be “logged” (stored).

16 Allow data to be presented to the Data Hub for database logging (DT5/6xx, Figure 68) or Allow through to the Data Hub for database logging and ULAST tracking (DT8xx, Figure 68) must be ticked.

17 In DeLogger Pro, data unloaded directly from dataTaker memory using the dataTaker > Unload command can also be logged into the database (as an unload session) — see Figure 69.


UM

-007

0-A

0

7. Select the channel(s) whose data you want logged by this session.The Available list in Figure 64 shows all channels of all current connections, except those hidden using the Channel Display screen in Figure 289 (page 213). Move the channels into the Selected list using one of the following methods:• In the Available list, click a required channel then

click Add (or simply double-click each required channel).

• For a bulk selection of adjacent channels, click the first channel of the group and drag to the last channel or the group (or Shift-click the last channel), then click Add.

• For a bulk selection of non-adjacent channels, hold down the Ctrl key while you click the channels you want, then click Add.

8. When you’ve finished defining the session, click Apply to keep the defined session, or click Cancel to cancel the definition.When you click Apply, the session is immediately available for logging, and begins the session with the first data point that arrives from the session’s channels.

9. To define another logging session, repeat steps 3. to 8. above on another session tab.

10. When you’ve defined all the sessions you want, click OK to close the dialog box.

Session Names Must Be Globally UniqueIMPORTANT Database channel logging session definitions are project-specific, but session names must be unique over all projects.

When Does Database Logging Start and Stop?A session’s database channel logging starts when data is first received from the session’s channels. It continues until the data flow ceases, or until you open the dialog box (Figure 64) again, un-tick Active on the session’s tab, then click Apply.If you exit DeLogger Pro while logging sessions are still active, they automatically resume when the project is next run.

Macros for Logging SessionsSee “Macros for Managing Database Channel Logging Sessions” beginning on page 192

Data HubDeLogger Pro’s data hub is a central marshalling point and repository for information about the data channels (channel data, calculations data, alarm states,…) from each of the current connections to DeLogger Pro. The connections can be any of the six types (listed in the “Data Site” Extras panel on page 38).These “primary” data channels can be processed in various ways within the data hub before passing to DeLogger Pro.“Virtual” channels can be created based on these or on other virtual channels to similarly process data. Virtual channels can be• the result of primary channel data tested for value or

range• the result of primary channel data clipped for floor and

ceiling values• dependant another channel’s value• the result of direct calculations• the result of successive primary channel data reduced

statistically for average, maximum, minimum, standard deviation, and so on.

The primary channels and the virtual channels in the data hub are made available to the DeLogger Pro views by means of their various channel choice lists.The data hub dialog box (Figure 63) is a listing of the channels that are available for each current DeLogger Pro connection/job.The contents and configuration of the data hub is specific to each project, and DeLogger Pro saves this information in the project’s master file (see “.dlw File” on page 22).See “The Data Hub” beginning on page 210 and “Connections > Manual Integrity Check” on page 39.


UM

-007

0-A

0

2-7 THE dataTaker MENUThe commands on this menu become active when DeLogger is connected to a dataTaker.

If you’re connected to more than one dataTaker when you choose a command from this menu, DeLogger asks you to select the connection first.

dataTaker > Data LoggingStarts or stops data logging in a connected dataTaker.The command opens a dialog box in which you select logging ON or logging OFF. Then when you click OK, DeLogger sends the appropriate command (LOGON or LOGOFF) to the dataTaker.

In addition, if you’re connected to a DT800, the dialog box• allows you to set logging for individual schedules• shows which schedules are currently logging.

The Data Logging command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169).NOTE The logging option radio button you see selected when you open the dialog box does not indicate the current logging status of the dataTaker.

DT8xx only

DT8xx only

DT5/6xx only

FIGURE 65 DeLogger’s dataTaker menu

Select a connection then click OK.

FIGURE 66 Typical “which connection?” dialog box

DT5/6xx

DT8xx

FIGURE 67 Data Logging ON/OFF dialog boxes

CHAPTER 2: MENUS 2-7 The dataTaker Menu 63

UM

-007

0-A

0

dataTaker > UnloadTo retrieve logged data from a connected dataTaker, choose Unload. In the dialog box sequence that opens (Figures 68 and 69), you specify• the data you want to unload:

• by schedule• by date/time• by source (for DT5/6xx); by job and data type (for

DT8xx)• the unload destination:

• a comma-separated-variable file (.csv) or a replay file (.dlr)

• a database unload session The Unload command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169).During an unload, the Data Input Activity indicator on DeLogger’s status bar (Figure 257) flashes purple.

End-of-Unload ActionWhen an unload finishes (that is, when DeLogger sees the end-of-unload record sent by the dataTaker), DeLogger automatically runs an end_of_unload action for that connection (and reports this in the messages tab and the alarms tab of the event logs window).It does this by adding the connection name to the string end_of_unload_ and looking in the admin database’s action table to see if such an action exists. If it finds an action named end_of_unload_ConnectionName , it runs it. Otherwise, it does nothing.If you want to use this functionality to, say, clear data from a dataTaker after an unload, you must• create an appropriate action (Figure 58) and• name it end_of_unload_ConnectionName so that

DeLogger automatically recognizes and runs it at the end of an unload.

Unload SessionsIf you unload logged data from a dataTaker directly to a database session using the dialog box shown in Figure 69 (DeLogger Pro only), you create a data set in DeLogger Pro’s data database called an unload session. This is one of the two types of sessions you can create in DeLogger Pro. “Logging Sessions” on page 60 describes the other type.Compare this “one-off data dump” functionality of unload sessions with logging sessions (page 60), which allow you to accumulate data into the same session through multiple DeLogger Pro restarts and session de-activate/re-activate operations over a long period of time.

EnvironmentThe Environment area (of the first DT5/6xx unload dialog box — Figure 68) contains the following options:• Use Current Environment When ticked, DeLogger

uses the current channel list in the data hub for this connection. When un-ticked, DeLogger gets a new channel list from the dataTaker to interpret the incoming unloaded data. We recommend that you leave this option ticked.

• Allow data to be presented to the Data Hub for database logging When ticked, incoming unloading data is also made available to the data hub for logging in a database session (see “Configuration > Database Channel Logging Sessions” on page 60).Enabling this option slows down the unload process, particularly if DeLogger Pro is running on an older/slower computer, because it requires additional processing of the incoming data. Therefore, unless you specifically want to log the unloaded data to a database logging session, leave this option un-ticked.Note that this is separate from the option of storing the unloaded data directly to a predefined database unload session (Figure 69).

• Allow data to be presented to Views18 When ticked, incoming unloading data is also made available to DeLogger’s dynamic views (form, chart, text and mimic windows), allowing the incoming unloaded data to be progressively displayed in various ways during the unload.Enabling this option slows down the unload process, particularly if DeLogger is running on an older/slower computer, because it requires additional processing of the incoming data. Therefore, unless you specifically want to view the unloading data, leave this option un-ticked.

ULAST ListDeLogger can remember the last item of data returned from a DT800 during an unload19. This is called ULAST tracking (unload last). DeLogger maintains a ULAST for each schedule.The ULAST list (in the Range of Data to Unload area of the first DT8xx Unload dialog box — Figure 68) shows the date and time of the last record of the last DT800 unload for each schedule.

18 This option is present on both the DT5/6xx and DT8xx unload dialog boxes (Figure 68).

19 If you’ve ticked Track ULAST in the Connection Defaults area of Figure 57 (page 52). See also “Track ULAST” in the table under “Connection Defaults” on page 54.


UM

-007

0-A

0

DT5/6xx

DT8xx

Tick if you want to unload the logged

data to a file.

Choose the file type and destination (a

new file, or append to an existing file).

Comma-separated-variable file (.csv)

The unload starts when you click Finish.

Replay file (.dlr) — see the Extras panel

FIGURE 68 Unloading logged data (1 of 2)Continued in Figure 69

“Historical Data,Replay Data” on

page 40.

See “Environment” on page 64.

See “ULAST List” on page 64.

See “Environment” on page 64.

See “Allow Through to Data Hub…” on page 66.


UM

-007

0-A

0

You can use this as the starting point for a new unload as follows:1. Select the begin Time radio button (in the Range of

Data to Unload area of Figure 68).This activates the begin Time and Date fields.

2. Double-click the row in the ULAST list that you want to use as the start date/time for the next unload.This places the last date and last time in the appropriate begin fields.

Allow Through to Data Hub… The Allow through to the Data Hub for database logging and ULAST tracking option near the bottom of the first DT8xx unload dialog box (Figure 68) has two functions:• When ticked, incoming unloading data is also made

available to the data hub for logging in a database session (see “Configuration > Database Channel Logging Sessions” on page 60).Enabling this option slows down the unload process, particularly if DeLogger Pro is running on an older/slower computer, because it requires additional processing of the incoming data. Therefore, unless you specifically want to log the unloaded data to a database logging session, leave this option un-ticked.Note that this is separate from the option of storing the unloaded data directly to a predefined database unload session (Figure 69).(This is identical to the Allow data to be presented to

the Data Hub for database logging option in the DT5/6xx unload dialog box.)

• When ticked, DeLogger Pro tracks the last data record unloaded during any unload (this is the ULAST record), and allows a subsequent unload to begin at the next record after the ULAST record.This overcomes data repetition, which would occur if each unload began at the start of memory (unless data is specifically cleared from the DT800 memory following each unload).

dataTaker > Quit UnloadDuring an unload, choose Quit Unload to stop the return of logged data.There may be a short delay between sending the command and the return of data actually stopping. This is because the Quit Unload command actually stops the copying of logged data into the dataTaker’s output buffer and any remaining records in the buffer still have to be returned to the host.The Quit Unload command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169).

Tick if you want to unload the logged data to a session in DeLogger Pro’s data database.Then DeLogger Pro automatically inserts appropriate details, including the current date and time, as the Session Name.

Compare the unload sessions you create here with the logging sessions you create in

The unload starts when you click Finish.FIGURE 69 Unloading logged data (2 of 2)

“Configuration > Database Channel Logging Sessions” on page 60. In particular, see “Logging Sessions” on page 60 and “Unload Sessions” on page 64.

From

Fig

ure

68


UM

-007

0-A

0

dataTaker > ClearThe Clear command opens a dialog box that you use to erase various areas of a connected dataTaker’s memory.

In DeLogger Pro, the Clear command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on

page 169).

DT5/6xx

DT8xx

Clear (and reformat) the currently-inserted memory card.Clear the user startup job (then no job runs after a firm reset).Clear the user startup defaults (then the DT800 uses factory defaults after a firm reset).

FIGURE 70 Clearing areas of dataTaker memory


UM

-007

0-A

0

dataTaker > Job To Run On Hard ResetSpecifies to the connected DT800 the job you want to have automatically loaded and run whenever the DT800 is powered-up or singlepush-reset.Choosing Job To Run On Hard Reset actually sends the RUNJOBONRESET"JobName" command to the current DT800, which sets up the ONRESET.DXC program file (in flash memory) to load the selected job whenever the DT800 powers up or is singlepush reset. Using this feature, you can configure a DT800 to startup as a dedicated instrument, to auto-restart following power failure, and so on. See “Startup Job” in Part H of the DT800 User’s Manual.REMEMBER… So that you can select it, the job that you want to make the ONRESET job must be loaded into the DT800 before the Job To Run On Hard Reset command is used.

dataTaker > ResetUse DeLogger’s Reset command to send• a RESET command to a connected DT5/6xx dataTaker• a RESET command or a SINGLEPUSH command to a

connected DT8xx dataTaker.

In DeLogger Pro, the Reset command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169).

Select the job that you want the DT800 to load and run whenever it is powered-up or singlepush-reset. (The drop-down list contains the jobs that are currently defined in the DT800.)

FIGURE 71 ONRESET dialog box

Send a RESET command to a DT5/6xx.

Send a RESET command to a DT8xx.

Send a SINGLEPUSH command to a DT8xx.

DT5/6xx

DT8xx

FIGURE 72 Reset dialog boxes


UM

-007

0-A

0

dataTaker > RunUse DeLogger’s Run command to instruct a connected dataTaker to run (start/go)• all of its current schedules, or• selected schedules.

See also “dataTaker > Halt” next.

The Run command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169).

dataTaker > HaltUse DeLogger’s Halt command to instruct a connected dataTaker to halt (stop)• all of its current schedules, or• selected schedules.

See also “dataTaker > Run” above.

The Halt command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169).

dataTaker > Set Date/TimeChoose Set Date/Time to set the dataTaker’s date and time to that of the host computer (as specified in the computer’s Date/Time control panel).This command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169).

Statistical schedule RS


Alarms schedule RA

DT5/6xx

DT8xx

FIGURE 73 Run dialog boxes



Alarms schedule RA

DT5/6xx

DT8xx

FIGURE 74 Halt dialog boxes


UM

-007

0-A

0

dataTaker > StatusWhen you choose Status, DeLogger interrogates the connected dataTaker (sends the STATUS command) and returns the information to you in the dialog box that opens.

You cannot make any changes here — the dialog box is “view-only”.The Status command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169).

DT5/6xx

DT8xx

Current status (verbose) of the DT8xx’s more-common switches (status only:

switch states cannot be set here)

Current status of all the DT8xx’s switches

FIGURE 75 Status dialog boxes (the DT8xx dialog box has six tabs)


UM

-007

0-A

0

dataTaker > TestWhen you choose Test, DeLogger sends the TEST command to a connected dataTaker. A dialog box opens to display the results. You cannot make any changes here — the dialog box is “view-only”.

The Test command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169).

dataTaker > Memory CardOpens a dialog box in which you perform supervisory tasks on the memory card inserted in the dataTaker that DeLogger is currently connected to.Figure 77 describes the DT5/6xx Card Options dialog box, and Figure 78 describes the DT800 Card dialog box.Pass

Fail

DT5/6xx

DT8xxOverall result

Overall resultFIGURE 76 Test dialog boxes

DT5/6xx

Shows the memory card’s current Card ID (change CARDID by typing a new name and clicking Apply or OK).

Shows the number of stored data points and free data points in the memory card.

Shows the number of program characters used and the program space available (number of characters) in the memory card.(To obtain the actual program listing, send STATUS8 to the dataTaker from the text window’s entry screen.)

Tick, then click Apply or OK to clear the data from the Card Memory and/or clear the Card Program.

STOREDDATA

FREEDATA

STOREDDATA

FREEDATA

STOREDPROGRAM

SPACE

FREEPROGRAM

SPACE

STOREDPROGRAM

SPACE

FREEPROGRAM

SPACE

FIGURE 77 Memory card dialog box — DT5/6xx


UM

-007

0-A

0

The Memory Card command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169).

dataTaker > Run Card ProgramStarts the execution of the program stored in a memory card inserted into a connected DT5/6xx dataTaker.This command is not supported by DT8xx dataTakers.

DT8xxSelecting CARDID has no effect in the DT800. (The DT800 automatically opens a folder in the nserted memory card that is named after the DT800 serial number, and this cannot be changed by the user.)

CARDCLEAR reformats the memory card, which clears all data, alarms and programs from the card.Caution: this option clears the data, alarms and programs of ALL dataTakers that the card has been inserted into.

Click OK to transfer the data and alarms to the card.

CARDUPDATE moves any data from temporary buffers within the DT800 into

the card’s data and alarm files, then flushes (clears) the buffers.

Click YES to reformat the card.

DeLogger notifies you when these operations have been completed — watch the Messages tab of the event logs window

FIGURE 78 Memory card dialog box — DT800


UM

-007

0-A

0

dataTaker > ProfileThe Profile command opens a dialog box (Figure 79) in which you inspect the current profile settings (user startup defaults) of the connected DT800 and change these if required. Note:• These settings are for the connected dataTaker, not for

the computer on which DeLogger is running.• This command is not supported by DT5/6xx

dataTakers.

Background20

The DT800 supports user-definable profiles that determine its startup/reset defaults for various communications capabilities, and its global settings.These settings are stored in the USER.INI file within the DT800, and are used each time the DT800 performs a SINGLEPUSH reset. (If the DT800 performs a triple-push reset, or is powered-up from cold, then factory default settings stored in the DT800.INI file are used.)

Host Port TabThe Host Port tab of Figure 79 displays the current parameter settings for the Host RS-232 communications interface of the DT800.To change any of these settings in the DT800 from this dialog box, edit the appropriate fields then click OK. DeLogger sends the new settings to the DT800 where they are written into its USER.INI file. DeLogger then attempts to have the DT800 load the new profile. However, it may be necessary — and it is recommended — to perform a manual SINGLEPUSH reset of the DT800 to load the new profile.If the new profile includes changes that affect the current connection between DeLogger and the DT800 (for example, changing the baud rate while connected by means of the Host RS-232 port), the new profile will compromise the current connection. In such cases you must disconnect DeLogger then reconnect at the new settings.The allowable settings for each parameter are detailed in the DT800 Profile Details table20.

Ethernet TabThe Ethernet tab of Figure 79 displays the current parameter settings for the Ethernet communications interface of the DT800.To change any of these settings in the DT800 from this dialog box, edit the appropriate fields then click OK. DeLogger sends the new settings to the DT800 where

they are written into its USER.INI file. DeLogger then attempts to have the DT800 load the new profile. However, it may be necessary — and it is recommended — to perform a manual SINGLEPUSH reset of the DT800 to load the new profile.Two ethernet protocols are supported by the DT800 —UDP and TCP/IP. Set the UDP Supported field to YES for the UDP protocol, or set to NO for the TCP/IP protocol.You’ll need to consult your network administrator for appropriate settings for IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway Mask. Usually only an IP Address needs to be entered into the DT800. For further discussion of Ethernet addresses, see the “DT800 Ethernet Setup” topic in Part I of the DT800 dataTaker User’s Manual.

Host Modem TabThe Host Modem tab of Figure 79 displays the commands and responses that the DT800 will use to manage a modem connected to the Host RS-232 port. The default settings in the DT800 follow the Hayes AT standard, and will be suitable for most modems.To change any of these settings in the DT800 from this dialog box, edit the appropriate fields then click OK. DeLogger sends the new settings to the DT800 where they are written into its USER.INI file. DeLogger then attempts to have the DT800 load the new profile. However, it may be necessary — and it is recommended — to perform a manual SINGLEPUSH reset of the DT800 to load the new profile.Setting up and using modems with the DT800 is discussed in detail in the “RS-232 — Modem Connection to the Host Computer” topic in Part I of the DT800 dataTaker User’s Manual.

FTP Server TabThe FTP Server tab of Figure 79 displays the current settings for the File Transfer Protocol server in the DT800. To change any of these settings in the DT800 from this dialog box, edit the appropriate fields then click OK. DeLogger sends the new settings to the DT800 where they are written into its USER.INI file. DeLogger then attempts to have the DT800 load the new profile. However, it may be necessary — and it is recommended — to perform a manual SINGLEPUSH reset of the DT800 to load the new profile.FTP is provided in the DT800 to allow data files to be downloaded using FTP client software (such as WS_FTP and CuteFTP) and most browsers (which have FTP client capability).

20 See the “User Startup Defaults” topic in Part H of the DT800 dataTaker User’s Manual.


UM

-007

0-A

0

FIGURE 79 The six tabs of the DT800 Profile dialog box

See “Host Port Tab” on page 73.

See “Ethernet Tab” on page 73.

See “Host Modem Tab” on page 73.

See “FTP ServerTab” on page 73.

See “PPP Tab” onpage 75.

See “ISP Tab” onpage 75.


UM

-007

0-A

0

To enable FTP in the DT800, set the Supported field to YES.You can also define a User name and Password if desired. If you’re FTP-unloading data through a local Ethernet of RS-232 connection, security may not be an issue and the default username ANONYMOUS and default password PASSWORD can be used. However, you may want security if the DT800 is connected to wider networks.

PPP TabThe PPP tab of Figure 79 displays the current settings for Point-to-Point Protocol in the DT800. PPP provides the ability to transport TCP/IP data traffic over serial communications links, such as dial-up telephone lines using local and remote modems between a computer and a DT800.To change any of these settings in the DT800 from this dialog box, edit the appropriate fields then click OK. DeLogger sends the new settings to the DT800 where they are written into its USER.INI file. DeLogger then attempts to have the DT800 load the new profile. However, it may be necessary — and it is recommended — to perform a manual SINGLEPUSH reset of the DT800 to load the new profile.Usually only the IP Address for the host PC and Remote IP Address for the remote DT800 need to be defined. If security is an issue, then a User name and a Password can also be specified.

ISP TabThe ISP tab is reserved for future use when e-mailing of messages from the dataTaker 800 is implemented.


UM

-007

0-A

0

dataTaker > Upgrade FirmwareThis command initiates an upgrade of the firmware (the operating system) of a connected dataTaker.During this process you’ll need to locate the firmware upgrade file you want to use. Firmware upgrade files are named with the firmware version number followed by a .dxf extension (3040001.dxf, for example). One or more recent .dxf files are placed in the Firmware\MT

folder in DeLogger’s installation folder (see Figure 7) when you install DeLogger and, when you connect to a dataTaker, DeLogger alerts you if its MT folder contains a newer .dxf file than is currently running in the dataTaker. You can also obtain the latest .dxf file from www.dataTataker.com or your dataTaker representative.

➊ Select the computer’s serial port to which the dataTaker is physically connected, then click OK.DeLogger closes any existing connection to the dataTaker (that is, disconnects from the dataTaker) and opens a navigation dialog box at the Firmware\MT folder in DeLogger’s installation folder. This is DeLogger’s default location for firmware upgrade files (.dxf files).

➋ Open the MT folder, then open the .dxf file you want to use for the upgrade (you’ll usually want the latest, the one whose filename is the highest number).If the .dxf file you want to use is located elsewhere, navigate to it now and click Open.

➌ The Upgrade Firmware dialog box opens and the upgrade begins. During the upgrade, do not remove any cables, and do not reset or power-down the DT800.To watch the progress, expand the dialog box by clicking the Details button.

When the “success” dialog box opens, the upgrade is complete and the dataTaker has been restarted.

➍ Click OK in the “success” dialog box to close it, then click OK in the Firmware Upgrade dialog box.There is no DeLogger connection to the dataTaker after a firmware upgrade so, to use the dataTaker, you’ll need to reconnect.

FIGURE 80 The firmware upgrade process


UM

-007

0-A

0

2-8 THE SEVENTH MENUDeLogger’s seventh menu changes according to which type of window is front-most (see Figure 8 on page 19):• Form for a form window — page 77• Chart for a chart window — page 85• Text for a text window — page 91• Mimic for a mimic window — page 97• Spread for a spreadsheet window — page 104• Analysis for an analysis window — page 115• Program for a DT5/6xx program builder window —

page 124• Program for a DT8xx program builder window —

page 126

The Form MenuWhen a form window (Figure 210) is front-most, DeLogger’s seventh menu changes to Form.

REMEMBER… To configure and edit a form, the window must be in edit mode. To display live data, the

form window must be in run mode. See “Form > Edit Mode” on page 77.

Edit Menu CommandsRemember that when a form window is front-most, you can use commands on the Edit menu to work with cells and cell data. See Figure 33 on page 34.

Form > PauseThis command stops and starts the input of data to the form window. While Pause is ticked on the menu, data is not updated in the window.Pause is only available when the window is in run mode (described in “Form > Edit Mode” next).The Pause command is duplicated by the button on the form toolbar (Figure 261).If channel data isn’t updating in the window, it may be because the window is paused.

Form > Edit ModeA form window has two modes: edit mode and run mode. Choosing the Edit Mode command toggles the window state between• edit mode — for configuring the window, and• run mode — for viewing live data as it arrives in the

window (Edit Mode is un-ticked on the Form menu).You can quickly see when a window is in edit mode because• Edit Mode is ticked on the Form menu• the word Edit appears on the window’s tab• the word Edit appears after the filename in the

window’s title bar• the word Edit appears after the form window’s

filename on the Window menu.If channel data isn’t updating in the window, it may be because the window is in edit mode.The Edit Mode command is duplicated by the button on the form toolbar (Figure 261).

FIGURE 81 DeLogger’s Form menu

CHAPTER 2: MENUS 2-8 The Seventh Menu 77

UM

-007

0-A

0

Form > Column TemplateThis command opens a dialog box in which you select the columns to be displayed in the current form window.

Column Template is only available when the form window is in edit mode.

Form > Reset HighThis command resets all values in the High Value column to zero. A High Value stays at zero until the next time data is returned for that channel.The Reset High command is duplicated by the button on the form toolbar (Figure 261).

Form > Reset LowThis command resets all values in the Low Value column to zero. A Low Value stays at zero until the next time data is returned for that channel.The Reset Low command is duplicated by the button on the form toolbar (Figure 261).

Form > Background ColourUse this command to choose and apply a background color to the entire form. The dialog box contains a palette of ready-made colors, or you can create your own.

Background Colour is only available when the form window is in edit mode.

Form > Show HeadersShows or hides the row and column headers in the current sheet of the form window. It’s only available when the form window is in edit mode.The Show Headers command is duplicated by the button on the form toolbar (Figure 261).

Form > Show GridlinesShows or hides the cell gridlines in the current sheet of the form window. It’s only available when the form window is in edit mode.

You can’t turn off the display of this column.

FIGURE 82 Column Template dialog box

Saturation

HueHue

Saturation

Preview the

custom color

To get help on an item in the dialog box, click the What’s this? button then click the item.

Add the custom color you’ve defined to the palette.

➊ Click in the matrix to select a color.

➋ Drag to select luminosity.

FIGURE 83 Form background color dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

The Show Gridlines command is duplicated by the button on the form toolbar (Figure 261).

Form > View ToolbarShows or hides the form toolbar (Figure 261).

Form > FormatWhen the form window is in edit mode, Format opens a submenu of commands for formatting the appearance of the currently-selected cells and the data in them. Remember to select the cells you want before using these commands (selection methods are described in “Using the Mouse with Worksheets” on page 160).

Form > Format > AlignmentThis command opens the Alignment dialog box, in which you specify the horizontal and vertical placement of data in the selected cells, and enable word wrap.

The Left, Center and Right horizontal alignment options are duplicated by the buttons on the form toolbar (Figure 261).Note that in addition to the General horizontal format there’s also a General data format — see “Form > Format > General” on page 80.

Form > Format > FontThis command opens a dialog box in which you specify the typeface, style and size of data in the selected cells.

These settings override the worksheet’s default font (for the selected cells only). See “Form > Format > Default Font” on page 81.

Data formats

FIGURE 84 Form > Format submenu

Turn Word Wrap on to wrap long strings of data onto multiple lines within a cell. (You may need to increase the row height to see the extra lines.)

General applies the default alignment that’s appropriate for the type of data. That is, it causes data that the worksheet recognizes as•numbers to be right-aligned•text to be left-aligned•dates to be right-aligned.

Applies to adjacent cells

FIGURE 85 Alignment dialog box

FIGURE 86 Font dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

Form > Format > BorderChoose this command to apply thin, thick, dashed or double borders in a variety of colors to the currently-selected cells.

The Automatic button applies a default color from your current Windows color scheme (usually black21) to the dashed borders.

Form > Format > PatternChoose this command to apply a fill colour to the currently-selected cells, with an overlaying pattern if required.

You can preview the effect in the Sample area of the dialog box (Figure 88).The Automatic button applies a default color from your current Windows color scheme (usually black45) to the dashed borders.

Form > Format > GeneralApplies the General data format — the default format that’s appropriate for the type of data — to the selected

cells. This causes the spreadsheet to recognize data you enter into these cells as• a number — when the data contains only numeric

characters• text — when the data contains one or more alpha

characters• a date — when the data contains slashes and has the

form nn/nn or nn/nn/nn (DeLogger assumes the current year, or the first day of the month, if you omit either of these).

Don’t confuse this with the General horizontal alignment option — see “Form > Format > Alignment” on page 79.

Form > Format > FixedFormats (corrects) the values in the selected cells to no (zero) decimal places22. For example, a value of 1234.56789 becomes 1,235.This command is duplicated by a button on the form toolbar (Figure 261 on page 173).

Form > Format > Fixed (1) to (5)These commands format (correct) the values in the selected cells to 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 decimal places.46 For example, Fixed (1) formats 1234.56789 to 1234.6, and Fixed (4) formats the same value to 1234.5679.These commands are duplicated by buttons on the form toolbar (Figure 261 on page 173).

Form > Format > Percent % Displays numeric values in the selected cells as percentages. DeLogger Pro multiplies each number by 100 and appends the % character.If you enter a percentage into a cell (for example, you type 58.33%), DeLogger Pro recognizes the % symbol and therefore displays the value in percent format, but stores the value in numeric format (for example, as 0.5833).

Form > Format > Scientific Displays numeric values in the selected cells in scientific notation. For example, DeLogger Pro displays the value 0.00035 as 3.50E-04 when you apply the scientific format.If you type a number in scientific format (for example, you type 19.1E3), DeLogger Pro recognizes this as scientific format, and displays it as 1.91E+04 and stores it as 19100. You can use E or e when typing in scientific format.

21 The color is defined in Windows’ Display (or Display Properties) control panel: Appearance tab > Item drop-down list > Message Box > Font Color.

Outside border of the group of cells selected in the worksheetIndividual sides of each of the cells selected in the worksheet (inside borders of the selected group)

FIGURE 87 Borders dialog box

FIGURE 88 Pattern dialog box

22 As you can observe in the formula bar, this formatting does not permanently reduce the precision of the original values.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Form > Format > Date (yyyy/mm/dd)Applies the ISO23 date format to numeric data in the selected cells.

Form > Format > Time (hh:mm:ss) Applies the ISO23 time format to numeric data in the selected cells.

Form > Format > Date/Time (yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss.000)Applies the ISO23 date and time format to numeric data in the selected cells.

Form > Format > Locale Date/TimeApplies the date and time formats for your locale — that is, the formats specified in your computer’s Regional Settings control panel.

Form > Format > Custom Number If none of the number formats on DeLogger Pro’s Form > Formats submenu (Figure 84) is suitable, the Custom Number command opens a dialog box that allows you to select others or build your own.

Form > Format > Default FontOpens a dialog box in which you specify the default font (typeface, style and size) for the current form worksheet.If you have more than one form window, each with several worksheets24, every worksheet can have a different default typeface, font style and/or font size.You can override the default font for selected cells — see “Form > Format > Font” on page 79.

Form > Object DeLogger Pro allows you to add two types of graphical objects to a worksheet; buttons and checkboxes. You use • a button to initiate an action• a checkbox to set a true or false state in a linked cell

to control worksheet functions (for example, when a checkbox is ticked the worksheet calculates using formula AA, and when un-ticked the worksheet uses formula BB).

You can also create charts in a worksheet based on the data in selected cells — see “Creating a Chart in a Form Window” on page 173.

Form > Object > Insert Button To create a button on the current worksheet, select Insert Button from the Object submenu (or click the button on the form toolbar — Figure 261). The cursor changes to a crosshair. Click and drag25 in the worksheet to create the button. To make the button trigger an action, see “Form > Object > Attach Action” on page 82. To edit the button’s label, see “Form > Object > Options” on page 82.

Form > Object > Insert Checkbox To create a checkbox on the current worksheet, select Insert Checkbox from the Object submenu (or click the

23 International Organization for Standardization; ISO 860124 Created after double-right-clicking in the form window — see

“Formula One Workbook Designer” on page 138.

Ready-made formats

Create your own format. (Select a format above then edit it here, or type your own from scratch.)

Filter the entries that appear in the Format list.

FIGURE 89 Custom number format dialog box

25 To make the button or checkbox snap to cell boundaries, hold down the Alt key while dragging.

Available when the form window is in edit mode

Available when an object is selected (that is, when its selection handles are visible)

Worksheet button

Worksheet checkbox (selected)

FIGURE 90 Form > Object submenu


UM

-007

0-A

0

button on the form toolbar — Figure 261). The cursor changes to a crosshair. Click and drag25 in the worksheet to create the checkbox.

Form > Object > Attach Action Ctrl+click a form worksheet button to select it, then choose Object > Attach Action. In the dialog box that opens, type the name of the action to be run when the button is clicked.

Form > Object > OptionsCtrl+click a form worksheet button to select it, then choose Object > Options to edit the text that appears on the button.

Form > Validation Rule You can validate data entry into a worksheet cell. This involves• creating a formula to test the entered data (a

validation rule), and• creating a message to display if the validation test

fails (error text).The formula must return either TRUE or FALSE:• If the formula returns TRUE, the value is entered.• If the formula returns FALSE, the validation is not

entered and the validation text is displayed in an error dialog box.

To do this, select the worksheet cell whose data you want to validate and choose Form > Validation Rule. Type the validation rule and the error text in the dialog box that opens (Figure 93), then click OK.The example shown in Figure 93 limits the range of values that cell B18 will accept to any number greater than 50. The numbers 50 and below cause the validation rule to fail (tests FALSE) and therefore generate the error message. You must then click OK in the error dialog box and change the data in cell B18 so that the rule tests TRUE.

The validation rule must be a logical expression that evaluates to either TRUE or FALSE. For example, the following rules could be used to validate data entered into cell D9:• SUM(B5:B22)>D9• IF(D9>1,D9<60,D9>0)• AND(D9>10,D9<20)

Form > Calculation The Calculation command opens a dialog box that allows you to• turn automatic worksheet recalculation on or off• control the number of times a circular reference is

calculated (iteration).

Automatic RecalculationIn Figure 94, leave Automatic Recalc un-ticked because a DeLogger form window has its own mechanism that updates all of a connection’s channels (and related cells) in the worksheet at once. This is more effective (faster overall) than ticking Automatic Recalc, which forces updates only one cell at a time.There may be some situation that requires Automatic Recalc to be ticked (such as data modelling within the form worksheet) but, in general, leave this option OFF.

Type the name of the action you want the button to trigger.

FIGURE 91 Assigning an action to a form worksheet button

Type the button text here.

FIGURE 92 Labelling a form worksheet button

The validation rule must return the logical values TRUE or FALSE.Do not use =.

The error dialog box opens if the cell data tests FALSE.

Your error text

FIGURE 93 Validation Rule and error dialog boxes

Enable or disable calculations that contain circular references.

The iteration stops when either of these conditions is met.

FIGURE 94 Calculation dialog box

See “Automatic Recalculation” below.


UM

-007

0-A

0

IterationIf you want DeLogger Pro to calculate formulas that contain circular references (that is, each formula depends on the other for its result), tick Iteration in the Calculation dialog box. Then DeLogger Pro repeats the calculation (iterates) and stops after 100 iterations or after the calculated values change by less than 0.001 between iterations.To change these defaults (100 and 0.001), type new numbers in the Maximum Iterations and Maximum Change fields in the Calculation dialog box.

Form > Define Name For simplicity and convenience when working with a DeLogger worksheet, you can apply a meaningful name to• an individual cell• a range of cells• a constant value• a formula.

Then you can use the name to identify and work with the item instead of, say, a complicated formula or a long constant. For example, you can apply the name LtSp to the constant 186000 and use LtSp in formulas instead of the 6-digit number.The Define Name command opens a dialog box (Figure 95) in which you can• name the selected item (cell, range, constant or

formula)• edit the selected item’s reference• type a constant or a formula and name it.

Don’t use the names Print_Area or Print_Titles. These names are reserved for DeLogger’s own use.

Form > Set Print Range From SelectionDeLogger prints the first 64 rows of the current worksheet unless you specify an area for printing. To do this, select the rows or cells you want to print (they must be adjacent) and choose Set Print Range From Selection.Before printing, we recommend that you always use the File > Print Preview command to check the print range.This print range stays in effect until you select another, and is saved with the project when you choose File > Save Project26.

Form > Insert Page BreakIf a worksheet is larger than the print area defined in the Print Setup dialog box27, DeLogger automatically divides the worksheet into page-sized sections for printing. It does this by inserting automatic (and invisible) page breaks.You can also specify one or more manual page breaks in a worksheet. To do this, select the cell below and to the right of where you want the page to break, then choose Form > Insert Page Break. DeLogger inserts• a horizontal (row) break along the top edge of the

selected cell and• a vertical (column) break along the left edge of the

active cell.In other words, the active cell becomes the upper-left corner of a new printed page. Darker gridlines indicate the manual page breaks (Figure 160).

When you insert a manual page break, DeLogger adjusts the automatic page breaks in the remainder of the worksheet.Before printing, we recommend that you always use the File > Print Preview command to check the page breaks. The breaks stay in effect until you remove them (see “Form > Remove Page Break” next), and are saved when you save the project.

Add the contents of the Name field to the list.

Delete the selected name from the list.

Type a name for the selected cell, range of cells, formula or constant here. Don’t use spaces in the name.

All the user-defined names in the workbook are listed here.

If you selected a cell or a range of cells, its reference appears in the Formula area. You can edit the reference here.You can also type a formula or constant here and give it a name.

FIGURE 95 Define Name dialog box

26 Or if you click Yes when asked if you want to save changes when closing a project or exiting DeLogger.

27 The print area depends on the paper size, paper orientation and printer settings.

Active cell

Vertical page break

Horizontal page break

FIGURE 96 Manual page breaks are inserted at the top and left edge of the active cell.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Insert Page Break is only available when the form window is in edit mode.

Form > Remove Page BreakUse this command to remove manual page breaks.To remove a horizontal break, select a cell immediately below it then choose Form > Remove Page Break.To remove a vertical break, select a cell immediately to its right then choose Spread > Remove Page Break. See Figure 97.

Remove Page Break is only available when the form window is in edit mode.

Form > Publish Publish becomes available when you’ve enabled web publishing. See• “Configuration > Web Publish” on page 58• “DeLogger Pro Web Publishing” on page 229.

The Publish command is duplicated by the button on the form toolbar (Figure 261).

Form > PropertiesThe Properties command opens a dialog box in which you• specify the type of data you want displayed in the

current form window — Realtime, Logged or both• turn on the display of invalid and partially-invalid

data28 (in addition to the standard display of primary/real data29)

• enable automatic web publishing (publishing HTML files) of the current form window

• enable automatic Internet publishing (publishing HTML files onto a www server) of the current form window

• select the model of dataTaker to be used by the current form window.

The command is only available when the form window is in edit mode.

The Properties command is duplicated by the button on the form toolbar (Figure 261).

Active cell location for removing a horizontal and a vertical page break together

Active cell location for removing a horizontal page break

Active cell location for removing a vertical page break

FIGURE 97 The location of the active cell determines which manual page break is removed.

28 Invalid and partially-invalid data is virtual channel data that has failed data hub conditional or dependancy tests.

29 Primary data is data direct from a dataTaker channel.

Tick to enable automatic web publishing for this window — see

Data filter: select the type of data you want displayed in the window.Tick if you want invalid and partially-invalid virtual channel data to be displayed in the window (primary/real data is always displayed).

Tick to enable Internet publishing for this window —

Select the model of dataTaker to be used if the window has any model-specific decisions to make.

FIGURE 98 Form window Properties dialog box

“Manual and Automatic Web Publishing” on page 229.

see “Internet (WWW) Publishing” on page 231.


UM

-007

0-A

0

The Chart MenuWhen a chart window (Figure 214) is front-most, DeLogger’s seventh menu changes to Chart.

REMEMBER… To configure and edit a chart, the chart window must be in edit mode. To display live data, the chart window must be in run mode. See “Chart > Edit Mode” on page 85.

Chart > PauseStops and starts the input of data to the chart window. While Pause is ticked on the menu, data is not updated in the window.Pause is only available when the window is in run mode (described in “Chart > Edit Mode” next).If channel data isn’t updating in the window, it may be because the window is paused.

Chart > Edit ModeA chart window has two modes: edit mode and run mode. Choosing the Edit Mode command toggles the window state between• edit mode — for configuring the window, and• run mode — for viewing live data as it arrives in the

window (Edit Mode is un-ticked on the Chart menu).You can quickly see when a window is in edit mode because• Edit Mode is ticked on the Chart menu• the word Edit appears on the window’s tab• the word Edit appears after the filename in the

window’s title bar• the word Edit appears after the chart window’s

filename on the Window menu.If data isn’t updating in the window, it may be because the window is in edit mode.The Edit Mode command is duplicated by the button on the chart toolbar (Figure 263).

FIGURE 99 DeLogger’s Chart menu


UM

-007

0-A

0

Chart > Chart PropertiesOpens a dialog box containing five tabs in which you define the appearance and action of the current chart window.The Chart Properties command is duplicated by the button on the chart toolbar (Figure 263), and by double-clicking anywhere in the chart window.

Don’t confuse this command with the window’s Properties command (covered in “Chart > Properties” on page 90).

Tick to enable diagonal scaling and shifting by dragging inside the trend area as shown in (Dragging along the scales is not affected.)

Click to set the color of the three trend area auxiliary lines

When ticked, you can drag the current chart’s time ruler

from the left or right vertical axes, or drag its data ruler

from the top or bottom horizontal axes — see

Click to set the color of the overview bars’ background strips and range strips.

The X-axis can display either real time/date (select time), or elapsed time (select duration).

The currently-visible extremes of the chart’s time axis.To alter this range, edit the values in the from and to fields then click Apply or OK (or drag in the chart window —

Show/hide the vertical and horizontal overview bars (along the chart axes) — see

Click to set the color of the time axis tick marks and text.

Select the data scale whose style or range you want to view or change.

Turn follow mode on or off

This tick box is equivalent to the follow mode button/

indicator in the lower-right corner of the chart window.

The Logarithmic Display option becomes available

when you tick Logarithmic for this data axis in the Axis Properties dialog box — see

When ticked, small data windows appear

that display information relating to the current cursor

position.

The currently-visible extremes of the selected scale’s time axis.To alter this range, edit the values in the from and to fields then click Apply or OK (or drag in the chart window —

Click Capture to place the first and last data point values of the entire charted data set into the from and to fields.

Click to set the color of the selected scale’s data axis tick marks and text.

Drag the dialog box aside so that you can see the chart window, then Apply the changes you’ve made without closing the dialog box.

FIGURE 100 The Chart Properties dialog box (1 of 2) — tabs 1, 2 and 3

Figure 215.

Figure 219.

— see Figure 217.(see Figures 214 and 215)

Figure 214.

— see Figure 214.

see Figures 218 and 219).

“Chart > Edit Axis” on page 89.see Figures 218 and 219).


UM

-007

0-A

0

Select the curve whose style and auxiliary lines you want to set.

Click to change the color of the curve and its auxiliary lines.

You can also make these adjustments by dragging the scale’s handle in the chart window —

Resets the scale positions and sizes to one column and one row for each scale

Apply a data point symbol to the curve (and its auxiliary lines).

Select the curve whose style and auxiliary lines you want to set.

Select a column and row (within the selected scale group) for the

data scale —

Set the position of the curve’s upper and lower auxiliary lines

on the data axis.

Show or hide the curve.

Select which of the chart’s six data scales you want to adjust.

Show or hide the curve’s auxiliary lines — see

Select a data scale group, such as the left side or the right

side of the trend area.

Drag the dialog box aside so that you can see the chart window, then Apply the changes you’ve made without closing the dialog box.

When there’s more than one data scale in a column, set the

relative size of the selected scale.

FIGURE 101 The Chart Properties dialog box (2 of 2) — tabs 4 and 5

Figure 217.

see Figure 216.

see Figure 216.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Chart > Select ChannelsOpens a dialog box in which you assign a channel (from the current data hub list) to one of the current chart window’s 12 curves, and assign each curve to one of the chart window’s six data axes. You must do this for each channel you want to plot in the chart window.

You can also rename the data axes, change them to logarithmic scaling (instead of linear) and manually set their upper and lower limits.Select Channels is only available when the chart window is in edit mode, and is duplicated by the button on the chart toolbar (Figure 263).

List of channels currently held in the data hub

Access this tab using the Chart > Select Channels command, or the Chart > Edit Axis command.

➊ Tick to activate one of the current chart window’s 12 curves.

➋ Assign a channel to the curve.

➌ Assign the curve to one of six Y axes (data axes). You can assign more than one curve to each Y axis.To rename the Y axes (default names are Data 1, Data 2,…Data 6), make them logarithmic or set their ranges, go to the Axis Properties tab — see below.

Rename the chart’s six data axes.

Tick to change the data axis from linear to logarithmic scaling.

Set upper and lower limits for each data axis (or choose Chart > Auto Re-Scale to have DeLogger optimize these limits fot you).

FIGURE 102 The two tabs of the Chart Channels dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

Chart > Edit AxisOpens the chart Axis Properties dialog box. Figure 102 describes its contents.

Edit Axis is only available when the chart window is in edit mode, and is duplicated by the button on the chart toolbar (Figure 263).

Chart > RotateRotates the chart window’s axes so that new data appears at the top of the window and the chart moves downwards.The Rotate command is duplicated by the button on the chart toolbar (Figure 263).

Chart > Auto Re-ScaleRe-scales the trend graphs horizontally and vertically so that the entire data set(s) fit into the chart area.The Auto Re-Scale command is duplicated by the button on the chart toolbar (Figure 263).

Chart > Allow Compressed ModeIf Allow Compressed Mode is ticked, DeLogger automatically displays envelope curves instead of the normal curves when so many data points are displayed that they are no longer distinguishable (that is, when there are more data points to plot than screen pixels to display them). See Figure 104.Compressed mode compartmentalizes blocks of readings and displays the minima and maxima in envelope fashion. It avoids on-screen data “loss” due, for example, to the same screen pixel being used to display two close data points.

Chart > ClearClears all trend graphs from the chart area.The Clear command is only available when the chart window is in edit mode, and is duplicated by the button on the chart toolbar (Figure 263).

Chart > XY Chart Correlates two sets of data: one on the X axis, the other on the Y axis (Figure 105). Also known as a scatter chart.

To create a scatter chart, tick XY Chart on the Chart menu, put the chart window into edit mode, and choose Select Channels. In the dialog box that opens (Figure 102), assign a channel to one axis, assign a different channel to another axis, and click OK. Now in the chart window, drag one of the scales (by its handle) down onto the horizontal/time scale. Take the chart window out of edit mode and run data into it.DeLogger Pro retains the time scale across the bottom of the chart to show you the time range of the data plotted

FIGURE 103 Chart Channels — Axis Properties dialog box

FIGURE 104 Typical compressed-mode envelope curve

Scale handleFIGURE 105 Typical XY chart (three data sets)


UM

-007

0-A

0

on the XY chart above. You can adjust this time range to show more or less data as required.To return the chart window to normal operation, un-tick XY Chart on the Chart menu.

Chart > View ToolbarShows or hides the chart toolbar (Figure 263 on page 174).

Chart > Scale Text UpIncreases the size of the axis text (seven steps in total).The Scale Text Up command is duplicated by the button on the chart toolbar (Figure 263).

Chart > Scale Text DownDecreases the size of the axis text (seven steps in total).The Scale Text Down command is duplicated by the button on the chart toolbar (Figure 263).

Chart > Publish Publish becomes available when you’ve enabled web publishing. See• “Configuration > Web Publish” on page 58• “DeLogger Pro Web Publishing” on page 229.

The Publish command is duplicated by the button on the chart toolbar (Figure 263).

Chart > PropertiesThe Properties command opens a dialog box in which you• specify the type of data you want displayed in the

current chart window — Realtime, Logged or both• turn on the display of invalid and partially-invalid


• enable automatic web publishing (publishing HTML files) of the current chart window

• enable automatic Internet publishing (publishing HTML files onto a www server) of the current chart window

• select the model of dataTaker to be used by the current chart window.

The command is only available when the chart window is in edit mode.

The Properties command is duplicated by the button on the chart toolbar (Figure 263).Don’t confuse this command with the Chart Properties command (see “Chart > Chart Properties” on page 86).







FIGURE 106 Chart window Properties dialog box




UM

-007

0-A

0

The Text MenuWhen a text window (Figure 220 on page 144) is front-most, DeLogger’s seventh menu changes to Text.

Text > Display ScreenWhen you choose a connection from the Connection drop-down list at the bottom of the text window, data returning to DeLogger from that connection appears in the text window’s display (upper) screen — see Figure 220.Text > Display Screen opens a submenu of commands that become available when you click in the text window’s display screen.

Text Screen SplitterYou can drag the divider between the display screen and the entry screen to change their relative sizes32, and you can click the Splitter View Mode button to fill the text window with the display screen.REMEMBER… To see live data in the text display screen, you must select a connection in the Connection list box at the bottom of the text window (Figure 220).

Text > Display Screen > Filter DataOpens a dialog box in which you select the schedules whose data you want to appear in the text window’s display screen.

The Filter Data command is duplicated by the button on the text display toolbar (Figure 220).

32 If you want DeLogger to remember these screen sizes, tick Remember splitter panes position in Figure 31 (page 32).

FIGURE 107 DeLogger’s Text menu

FIGURE 108 Text > Display Screen submenu

Available when dataTaker 80/800 Series is selected in the text window’s Properties dialog box

FIGURE 109 Text display screen — schedule filter dialog box

(Figure 114)


UM

-007

0-A

0

Text > Display Screen > Display Data AsOpens a dialog box in which you choose the format of data displayed in the text display screen.

The Display Data As command is duplicated by the button on the text display toolbar (Figure 264).

Text > Display Screen > Capture Data To DiskAs data arrives in a text window’s display screen, DeLogger can append the data to a text file. To initiate this choose Capture Data To Disk and, in the navigation box that opens, either• type the name of a new .txt file, or• select an existing .txt file

to which you want the data appended. Click Save to close the navigation box and begin the data capture.

While the capture process is active, Capture Data To Disk is ticked on the menu. Choose the command again to stop the capture and automatically save the text file.While Capture Data To Disk is active, the destination file is open in the computer’s memory and vulnerable if the computer “crashes”. As crash protection, DeLogger automatically saves the file to the hard disk as frequently as possible. Then if the computer crashes while the file is open, although the Windows operating system may consider the file to be corrupt, you’ll be able to retrieve most (if not all) of its contents.If you quit (exit) DeLogger with Capture Data To Disk active, the capture file is automatically opened (in append mode) the next time you start DeLogger.To insert your own text into the display screen’s text, see “Text > Display Screen > Insert Text” on page 93.The Capture Data To Disk command is duplicated by the

button on the text display toolbar (Figure 264). The button’s appearance changes to “pressed” during the capture.

Text > Display Screen > FontOpens a dialog box (Figure 86) in which you specify the typeface, style and size of text in the text window’s display screen.

Makes the date and time more readable (DT5/6xx only)

DT5/6xx

DT8xx

Replayformat

Textformat

CSVformat

Replay format

Text format

CSV (comma-separated-variable) format

Convert date and time

FIGURE 110 Text display screen — data format dialog box

Select an existing text file, or type the name of a new file.

FIGURE 111 Text display screen — data capture dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

Text > Display Screen > Save Screen Buffer AsOpens a navigation box that allows you to save the contents of the text window’s display screen33 as either• a text file (.txt), or• a comma-separated-variable file (.csv).

You can choose this command at any time.When you save the project, the contents of the display screen are also saved, and then restored to the display screen the next time you open the project.You can paste extra text (at the current cursor location in the display screen) that is saved along with the contents of the display screen. See “Text > Display Screen > Insert Text” below.The display screen buffer is limited to approximately 15,000 lines. (When this number is exceeded, DeLogger automatically deletes the first 2,500 lines.)

Text > Display Screen > Clear Screen BufferDeletes the entire contents of the text window’s display screen33.The Clear command is duplicated by the button on the text display toolbar (Figure 264).

Text > Display Screen > Insert Text To paste extra text at the current cursor location in the display screen, choose Insert Text. A dialog box opens in which you enter the text to be inserted.

Once inserted, the extra text is saved along with the current data in the display screen if you choose “Text > Display Screen > Save Screen Buffer As” (above) or “Text > Display Screen > Capture Data To Disk” (page 92).

Text > Display Screen > PausePauses and un-pauses the flow of data into the text window’s display screen.The Pause command is duplicated by the button on the text display toolbar (Figure 264).

Text > Display Screen > View ToolbarShows or hides the text window’s display screen toolbar (Figure 264).

33 That is, the contents of the text window’s display screen buffer — all the characters you can see and scroll to in the display screen.

FIGURE 112 Text display screen — save contents dialog box

FIGURE 113 Text display screen — Insert Text dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

Text > Display Screen > PropertiesThe Properties command opens a dialog box in which you• specify the type of data you want displayed in the

current text window’s display screen — Realtime, Logged or both

• turn on the display of invalid and partially-invalid data34 (in addition to the standard display of primary/real data35)

• enable automatic web publishing (publishing HTML files) of the current text window’s display screen

• enable automatic Internet publishing (publishing HTML files onto a www server) of the current text window’s display screen

• select the model of dataTaker to be used by the current text window’s display screen.

The Properties command is duplicated by the button on the text display toolbar (Figure 264).

Text > Entry ScreenThese commands become available when you click in the text window’s entry screen.

Edit Menu CommandsRemember that you can use commands on the Edit menu to work with text in text entry screens. See Figure 33 on page 34.

Text > Entry Screen > Command Edit ModeToggles the text window’s entry screen between two modes:• Command-Edit Mode The entry screen behaves like

a true text editor — the Enter key takes you to the next line. The command is ticked when the screen is in command-edit mode.

• To-dataTaker Mode The entry screen behaves like a terminal emulator — the Enter key sends the line containing the insertion point to the dataTaker (as well as taking you to the next line). The command is un-ticked when the screen is in to-dataTaker mode.

The Command Edit Mode command is duplicated by the button on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265). Be

aware that although this button has the same icon as the Edit Mode button on other window toolbars, it does not perform the identical function.




Data filter: select the type of data you want displayed in the window.Tick if you want invalid and partially-invalid virtual channel data to be displayed in the screen (primary/real data is always displayed).


Select the model of dataTaker to be used if the text display screen has any model-specific decisions to make.

FIGURE 114 Text display screen — Properties dialog box



FIGURE 115 Text > Entry Screen submenu


UM

-007

0-A

0

Text > Entry Screen > Open Text FileOpens a navigation box that allows you to locate and open• a command file (.cmd)• a DeTransfer file (.dxc)• a text file (.txt)

in the text window’s entry screen.

The Open Text File command is duplicated by the button on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265).

Text > Entry Screen > Load DLP TextPlaces — as plain text (dataTaker command lines) — the program from one of the following sources into the text window’s entry screen:• the current project’s program builder windows• all jobs in a connected DT800• the ONRESET job in a connected DT800

Select the program source in the dialog box that opens.

Use this feature to view, analyze, edit and send — all in plain text form — a program that was originally created graphically (that is, in a program builder window).Program text you load in this way completely replaces the contents of the entry screen.The Load DLP Text command is duplicated by the button on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265).

Text > Entry Screen > Save Text FileOpens a navigation box that allows you to save the contents of the text window’s entry screen as• a command file (.cmd)• a DeTransfer file (.dxc)• a text file (.txt).

The Save Text File command is duplicated by the button on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265).

Text > Entry Screen > Send LineSends the current line of text (the line containing the insertion point) to the connection shown in the text window’s Connection list box (Figure 220).The Send Line command is duplicated by the button on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265).

Text > Entry Screen > Send HighlightedSends text you highlight in the entry screen to the connection shown in the text window’s Connection list box (Figure 220).The Send Highlighted command is duplicated by the button on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265).

Text > Entry Screen > Send ProgramSends the entire contents of the entry screen (“send all”) to the connection shown in the text window’s Connection list box (Figure 220).The Send Program command is duplicated by the button on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265).

FIGURE 116 Text entry screen — Open Text File dialog box

All jobs in a connected DT800The ONRESET program in a connected DT800Program builder windows in the current project

FIGURE 117 Text entry screen — load dataTaker program text dialog box

FIGURE 118 Text entry screen — Save Text File dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

Text > Entry Screen > Set User Buttons The text window’s entry screen has five buttons to which you can assign text strings. When you click one of these buttons (see next topic), DeLogger Pro immediately sends the text string to the dataTaker at the connection selected in the Connection drop-down list (at the bottom of the text window). These buttons are an easy way of sending frequently-used commands.Choose Set User Buttons to open the dialog box in which you assign text to the five buttons.

The Set User Buttons command is duplicated by the button on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265).

Text > Entry Screen > User Buttons The commands on the User Buttons submenu each send a user-defined text string to the current dataTaker. See “Text > Entry Screen > Set User Buttons” above.

The User Button 1 to User Button 5 commands are duplicated by the buttons on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265).

Text > Entry Screen > Clear Entry BufferDeletes the entire contents of the text window’s entry screen36.The Clear Entry Buffer command is duplicated by the button on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265).“In case of emergency”, the Undo command on the Edit menu returns the screen’s contents (or use the button on the text entry toolbar).

Text > Entry Screen > Go To Matching BraceTo locate the mate of a brace character ( or ) in a text window’s edit screen, click the I -beam cursor on either side of the brace then choose Go To Matching Brace. The cursor jumps to the matching brace.The Go To Matching Brace command is duplicated by the

button on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265), and the Go To Matching Brace command on the Edit menu (page 36).

Text > Entry Screen > View ToolbarShows or hides the text window’s entry screen toolbar (Figure 265).

Text > Splitter ViewAlternates the text window between• splitter view (splits the window to show both the

display screen and the entry screen) and• display-screen-only view.

The Splitter View command is duplicated by the button on the text display toolbar (Figure 264).

Type the text to send when you click the button.

FIGURE 119 Text entry screen — Set User Buttons dialog box

FIGURE 120 Text > Entry Screen > User Buttons submenu

36 That is, the contents of the text window’s entry screen buffer — all the characters you can see and scroll to in the entry screen.


UM

-007

0-A

0

The Mimic MenuWhen a mimic window (Figure 221) is front-most, DeLogger’s seventh menu changes to Mimic.

The Mimic menu contains commands for creating and editing various meters, indicators and buttons that you can use to display live data (realtime and replay data) and perform actions.REMEMBER… To create and edit mimics, the mimic window must be in edit mode. For the mimics to display live data, the mimic window must be in run mode. See “Mimic > Edit Mode” on page 102.

Location of New MimicsWhen you create a new mimic, DeLogger always places it at the top-left corner of the mimic window.

Selecting, Moving and Resizing MimicsSingle-click anywhere within a mimic’s panel to select the panel. Shading fills the panel and handles appear. Once a mimic panel is selected, you can• move it by

• dragging the shaded area• using the arrow keys (nudging37)

• resize it by• dragging its handles• using Ctrl+up/down/left/right arrow key to scale

up by moving the panel’s top/bottom/left/right border

• using Ctrl+Shift+up/down/left/right arrow key to scale down by moving the panel’s top/bottom/left/right border.

Mimic Context Menus (Right-Click Menus)When the mimic window is in edit mode, right-clicking in a blank area of the window pops-up a context menu (Figure 122) that allows you to create mimics and add pictures directly.

In addition, right-clicking an existing mimic panel or picture pops-up a context menu containing frequently-used commands (Figure 123).

Mimic Attributes (Double-Click Dialog Boxes)Once you’ve created a mimic, you can modify many of its attributes (range, ticks, colors, axis details,…) in dialog boxes that you open by double-clicking a particular area of the mimic. See “Mimic Attribute Dialog Boxes” beginning on page 146.

FIGURE 121 DeLogger’s Mimic menu

37 Advanced users only: use Regedit.exe to set the arrow key nudge distance by modifying the registry key HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Discbell\DeLogger\Mimic\GridGranularity (pixels).

FIGURE 122 Right-click the blank mimic work area.

FIGURE 123 Right-click an existing mimic.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Mimic > Needle Meters

You add needle meters to the current mimic window by creating needle meter panels. Each panel can contain up to five needle meters, and appear with or without a border. Each meter on a panel can display up to five data channels (that is, five needles per meter).To add a needle meter panel, choose the Needle Meters command. In the dialog box that opens, each tab specifies the details of one meter within the panel.

You can add as many needle meter panels as your computer’s resources allow.The Needle Meters command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266 on page 176).

Mimic > Arc Meters

You add arc meters to the current mimic window by creating arc meter panels. Each panel can contain up to five arc meters, and appear with or without a border. Each arc meter displays one data channel.To add an arc meter panel, choose the Arc Meters command. In the dialog box that opens, each tab specifies the details of one meter within the panel.

You can add as many arc meter panels as your computer’s resources allow.The Arc Meters command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).

Mimic > Pie Meters

You add pie meters to the current mimic window by creating pie meter panels. Each panel can contain up to five pie meters, and appear with or without a border. Each pie meter displays one data channel.

Panel (with border) containing one needle meter

Panel (with border) containing four needle meters

Panel (without border) containing two needle meters

FIGURE 124 Needle meters

Create up to five meters on a panel.

Display up to five channels (five needles) on each meter.

Add a border to the panel.

Text that appears below the meter

Units, and date and time can also appear

below the meter.

Assign a channel to create a needle on the meter.

FIGURE 125 Needle meters dialog box

Panel (with border) containing two arc meters

FIGURE 126 Arc meters



Assign a channel to the arc meter.

Each arc meter displays one channel.

FIGURE 127 Arc meters dialog box

See Figure 125.

Panel (with border) containing two pie meters

FIGURE 128 Pie meters


UM

-007

0-A

0

To add a pie meter panel, choose the Pie Meters command. In the dialog box that opens, each tab specifies the details of one meter within the panel.

You can add as many pie meter panels as your computer’s resources allow.The Pie Meters command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).

Mimic > Temperature Meter

You add temperature meters to the current mimic window by creating temperature meter panels. Each panel contains one temperature meter, and can appear with or without a border. Each temperature meter displays one data channel.

To add a temperature meter panel, choose the Temperature Meter command. In the dialog box that opens, specify the details of the meter within the panel.

You can add as many temperature meter panels as your computer’s resources allow.The Temperature Meter command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).

Mimic > Annunciator

An annunciator is a panel that changes color according to alarm values (thresholds) that you set for a channel in the data hub — see the Alarm Settings screen in Figure 290 on page 214. Note that these data hub alarms are not the same as alarms you incorporate into a program and send to a dataTaker.Each panel contains one annunciator, and each annunciator displays one channel’s data hub alarm states.To add an annunciator panel, choose the Annunciator command and, in the dialog box that opens, select the



Assign a channel to the pie meter.

Each pie meter displays one channel.

FIGURE 129 Pie meters dialog box

See Figure 125.

Temperature meter panel (with border)

FIGURE 130 Temperature meter

One temperature meter per panel


Assign a channel to the temperaturemeter.

Each temperature meter displays one channel.

FIGURE 131 Temperature meter dialog box

See Figure 125.

Annunciator panel

Low-Low Low Normal High High-High

A channel’s annunciator thresholds are determined by alarm values you set in the data hub (Configuration menu > Data Hub Channels > Properties button).

FIGURE 132 An annunciator panel and its five possible states/colors


UM

-007

0-A

0

channel for which you previously activated one or more alarm thresholds in the data hub.

You can add as many annunciator panels as your computer’s resources allow.The Annunciator command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).

Mimic > Digital

A digital meter is a panel containing a channel’s current value. If you’ve used the data hub to set one or more alarms for the channel, the displayed value changes color according to alarm threshold(s) — see the Alarm Settings screen in Figure 290 on page 214. Note that these data hub alarms are not the same as alarms you incorporate into a program and send to a dataTaker.Each panel contains one digital meter, and each meter displays one channel’s current value (and optional data hub alarm states).

To add a digital panel, choose the Digital command and, in the dialog box that opens, select the channel to be displayed.

You can add as many digital panels as your computer’s resources allow.The Digital command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).

Mimic > LED Indicators

You add LED indicators to the current mimic window by creating LED panels. Each panel can contain up to five LEDs, and appear with or without a border. Each LED shows red or green depending on whether the current value of its channel is above or below a user-defined threshold.

Select the precision of the annunciator (decimal places).

One annunciator per panel

Assign a channel to the annunciator.

FIGURE 133 Annunciator dialog box

Digital panel

Low-Low Low Normal High High-High

A channel’s digital thresholds are determined by alarm values you set in the data hub (Configuration menu > Data Hub Channels > Properties button).

FIGURE 134 A digital panel and its five possible states/colors

Select the number of decimal places to display in the digital meter.

One digital meter per panel

Assign a channel to the digital meter.

FIGURE 135 Digital dialog box

Panel (with border) containing four LED indicators

FIGURE 136 A LED indicator panel


UM

-007

0-A

0

To add an LED indicator panel, choose the LED Indicators command. In the dialog box that opens, each tab specifies the details of one LED within the panel.

You can add as many LED panels as your computer’s resources allow.The LED Indicators command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).

Mimic > Buttons

A button can send text (a command, for example) to a connected data site, or initiate a DeLogger action, or do both from a single click.You add buttons to the current mimic window by creating button panels. Each panel can contain up to five buttons.To add a button panel, choose the Buttons command. In the dialog box that opens, specify• the label you want to appear on the button• text you want sent (and the target data site) when you

click the button• an action you want run when you click the button.

You can add as many button panels as your computer’s resources allow.To move a button panel, drag it by its shaded border. To open its context menu, right-click its border.The Buttons command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).

Mimic > PictureYou can import graphics files into a mimic window to use as a window background or, for example, to build a process flowchart that incorporates DeLogger mimics and buttons.To do this, choose Picture and, in the dialog box that opens, locate the image you want to import. DeLogger supports bitmap (.bmp) and Windows Metafile (.wmf) graphics file types.

DeLogger places the picture in the upper-left corner of the mimic window. After single-clicking the picture to select it, you can• resize it (using the handles)• drag it to a new location.

A selection of pictures is provided in DeLogger’s Picture folder (see Figure 7 on page 18).You can add as many pictures as your computer’s resources allow.The Picture command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).

Mimic > PauseThis command stops and starts the input of data to the mimic window. While Pause is ticked on the menu, data is not updated in the window.Pause is only available when the window is in run mode (described in “Mimic > Edit Mode” next).The Pause command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).If channel data isn’t updating in the mimic window, it may be because the window is paused.

Create up to five LEDs on a panel.


Assign a channel to the LED.

The LED is green when the channel data is below the value you type in Threshold, and red when above. To reverse this action, Tick Above Threshold = Green LED.

FIGURE 137 LED indicator dialog box

See Figure 125.

Panel containing three buttons

FIGURE 138 A button panel

Create up to five buttons on a panel.

Run this DeLogger action when the button is clicked.

Send this text to this destination when the button is clicked.

Button label

FIGURE 139 Button panel dialog box

Type the path to the picture you want, or click the Browse button and then (in the dialog box that opens) navigate to the file.

FIGURE 140 Picture dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

Mimic > Edit ModeA mimic window has two modes: edit mode and run mode. Choosing the Edit Mode command toggles the window state between• edit mode — for creating and editing mimics, and• run mode — for updating mimics with live data as it

arrives in the window (Edit Mode is un-ticked on the Form menu).

You can quickly see when a window is in edit mode because• Edit Mode is ticked on the Mimic menu• the word Edit appears on the window’s tab• the word Edit appears after the filename in the

window’s title bar• the word Edit appears after the mimic window’s

filename on the Window menu.If channel data isn’t updating in the window, it may be because the window is in edit mode.The Edit Mode command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).

Mimic > Edit PanelUse Edit Panel when you want to alter a mimic panel (for example, add or remove a meter from the panel, assign a different channel, or change a meter’s label).Put the mimic window into edit mode, single-click the mimic panel to select it, then choose Edit Panel. The panel’s dialog box opens allowing you to make changes to the mimic details.(The Panel Border setting cannot be changed.)Edit Panel applies to the currently-selected — or to the last-selected if nothing is selected — mimic panel or picture.The Edit Panel command — disguised as Properties — is also available on a context menu that pops up when you right-click a mimic panel.

Mimic > ArrangeEvery mimic panel is created on its own invisible layer. A new mimic is automatically placed in front of (on top of) any existing ones.

The Arrange command is also available on a context menu that pops up when you right-click a mimic panel.NOTE Clicking a mimic panel or picture (when the window is in edit mode) automatically brings it to the front.

Mimic > Arrange > Back OneMoves the selected mimic panel one layer back/down.

Mimic > Arrange > Forward OneMoves the selected mimic panel one layer forward/up.

Mimic > Arrange > Send To BackMoves the selected mimic panel to the back/bottom of the layer stack.

Mimic > Arrange > Bring To FrontMoves the selected mimic panel to the front/top of the layer stack.

FIGURE 141 Mimic > Arrange submenu


UM

-007

0-A

0

Mimic > LockLocks the selected mimic panel against deletion and layer changes.To unlock a mimic panel, right-click the mimic and, in the context menu that pops up, choose (un-tick) Lock.

Mimic > DeleteDeletes the selected mimic panel. If the panel is locked, you must unlock it before you can delete it.The Delete command is also available as Remove on the context menu that pops up when you right-click a mimic panel.

Mimic > Scale Text UpIncreases the size of text in the selected mimic panel (by one point each time you choose the command).Put the mimic window into edit mode, single-click the mimic panel to select it, then choose Scale Text Up.The Scale Text Up command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).Scale Text Up applies to the currently-selected — or to the last-selected if nothing is selected — mimic panel.

Mimic > Scale Text DownDecreases the size of text in the selected mimic panel (by one point each time you choose the command).Put the mimic window into edit mode, single-click the mimic panel to select it, then choose Scale Text Down.The Scale Text Down command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).Scale Text Down applies to the currently-selected — or to the last-selected if nothing is selected — mimic panel.

Mimic > View ToolbarShows or hides the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).

Mimic > Publish Publish becomes available when you’ve enabled web publishing. See• “Configuration > Web Publish” on page 58• “DeLogger Pro Web Publishing” on page 229.

The Publish command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).

Mimic > PropertiesThe Properties command opens a dialog box in which you• specify the type of data you want displayed in the

current mimic window — Realtime, Logged or both• turn on the display of invalid and partially-invalid


• enable automatic web publishing (publishing HTML files) of the current mimic window

• enable automatic Internet publishing (publishing HTML files onto a www server) of the current mimic window

• select the model of dataTaker to be used by the current mimic window.

The command is only available when the mimic window is in edit mode.

The Properties command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).







FIGURE 142 Mimic window Properties dialog box




UM

-007

0-A

0

The Spread MenuWhen a spreadsheet window (Figure 225) is front-most, DeLogger’s seventh menu changes to Spread.

The Spread menu contains commands for working with static data that you import into a DeLogger spreadsheet window from various sources:• a replay file (.dlr, .dcp or .dx? file types40)• a text (.txt), Excel® (.xls) or Formula One41 (.vts) file

• DeLogger’s data database If you’re using DeLogger Pro:• Click in the worksheet area of the window to make

the majority of the Spread menu commands available.

• Click in the chart area of the window to make the Chart Type and Publish commands available.

Spreadsheet Chart Right-Click Menu In DeLogger Pro, right-clicking in the chart area of the spreadsheet window pops-up a menu that you use to modify the chart’s general appearance, its data series and some characteristics of specific chart elements, and carry out file-related operations (Figure 144).

For more information, see “Spreadsheet Chart Right-Click Dialog Boxes” beginning on page 152.

Spreadsheet Chart Double-Click Dialog Boxes In addition to the right-click menu, you can double-click individual spreadsheet chart elements (title, data series trace, plot42, legend, axis, axis label, subtitle,…). This opens dialog boxes that give you comprehensive control of the particular element’s characteristics.For more information, see “Spreadsheet Chart Element Dialog Boxes” beginning on page 159.

Edit Menu CommandsRemember that when a spreadsheet window is front-most, you can use commands on the Edit menu to work with cells and cell data. See Figure 33 on page 34.

40 .dlr — DeLogger replay file.dcp — DeCipher Plus file.dxd — DT800 logged data file.dxa — DT800 logged alarms file

41 See “Formula One Workbook Designer” on page 138.

FIGURE 143 DeLogger’s Spreadsheet menu

Modify a spreadsheet chart’s type, style, layout and axes.

Modify a spreadsheet chart’s data.

Format specific chart elements.

File-related operations

FIGURE 144 Right-click the spreadsheet’s chart. See also Figure 228 (page 151).


UM

-007

0-A

0

Spread > Load Session From Database Loads a session43 from DeLogger Pro’s database into the current spreadsheet window’s worksheet. Select the session in the dialog box that opens (Figure 145).If you’re using DeLogger Pro and therefore have a chart area visible on the right of the worksheet area (Figure 225), click in the spreadsheet to make Load Session From Database available.The Load Session From Database command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).

Spread > Load Session From FileLoads a replay file into the current spreadsheet window’s worksheet. Select the replay file in the dialog box that opens.

If you’re using DeLogger Pro and therefore have a chart area visible on the right of the worksheet area (Figure 225), click in the spreadsheet to make Load Session From File available.The Load Session From File command is duplicated by the

button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).

42 Plot: the group of data series traces43 An existing unload session or a logging session — see

“Logging Sessions” on page 60.

Select the Database containing the session whose data you want to load into the current worksheet. Usually you’ll only have data in the Current database

Select the Session you want to load into the current worksheet.SQL (Structured Query Language) statements can also be typed into this field to retrieve data from sessions in the selected database: see any general SQL text for statement syntax.Usually the data in a session comes from a single connection, but it can be provided by more than one. Select the Connection that contributed data to the session, or select * to load data from all connections. (SQL statements can also be typed into this field.)Usually there is only one job, named JOB1. Select the Job from which you want to load data, or select * to load data from all jobs.Select the Schedule from which you want to load data, or select * to load data from all schedules.Select the channel Label for which you want to load data, or select * to load data for all channel labels. (SQL statements can also be typed into this field.)

Click Get Dates. DeLogger Pro searches the data set defined by your selections above and places its start and end date and time into these fields. You can edit these dates and times to further refine the data set to be loaded from the database.

Click OK to begin loading the specified session data into the current worksheet.

FIGURE 145 Load database session dialog box

unless you’ve previously archived it (see“Administration > Archive Data Database” on page 205).

FIGURE 146 Load replay file dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

Spread > Import Sheet Imports worksheet-formatted44 data into the current spreadsheet window.

The Import Sheet command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).

Spread > Export SheetSaves the contents of the current spreadsheet window’s workbook as a Formula One (.vts), Microsoft Excel (.xls), HTML (.htm) or tabbed text (.txt) file.

The Export Sheet command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).

Spread > Load Into External SpreadsheetLaunches Microsoft Excel (if it’s installed on the computer) and opens a new Excel spreadsheet with the contents of the current DeLogger spreadsheet window (its worksheets and their data) loaded into it.

The Excel spreadsheet is• automatically named with the time at which you

choose Load Into External Spreadsheet (in ISO format — for example, 110436.xls if the time is 11:04am)

• automatically saved in DeLogger’s Export folder (see Figure 7 on page 18).

The Load Into External Spreadsheet command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).

44 Formula One (.vts), Excel (.xls) and tabbed text (.txt) files

FIGURE 147 Import worksheet file dialog box

FIGURE 148 Export worksheet file dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

Spread > Chart Type Use the Chart Type commands to choose the way data is presented in the chart area of the spreadsheet window. Click in the spreadsheet window’s chart area to make these submenus available.

There are additional chart types available. You access these by double-clicking beside the trace(s) in the chart, or by right-clicking in the chart area. See “The Spreadsheet Graph Area” on page 151.

Spread > Update Chart Forces an update of the chart, which may be necessary after certain user changes in the spreadsheet window’s worksheet.The Update Chart command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).

Spread > Background Colour Use this command to choose and apply a background color to the current worksheet in the spreadsheet window. The dialog box contains a palette of ready-made colors, or you can create your own.

FIGURE 149 Chart Type submenus

2D 3D

Area

Bar

Line

Step

Combination

Pie

Horizontal bar

HiLo

Gantt

Bubble

Contour

XY (scatter)

Polar

Radar

Area

Bar

Line

Step

Combination

Pie

Horizontal bar

Cluster bar

Gantt

Doughnut

Surface

XYZ (scatter)

FIGURE 150 Spreadsheet window chart types

Saturation

HueHue

Saturation

Preview the

custom color





FIGURE 151 Spreadsheet background color dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

Spread > Show HeadersToggles the display of row and column headers in the current worksheet of the spreadsheet window.The Show Headers command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).

Spread > Show GridlinesToggles the display of cell gridlines in the current worksheet of the spreadsheet window.The Show Gridlines command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).

Spread > View ToolbarShows or hides the spreadsheet window’s toolbar (Figure 267).


UM

-007

0-A

0

Spread > FormatUse the commands on the Format submenu to configure the appearance of the selected worksheet cells and their contents.

Spread > Format > AlignmentThis command opens the Alignment dialog box, in which you specify the horizontal and vertical placement of data in the selected cells, and enable word wrap.

Don’t confuse this with the General data format — see “Spread > Format > General” on page 110.

Spread > Format > FontThis command opens a dialog box in which you specify the typeface, style and size of data in the selected cells.These settings override the spreadsheet’s default font (for the selected cells only). See “Spread > Format > Default Font” on page 111.

Spread > Format > BorderChoose this command to apply thin, thick, dashed or double borders in a variety of colors to the currently-selected spreadsheet cells.

Data formats

FIGURE 152 Spread > Format submenu








UM

-007

0-A

0


Spread > Format > PatternChoose this command to apply a fill colour to the currently-selected spreadsheet cells, with an overlaying pattern if required.


Spread > Format > GeneralApplies the General data format — the default format that’s appropriate for the type of data — to the selected cells. By default, every new spreadsheet has the General data format applied to all of its cells. This causes the spreadsheet to recognize data you enter into these cells as• a number when the data contains only numeric

characters• text when the data contains one or more alpha

characters• a date when the data contains slashes and has the


Note that there’s also a General horizontal alignment option — see “Spread > Format > Alignment” on page 109.

Spread > Format > FixedFormats (corrects) the values in the selected cells to no (zero) decimal places.46 For example, a value of 1234.56789 becomes 1,235.This command is duplicated by a button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267 on page 176).

Spread > Format > Fixed (1) to (5)These commands format (correct) the values in the selected cells to 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 decimal places.46 For example, Fixed (1) formats 1234.56789 to 1234.6, and Fixed (4) formats the same value to 1234.5679.These commands are duplicated by buttons on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).

Spread > Format > Percent % Displays numeric values in the selected cells as percentages. DeLogger Pro multiplies each number by 100 and appends the % character.If you enter a percentage into a cell (for example, you type 58.33%), DeLogger Pro recognizes the % symbol and therefore displays the value in percent format, but stores the value in numeric format (for example, as 0.5833).

Spread > Format > Scientific Displays numeric values in the selected cells in scientific notation. For example, DeLogger Pro displays the value 0.00035 as 3.50E-04 when you apply the scientific format.If you type a number in scientific format (for example, you type 19.1E3), DeLogger Pro recognizes this as scientific format, and displays it as 1.91E+04 and stores it as 19100. You can use E or e when typing in scientific format.

Spread > Format > Date (yyyy/mm/dd)Applies the ISO47 date format to numeric data in the selected cells.

Spread > Format > Time (hh:mm:ss) Applies the ISO23 time format to numeric data in the selected cells.

Spread > Format > Custom Number If none of the number formats on DeLogger Pro’s Spread > Formats submenu (Figure 152) is suitable, the Custom

45 The color is defined in the Windows Display (or Display Properties) control panel: Appearance tab > Item drop-down list > Message Box > Font Color.



47 International Organization for Standardization; ISO 8601


UM

-007

0-A

0

Number command opens a dialog box that allows you to select others or build your own.

Spread > Format > Default FontOpens a dialog box in which you specify the default font (typeface, style and size) for the current DeLogger spreadsheet window.If you have more than one spreadsheet window, each can have a different default typeface, font style and/or font size.You can override the default font for selected cells — see “Spread > Format > Font” on page 109.

Spread > Calculation The Calculation command opens a dialog box that allows you to• turn automatic worksheet recalculation on or off• control the number of times a circular reference is


Setting Automatic RecalculationIf you want DeLogger Pro to recalculate all the formulas on all the spreadsheet window worksheets (and update the cell data) every time a cell is changed, tick Automatic Recalc in the Calculation dialog box. Doing this ensures that calculated data is always up-to-date.However, for large worksheets and/or many formulas, these recalculations may slow DeLogger Pro down. If you notice this occurring, un-tick Automatic Recalc. (Later, you’ll need to enable Automatic Recalc to update the worksheets.)

Setting IterationIf you want DeLogger Pro to calculate formulas that contain circular references (that is, each formula depends on the other for its result), tick Iteration in the Calculation dialog box. Then DeLogger Pro repeats the calculation (iterates) and stops after 100 iterations or after the calculated values change by less than 0.001 between iterations.To change these defaults (100 and 0.001), type new numbers in the Maximum Iterations and Maximum Change fields in the Calculation dialog box.

Ready-made formats



FIGURE 156 Custom number format dialog box Enable or disable calculations that contain circular references.




UM

-007

0-A

0

Spread > Sort You can sort48 selected cells in a spreadsheet window’s worksheet, and specify up to 10 keys by which the data is sorted.To do this, select the cells that you want to sort then choose Spread > Sort. In the dialog box that opens, specify the criteria for the sort operation and click OK.

To set up the Keys area of the Sort dialog box for a sort operation:• Choose Key 1, type (in the Key Reference field) the

reference of a cell in the first row/column you want to sort by, and select Ascending or Descending for this key.

• If you want to sort possible duplicates that may arise in Key 1’s row/column, you can specify a second-order sort. To do this, choose Key 2, type the reference of a cell in the second row/column you want to sort by, and select Ascending or Descending for this key.

• Similarly, you can specify a third-order sort, and so on.

Spread > Define Name For simplicity and convenience when working with a DeLogger Pro spreadsheet window worksheet, you can apply a meaningful name to• an individual cell• a range of cells• a constant value• a formula.

Then you can use the name to identify and work with the item instead of, say, a complicated formula or a long constant. For example, you can apply the name LtSp to the constant 186000 and use LtSp in formulas instead of the 6-digit number.The Define Name command opens a dialog box in which you can• name the selected item (cell, range, constant or


Don’t use the names Print_Area or Print_Titles. These names are reserved for DeLogger Pro’s own use.

48 That is, rearrange rows according to the contents of one or more columns, or rearrange columns according to the contents of one or more rows.

Sort by rows or by columns.

For each sort key you want to use, type a Key Reference (to define the sort row/column) and select Ascending or Descending .

Data is first sorted by Key 1, then by Key 2, and so on.You can apply up to 10 keys to a sort operation.

FIGURE 158 Sort dialog box Add the contents of the Name field to the list.







UM

-007

0-A

0

Spread > Set Print Range From SelectionDeLogger’s spreadsheet window prints all the data on the active worksheet unless you specify the cell range(s) you want to print. To do this, firstly select (by dragging) the required cells, then choose Spread > Set Print Range From Selection.The selected cells or ranges don’t have to be adjacent. Ways of selecting contiguous and non-contiguous cells are covered in “Using the Mouse with Worksheets” on page 160.Before printing, we recommend that you always use the File > Print Preview command to check the print range. This print range stays in effect until you select another, and is saved when you save the project.The Set Print Range From Selection command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).

Spread > Insert Page BreakIf a worksheet is larger than the print area defined in the Print Setup dialog box49, DeLogger automatically divides the worksheet into page-sized sections for printing. It does this by inserting automatic (and invisible) page breaks.You can also specify one or more manual page breaks in a worksheet. To do this, select the cell below and to the right of where you want the page to break, then choose Spread > Insert Page Break. DeLogger inserts• a horizontal (row) break along the top edge of the



When you insert a manual page break, DeLogger adjusts the automatic page breaks in the remainder of the worksheet.Before printing, we recommend that you always use the File > Print Preview command to check the page breaks.

The breaks stay in effect until you remove them (see “Spread > Remove Page Break” next), and are saved when you save the project.

Spread > Remove Page BreakUse this command to remove manual page breaks.To remove a horizontal break, select a cell immediately below it then choose Spread > Remove Page Break.To remove a vertical break, select a cell immediately to its right then choose Spread > Remove Page Break. See Figure 161.

Spread > Publish Publish becomes available when you’ve enabled web publishing. See• “Configuration > Web Publish” on page 58• “DeLogger Pro Web Publishing” on page 229.

The Publish command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).


Active cell

Vertical page break








UM

-007

0-A

0

Spread > PropertiesThe Properties command opens a dialog box in which you• enable automatic Internet publishing (publishing

HTML files onto a www server) of the current spread window

• select the model of dataTaker to be used by the current spread window.

The Properties command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).



FIGURE 162 Spreadsheet window Properties dialog box



UM

-007

0-A

0

The Analysis Menu The Analysis menu and analysis windows are only available in DeLogger Pro. When an analysis window (Figure 241) is front-most, DeLogger’s seventh menu changes to Analysis.

The Analysis menu contains commands for working with static data that you import into a DeLogger analysis window from various sources:• a replay file (.dlr, .dcp or .dx? file types50)• a text (.txt), Excel (.xls) or Formula One51 (.vts) file • DeLogger’s data database

Analysis Chart Double-Click Dialog BoxDouble-click the analysis window’s chart area to open the chart Properties dialog box — Figure 100 (page 86).

Edit Menu CommandsRemember that when an analysis window is front-most, you can use commands on the Edit menu to work with cells and cell data. See Figure 33 on page 34.

50 .dlr — DeLogger replay file.dcp — DeCipher Plus file.dxd — DT800 logged data file.dxa — DT800 logged alarms file

51 See “Formula One Workbook Designer” on page 138.

FIGURE 163 DeLogger’s Analysis menu


UM

-007

0-A

0

Analysis > Load Session From Database Loads a session52 from DeLogger Pro’s database into the current analysis window’s worksheet. Select the session in the dialog box that opens (Figure 164).The Load Session From Database command is only available when you click in the worksheet area of the analysis window, and is duplicated by the button on the analysis toolbar (Figure 268).

Analysis > Load Session From File Loads a replay file into the current analysis window’s worksheet. Select the replay file in the dialog box that opens.

The Load Session From File command is only available when you click in the worksheet area of the analysis window, and is duplicated by the button on the analysis toolbar (Figure 268).

52 An existing unload session or a logging session — see “Logging Sessions” on page 60.

Select the Database containing the session whose data you want to load into the current worksheet. Usually you’ll only have data in the Current database

Select the Session you want to load into the current worksheet.SQL (Structured Query Language) statements can also be typed into this field to retrieve data from sessions in the selected database: see any general SQL text for statement syntax.Usually the data in a session comes from a single connection, but it can be provided by more than one. Select the Connection that contributed data to the session, or select * to load data from all connections. (SQL statements can also be typed into this field.)Usually there is only one job, named JOB1. Select the Job from which you want to load data, or select * to load data from all jobs.Select the Schedule from which you want to load data, or select * to load data from all schedules.Select the channel Label for which you want to load data, or select * to load data for all channel labels. (SQL statements can also be typed into this field.)

Click Get Dates. DeLogger Pro searches the data set defined by your selections above and places its start and end date and time into these fields. You can edit these dates and times to further refine the data set to be loaded from the database.

Click OK to begin loading the specified session data into the current worksheet.

FIGURE 164 Load database session dialog box

unless you’ve previously archived it (see“Administration > Archive Data Database” on page 205).

FIGURE 165 Load replay file dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

Analysis > Import Sheet Imports worksheet-formatted53 data into the current analysis window.

The Import Sheet command is duplicated by the button on the analysis toolbar (Figure 268).

Analysis > Export Sheet Saves the contents of the current analysis window’s workbook as a Formula One (.vts), Excel (.xls), HTML (.htm) or tabbed text (.txt) file.

The Export Sheet command is duplicated by the button on the analysis toolbar (Figure 268).

Analysis > Load Into External Spreadsheet Launches Microsoft Excel (if it’s installed on the computer) and opens a new Excel spreadsheet with the contents of the current DeLogger analysis window (its worksheets and their data) loaded into it.The Excel spreadsheet is• automatically named with the time at which you

choose Load Into External Spreadsheet (in ISO format — for example, 110436.xls if the time is 11:04am)

• automatically saved in DeLogger’s Export folder (see Figure 7 on page 18).

The Load Into External Spreadsheet command is duplicated by the button on the analysis toolbar (Figure 268).

Analysis > Update Chart Allows you to adjust the trend layout manually.When you choose Analysis > Update Chart, a dialog box opens in which you can adjust the Y axis visible band and range.

The Update Chart command is duplicated by the button on the analysis toolbar (Figure 268).

53 Formula One (.vts), Excel (.xls) and tabbed text (.txt) files

FIGURE 166 Import worksheet file dialog box

FIGURE 167 Export worksheet file dialog box

The maxima and minima of the data sets (columns) are compared, and any sets that are withing the Banding % value are placed on the same axis. Others (maximum of 6) are placed on the next available axis.

Range % controls the range of the Y data scales with respect to the data sets.

FIGURE 168 Adjust Y axis banding and range


UM

-007

0-A

0

Analysis > Background Colour Use this command to choose and apply a background color to the current worksheet in the analysis window. The dialog box contains a palette of ready-made colors, or you can create your own.

Analysis > Show Headers Toggles the display of row and column headers in the current worksheet of the analysis window.The Show Headers command is duplicated by the button on the analysis window’s toolbar (Figure 268).

Analysis > Show Gridlines Toggles the display of cell gridlines in the current worksheet of the analysis window.The Show Gridlines command is duplicated by the button on the analysis window’s toolbar (Figure 268).

Analysis > View Toolbar Shows or hides the analysis window’s toolbar (Figure 268).

Analysis > Format Use the commands on the Format submenu to configure the appearance of the selected worksheet cells and their contents.

Saturation

HueHue

Saturation

Preview the

custom color





FIGURE 169 Analysis worksheet background color dialog box

Data formats

FIGURE 170 Analysis > Format submenu


UM

-007

0-A

0

Analysis > Format > Alignment This command opens the Alignment dialog box, in which you specify the horizontal and vertical placement of data in the selected cells, and enable word wrap.

Don’t confuse this with the General data format — see “Analysis > Format > General” on page 119.

Analysis > Format > Font This command opens a dialog box in which you specify the typeface, style and size of data in the selected cells.These settings override the analysis worksheet’s default font (for the selected cells only). See “Analysis > Format > Default Font” on page 120.

Analysis > Format > Border Choose this command to apply thin, thick, dashed or double borders in a variety of colors to the currently-selected analysis worksheet cells.


Analysis > Format > Pattern Choose this command to apply a fill colour to the currently-selected analysis worksheet cells, with an overlaying pattern if required.


Analysis > Format > General Applies the General data format — the default format that’s appropriate for the type of data — to the selected cells. By default, every new analysis worksheet has the General data format applied to all of its cells. This causes the worksheet to recognize data you enter into these cells as• a number when the data contains only numeric

characters• text when the data contains one or more alpha

characters• a date when the data contains slashes and has the


Note that there’s also a General horizontal alignment option — see “Analysis > Format > Alignment” on page 119.







54 The color is defined in Windows Display (or Display Properties) control panel: Appearance tab > Item drop-down list > Message Box > Font Color.



UM

-007

0-A

0

Analysis > Format > Fixed Formats (corrects) the values in the selected cells to no (zero) decimal places.55 For example, a value of 1234.56789 becomes 1,235.This command is duplicated by a button on the analysis toolbar (Figure 268).

Analysis > Format > Fixed (1) to (5) These commands format (correct) the values in the selected cells to 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 decimal places.46 For example, Fixed (1) formats 1234.56789 to 1234.6, and Fixed (4) formats the same value to 1234.5679.These commands are duplicated by buttons on the analysis toolbar (Figure 268).

Analysis > Format > Percent % Displays numeric values in the selected cells as percentages. DeLogger Pro multiplies each number by 100 and appends the % character.If you enter a percentage into a cell (for example, you type 58.33%), DeLogger Pro recognizes the % symbol and therefore displays the value in percent format, but stores the value in numeric format (for example, as 0.5833).

Analysis > Format > Scientific Displays numeric values in the selected cells in scientific notation. For example, DeLogger Pro displays the value 0.00035 as 3.50E-04 when you apply the scientific format.If you type a number in scientific format (for example, you type 19.1E3), DeLogger Pro recognizes this as scientific format, and displays it as 1.91E+04 and stores it as 19100. You can use E or e when typing in scientific format.

Analysis > Format > Date (yyyy/mm/dd)

Applies the ISO56 date format to numeric data in the selected cells.

Analysis > Format > Time (hh:mm:ss) Applies the ISO23 time format to numeric data in the selected cells.

Analysis > Format > Custom Number If none of the number formats on DeLogger Pro’s Analysis > Formats submenu (Figure 170) is suitable, the Custom Number command opens a dialog box that allows you to select others or build your own.

Analysis > Format > Default Font Opens a dialog box in which you specify the default font (typeface, style and size) for the current analysis window.If you have more than one analysis window, each can have a different default typeface, font style and/or font size.You can override the default font for selected cells — see “Analysis > Format > Font” on page 119.


56 International Organization for Standardization; ISO 8601

Ready-made formats



FIGURE 174 Custom number format dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

Analysis > Calculation The Calculation command opens a dialog box that allows you to• turn automatic worksheet recalculation on or off• control the number of times a circular reference is


Setting Automatic RecalculationIf you want DeLogger Pro to recalculate all the formulas on all the analysis window worksheets (and update the cell data) every time a cell is changed, tick Automatic Recalc in the Calculation dialog box. Doing this ensures that calculated data is always up-to-date.However, for large worksheets and/or many formulas, these recalculations may slow DeLogger Pro down. If you notice this occurring, un-tick Automatic Recalc. (Later, you’ll need to enable Automatic Recalc to update the worksheets.)

Setting IterationIf you want DeLogger Pro to calculate formulas that contain circular references (that is, each formula depends on the other for its result), tick Iteration in the Calculation dialog box. Then DeLogger Pro repeats the calculation (iterates) and stops after 100 iterations or after the calculated values change by less than 0.001 between iterations.To change these defaults (100 and 0.001), type new numbers in the Maximum Iterations and Maximum Change fields in the Calculation dialog box.

Analysis > Sort You can sort57 selected cells in an analysis window’s worksheet, and specify up to 10 keys by which the data is sorted.To do this, select the cells that you want to sort then choose Analysis > Sort. In the dialog box that opens, specify the criteria for the sort operation and click OK.

To set up the Keys area of the Sort dialog box for a sort operation:• Choose Key 1, type (in the Key Reference field) the

reference of a cell in the first row/column you want to sort by, and select Ascending or Descending for this key.

• If you want to sort possible duplicates that may arise in Key 1’s row/column, you can specify a second-order sort. To do this, choose Key 2, type the reference of a cell in the second row/column you want to sort by, and select Ascending or Descending for this key.

• Similarly, you can specify a third-order sort, and so on.

Enable or disable calculations that contain circular references.



57 That is, rearrange rows according to the contents of one or more columns, or rearrange columns according to the contents of one or more rows.

Sort by rows or by columns.

For each sort key you want to use, type a Key Reference (to define the sort row/column) and select Ascending or Descending .

Data is first sorted by Key 1, then by Key 2, and so on.You can apply up to 10 keys to a sort operation.

FIGURE 176 Sort dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

Analysis > Define Name For simplicity and convenience when working with a DeLogger Pro analysis window worksheet, you can apply a meaningful name to• an individual cell• a range of cells• a constant value• a formula.

Then you can use the name to identify and work with the item instead of, say, a complicated formula or a long constant. For example, you can apply the name LtSp to the constant 186000 and use LtSp in formulas instead of the 6-digit number.The Define Name command opens a dialog box in which you can• name the selected item (cell, range, constant or


Don’t use the names Print_Area or Print_Titles. These names are reserved for DeLogger Pro’s own use.

Analysis > Set Print Range From Selection DeLogger’s analysis window prints all the data on the active worksheet unless you specify the cell range(s) you want to print. To do this, firstly select (by dragging) the required cells, then choose Analysis > Set Print Range From Selection.The selected cells or ranges don’t have to be adjacent. Ways of selecting contiguous and non-contiguous cells are covered in “Using the Mouse with Worksheets” on page 160.Before printing, we recommend that you always use the File > Print Preview command to check the print range. This print range stays in effect until you select another, and is saved when you save the project.The Set Print Range From Selection command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).

Analysis > Insert Page Break If a worksheet is larger than the print area defined in the Print Setup dialog box58, DeLogger Pro automatically divides the worksheet into page-sized sections for printing. It does this by inserting automatic (and invisible) page breaks.You can also specify one or more manual page breaks in a worksheet. To do this, select the cell below and to the right of where you want the page to break, then choose Analysis > Insert Page Break. DeLogger Pro inserts• a horizontal (row) break along the top edge of the



When you insert a manual page break, DeLogger Pro adjusts the automatic page breaks in the remainder of the worksheet.

Add the contents of the Name field to the list.







Active cell

Vertical page break




UM

-007

0-A

0

Before printing, we recommend that you always use the File > Print Preview command to check the page breaks. The breaks stay in effect until you remove them (see “Analysis > Remove Page Break” next), and are saved when you save the project.

Analysis > Remove Page BreakUse this command to remove manual page breaks.To remove a horizontal break, select a cell immediately below it then choose Analysis > Remove Page Break.To remove a vertical break, select a cell immediately to its right then choose Analysis > Remove Page Break. See Figure 179.

Analysis > Publish Publish becomes available when you’ve enabled web publishing. See• “Configuration > Web Publish” on page 58• “DeLogger Pro Web Publishing” on page 229.

The Publish command is duplicated by the button on the analysis toolbar (Figure 268).

Analysis > Properties The Properties command opens a dialog box in which you• enable automatic Internet publishing (publishing

HTML files onto a www server) of the current analysis window

• select the model of dataTaker to be used by the current analysis window.

The Properties command is duplicated by the button on the analysis toolbar (Figure 268).







FIGURE 180 Analysis window Properties dialog box



UM

-007

0-A

0

The Program Menu — DT5/6xxWhen a DT5/6xx program builder window (Figure 244) is front-most, DeLogger’s seventh menu changes to Program.

REMEMBER… To create and edit a program in a DT5/6xx program builder window, the window must be in edit mode. When you’ve finished editing, if you want to lock the window against changes, un-tick Edit Mode on the Program menu. See “Program > Edit Mode” on page 125.

Program > Send To ConnectionSends the dataTaker program — that is, everything defined on all tabs of the front-most DT5/6xx program builder — to the connected59 dataTaker.

Program > Send To Card On ConnectionSends the dataTaker program — that is, everything defined on all tabs of the front-most DT5/6xx program builder — to the program area of a memory card inserted in a connected59 dataTaker. In the dialog box that opens (Figure 182), you must select• the dataTaker’s behaviour when it starts the program

stored on the card (Mode of Operation area)• how the program starts and how the data storage

memory operates (Options area).

FIGURE 181 DeLogger’s DT5/6xx Program menu

59 If more than one connection is active, a dialog box opens asking you to choose a connection.

Instructs the dataTaker to store the sent program onto the card, and adds commands that prevent data storage on the card when

that program runs (data is stored in internal memory only).Select this option where a single card is created to be used to

program a number of dataTakers with the same program.

Instructs the dataTaker to store the sent program onto the card, and adds commands that clear any existing data from the card

when that program runs.Select this option where a single card is created to program a

single dataTaker, discarding old data at each restart.

Instructs the dataTaker to store the sent program onto the card, and adds commands that append new data to any existing data

in the card each time the program runs. The program must not change in any way between successive restarts, otherwise

appending the data becomes invalid.This function requires ROM Version 4.00 or later.

Select this option where a single card is created to program a single dataTaker, retaining all old data at each restart.

For example, this option allows you to set up a remote dataTaker that automatically restarts and continues logging after recovery

from a power failure.

When ticked, the /O command is added to the program to enable newest data to overwrite oldest data when the memory card becomes

full. If unticked, the /o command is added, and data logging stops when the card fills.

When ticked, the /Q command is added to the program to enable the dataTaker to be

programmed again from the card without first removing and re-inserting the card. If unticked,

the dataTaker can only be programmed once from the card while inserted.

When ticked, a LOGON command is added to the card program to enable data logging when

the program runs.FIGURE 182 DT5/6xx Card Management dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

Program > Arrange ChannelsTidies the channel icons in the current tab of the program builder by arranging them in a single vertical column.If Sort by Channel Number (Figure 183) is ticked, the Arrange Channels command also sorts the channel icons by channel number.The Arrange Channels command is duplicated by the button on the DT5/6xx program builder toolbar (Figure 269).

Program > Next Analogue ChannelAdds a new analog channel icon to the current program builder tab and automatically numbers it one higher than the highest analog channel number already used on the tab.The Next Analogue Channel command is duplicated by the button on the DT5/6xx program builder toolbar (Figure 269).

Program > Next Digital ChannelAdds a new digital channel icon to the current program builder tab and automatically numbers it one higher than the highest digital channel number already used on the tab.The Next Digital Channel command is duplicated by the

button on the DT5/6xx program builder toolbar (Figure 269).

Program > Next HSC ChannelAdds a new HSC (High Speed Counter) channel icon to the current program builder tab and automatically numbers it one higher than the highest HSC channel number already used on the tab.The Next HSC Channel command is duplicated by the

button on the DT5/6xx program builder toolbar (Figure 269).

Program > Edit ModeA DT5/6xx program builder window has two modes: edit mode and locked mode. Choosing the Edit Mode command toggles the window state between• edit mode — for creating and editing a dataTaker

program in the window, and• locked mode — channels can’t be changed (Edit

Mode is un-ticked on the Program menu).

You can quickly see when a window is in edit mode because• Edit Mode is ticked on the Program menu• the word Edit appears on the window’s tab• the word Edit appears after the filename in the

window’s title bar• the word Edit appears after the window’s filename on

the Window menu.The Edit Mode command is duplicated by the button on the DT5/6xx program builder toolbar (Figure 269).

Program > View ToolbarShows or hides the DT5/6xx program builder toolbar (Figure 269).

Program > PropertiesThe Properties command opens a dialog box in which you• set options for sorting and copying channel icons• change the look of the current DT5/6xx program

builder window.

The Properties command is duplicated by the button on the DT5/6xx program builder toolbar (Figure 269).

See your changes without closing the dialog box.

When you create a new channel icon by copying and then pasting an existing one, DeLogger automatically increments the channel number of the pasted icon if this option is ticked.

FIGURE 183 DT5/6xx program builder Properties dialog box

See “Program > Arrange Channels” on page 125.


UM

-007

0-A

0

The Program Menu — DT8xxWhen a DT8xx program builder window (Figure 246) is front-most, DeLogger’s seventh menu changes to Program.

Program > Send To ConnectionYou use the command Send To Connection to send a program to a connected DT800.Because the DT800 runs according to one program at a time, whenever you use Send To Connection, the newly-sent program automatically replaces any existing program in the DT800. You must use this command whenever you need to reprogram the DT800:• to send an entirely new program, or• to simply make minor changes to the DT800’s

operation (you do this by altering its current program in the program builder then re-sending the program).

If a project contains more than one program builder window, make sure the one you want to send is front-most before choosing Send To Connection. Single-click the window to be certain.

What’s SentWhen you send a program, you send all settings on every tab in the current program builder window. So in addition to scan schedules, you’re also sending• any span, polynomial and thermistor definitions

you’ve created on these tabs• the DT800 configuration settings on the Switches,

Parameters and Global tabs.

Program > Send To Connection And Save As RESET JobSend To Connection And Save As RESET Job does the same as Send To Connection (see previous topic) but has an extra function: in addition to sending the current program, it also sets it to be the DT800’s startup program/job.The startup program is stored in the file ONRESET.DXC (in the DT800’s SRAM memory) and is automatically loaded and run by the DT800 every time it restarts.

FIGURE 184 DeLogger’s DT8xx Program menu


UM

-007

0-A

0

2-9 THE REPORTS MENUYou can run and print reports on selected subgroups of the information stored in DeLogger’s data database60.

DeLogger is supplied with eight standard reports, which you run using• the Reports > Alarms submenu (Figure 186)• the Reports > Errors submenu (Figure 188).

These are all installed reports61. In addition to these eight reports, DeLogger Pro has

• two more installed reports that you run from the Reports > Log Files submenu (Figure 190)

• any number of secondary reports61 (also called database reports) that you run from the Reports > Database Reports dialog box (Figure 192).

Figure 275 (page 201) summarizes these concepts.For more information see “Reports” on page 199.

Reports > AlarmsThis submenu contains commands that run four installed alarm reports on the data database.

Reports > Alarms > FullCreates a report of all dataTaker alarm messages.

Reports > Alarms > TodayCreates a report of today’s dataTaker alarm messages.

Reports > Alarms > Week To DateCreates a report of dataTaker alarm messages received this week.

Reports > Alarms > Month To DateCreates a report of dataTaker alarm messages received this month.

60 See “Databases” on page 226.61 See “Installed Reports and Secondary Reports” on

page 200.

FIGURE 185 DeLogger’s Reports menuFIGURE 186 Reports > Alarms submenu

FIGURE 187 Alarm reports

CHAPTER 2: MENUS 2-9 The Reports Menu 127

UM

-007

0-A

0

Reports > ErrorsThis submenu contains commands that run four installed error reports on the data database

Reports > Errors > FullCreates a report of all dataTaker error messages.

Reports > Errors > TodayCreates a report of today’s dataTaker error messages.

Reports > Errors > Week To DateCreates a report of dataTaker error messages received this week.

Reports > Errors > Month To DateCreates a report of dataTaker error messages received this month.

Reports > Log Files This DeLogger Pro submenu contains commands that run two installed log reports on the data database.

Reports > Log Files > Schedule Whenever you use DeLogger Pro’s Schedule software (see “Schedule Utility” on page 203), the details are logged in the data database. The Reports > Log Files > Schedule command generates a report of this information.

Reports > Log Files > Action Whenever an action runs, DeLogger Pro logs the details in the data database. The Reports > Log Files > Action command generates a report of this information. (Actions are covered in “Configuration > Actions” on page 55.)

FIGURE 188 Reports > Errors submenu

FIGURE 189 Error reports

FIGURE 190 Log Files submenu

FIGURE 191 Schedule log and action log reports


UM

-007

0-A

0

Reports > Database Reports The Database Reports command opens a dialog box sequence in which you• select a secondary report62 (also called a database

report)• fine-tune the selected report’s database, parameter

and printer details (if required)• run the report.

You can type the parameters directly, or select them from the drop-down lists.Each drop-down list contains• any session names stored in the database• DeLogger Pro global formulas (see “Global Formulas”

on page 202).

62 See “Installed Reports and Secondary Reports” on page 200.

Secondary reports (created from installed reports — see

Change the report’s default parameters if you want.

Change the report’s default printer if you want.

Identifiers —

Description of selected secondary report —

FIGURE 192 Choosing and running a secondary report (two screens)

see Figure 61

see Figure 61

Figure 61)

See “How Many, What, Where?” on page 226.

CHAPTER 2: MENUS 2-9 The Reports Menu 129

UM

-007

0-A

0

2-10 THE TOOLS MENU

DeLogger’s Tools menu provides functions for• configuring input/output cards installed into the ISA

bus of the computer• reading data logged onto memory cards into data

files that can be used as replay files within DeLogger.All dataTaker use the same PCMCIA/PC Card format of memory cards, but use different memory technologies. The DT5/6xx dataTakers use SRAM memory cards, while DT8xx dataTakers use ATA FLASH memory cards.These functions can only be used if your computer has PCMCIA/PC Card slots, and has appropriate drivers installed to support SRAM or ATA FLASH memory cards inserted into these slots.Desktop computers generally do not have PCMCIA/PC Card slots, however external adaptors are available for reading ATA FLASH memory cards (there are no adaptors now available for SRAM memory cards). These adaptors connect to the parallel or USB port of the computer, and a driver must be installed to support the adaptor.Notebook computers usually have one or two PCMCIA/PC Card slots, and most have drivers to support ATA FLASH memory cards inserted into these slots. However, not all notebook computers have drivers to support SRAM memory cards — you will need to consult your computer documentation for details. Generally however, SRAM drivers are only available under the Windows 95 OSR2 and the Windows 98 SE operating systems.Therefore, before using any of the following memory card functions, you will first need to determine if your computer is suitably equipped.

Tools > Internal Cards

Select the Internal Cards menu option to configure input/output cards installed into the ISA bus of the computer.Only the Amplicon PC263 relay output card is supported by DeLogger to date, and the appropriate driver must first be installed before proceeding with this function. Refer to the driver documentation supplied with the card for further details.

Tools > Memory Cards

Select the Memory Cards menu option to read data from memory cards and select 5/6xx series if you wish to read data from an SRAM memory card used in a dataTaker 50/500/600 series data logger, or select 8xx series if you wish to read data from an ATA FLASH memory card used in a dataTaker 800 series data logger.

Tools > Memory Cards > 5/6xx SeriesSelecting 5/6xx series provides the following options

Reading data from a dataTaker 50/500/600 series SRAM memory card is a two-step process:• Firstly, a binary image of the memory card is copied

into an image file (filename.img), which is stored in the …\DeLogger\Pcmcia folder.

FIGURE 193 DeLogger’s Tools menu

FIGURE 194 Tools > Internal Cards submenu

FIGURE 195 Tools > Memory Cards submenu

FIGURE 196 Tools > Memory Cards > 5/6xx series submenu


UM

-007

0-A

0

• Then, the image file is translated into a DeLogger replay file (filename.dlr), which is stored in the …\DeLogger\Replay folder.

These processes can be performed separately by selecting Copy then Translate options, or performed as a single process by selecting Create Replay File option.

The Copy OptionThe Copy option opens the following dialog box

with the following input fields:• Copy to Filename — type in a filename, up to 8

characters with no extension, that the memory card image will be copied to. The file is given a .img extension, and stored in the …\DeLogger\Pcmcia folder.

• Monitor Sockets — computers usually have 4 logical sockets which relate to the physical PCMCIA/PC Card slots. Unless you know specifically which socket relates to the slot that your memory card is inserted into, then leave all sockets ticked and DeLogger will scan for the memory card.

• Card Size — click on the down arrow button, and select the size of your memory card from the drop-down list.

• Overwrite — tick this box if the new image file is allowed to overwrite an older image file of the same name.

• Quiet Mode — the Copy process runs a utility called DeCopy.exe, which is a low-level DOS command that runs in a DOS window. Normally DeLogger opens the DOS window, so that you can observe the copy

process. Tick this box if you don’t wish to see the DOS window.

• Clear Card after Copy — tick this box if you want DeLogger to erase the data from the memory card after copying the image.

When you have completed the input fields, click on the Apply button to perform the image copy. When the copy is completed, click the close button for the DOS window, and click the OK button to close this dialog box. The memory card can be removed after the copy process.

The Translate OptionThe Translate option opens the following dialog box

with the following input fields. The Translate process is performed on an image file previously copied from a memory card.• Operation— click on the down arrow button, and

select the operation to perform. The operations available are

• UNLOAD — translate the logged data from the image file into an ASCII text file, in the DeLogger replay format

• CARDID — translate the memory card identity• STATUS2 — translate the original program• STATUS7 — translate the number of data points

free, stored in the memory card• STATUS8 — translate any program stored on the

memory card• STATUS11 — translate a list of the schedules and

channels returning data• STATUS13 — translate the date and time for the

first and last data points stored• Infile — click on the down arrow button, and select

the image file to translate from the drop-down list.

FIGURE 197 5/6xx series > Copy

FIGURE 198 5/6xx series > Translate

CHAPTER 2: MENUS 2-10 The Tools Menu 131

UM

-007

0-A

0

• Outfile — enter a filename, up to 8 characters with no extension, that the results of the Operation will be written into. The filename will be given a .dlr extension, and stored in the …\DeLogger\Replay folder.

• Overwrite — tick this box if the new Outfile file is allowed to overwrite an older Outfile file of the same name.

• Quiet Mode — the Translate process runs a utility called DeImage.exe, which is a low level DOS command that runs in a DOS window. Normally DeLogger opens the DOS window, so that you can observe the copy process. Tick this box if you don’t wish to see the DOS window.

When you have completed the input fields, click on the Apply button to perform the translation. When the translation is completed, click the close button for the DOS window. You can now perform other translations, or click the OK button to close this dialog box.

The Create Replay File OptionThe Create Replay File option opens the following dialog box

with the following input fields. The Create Replay File process combines the Copy and Translate processes described above.• Copy to Filename — enter a filename, up to 8

characters with no extension, that the unloaded data will be written into. The filename will be given a .dlr extension, and stored in the …\DeLogger\Replay folder.

• Card Size — click on the down arrow button, and select the size of your memory card from the drop- down list.

• Overwrite — tick this box if the new replay file is allowed to overwrite an older replay file of the same name.

• Quiet Mode — the process runs the DeCopy.exe and DeImage.exe utilities in a DOS window. Normally DeLogger opens the DOS window, so that you can observe the copy process. Tick this box if you don’t wish to see the DOS window.

When you have completed the input fields, click on the Apply button to perform the copy and translation. You will be prompted to close the respective DOS windows. Click the OK button to close this dialog box.

Tools > Memory Cards > 8xx SeriesSelecting 8xx series provides the following option:

Click on Unload Jobs which opens the following dialog box:

Unloading data from a dataTaker 800 series memory card is a single-step process, unlike that for unloading dataTaker 50/500/600 series memory cards. Data can be written into a DeLogger replay file which is stored in the …\DeLogger\Replay folder, or loaded directly into a DeLogger spread view, or loaded directly into Microsoft Excel.• Drive — the Windows driver for PCMCIA/PC Card

FIGURE 199 5/6xx series > Create Replay File

FIGURE 200 Tools > Memory Cards > 8xx series submenu

FIGURE 201 8xx series > Unload Jobs dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

ATA FLASH memory cards configures the memory card slot as an IDE drive, and appears in the My Computer folder in the same way as any hard drive. The “memory card drive” has a drive letter, which will vary depending on the number of other hard disks, CD-ROM drives, Zip drives, etc. installed in the computer. For example, a notebook computer with one hard drive (C:) and one CD-ROM drive (D:) usually configures the memory card slot as drive E:.Click on the down arrow button and select the drive letter for the memory card slot from the drop-down list.DeLogger will then list the contents of the memory card in the field below, listing the serial number for DT800(s) that the card has stored data from, and for each serial number the jobs for which data is stored.Click on the jobname for which you want to unload the data from the memory card.

• Save To — to unload the memory card data into a DeLogger replay file, click on the Replay File button. The replay filename is automatically generated from SerialNumber-JobName-YearMonthDate-HourMinuteSecond.dlras shown in the message box on completion:

Click OK to close the message box.• Load To — to load the data from the memory card

directly into Microsoft Excel or a DeLogger spread view, click on the Excel or the Spread View button. This will open a dialog similar to

in which are listed the spread views currently open in DeLogger. Click on the spread view you wish to load the data into, and click the OK button.The unload process first creates a DeLogger replay file, and a message box is displayed showing the automatically-generated filename (Figure 202). Click OK.If your intention is to load the data into Excel, then

Excel will now open with the data loaded into the spreadsheet (the data is loaded into Excel via the spread view).If your intention is to load the data into a spread view, the spread view will now open with the data loaded into the spreadsheet.

Click the OK button to close the dialog box (Figure 201).

FIGURE 202 Replay file created…

FIGURE 203 Select Spread Document dialog box

CHAPTER 2: MENUS 2-10 The Tools Menu 133

UM

-007

0-A

0

2-11 THE WINDOW MENU

Window > CascadeNeatens the project’s non-minimized windows by arranging them as shown in Figure 205.

Window > Tile VerticalNeatens the project’s non-minimized windows by arranging them as shown in Figure 205.

Window > Tile HorizontalNeatens the project’s non-minimized windows by arranging them as shown in Figure 205.

Window > Arrange IconsArranges minimized (iconized) windows across the bottom of the workspace.

Window > Project Windows (List)To quickly locate a window by bringing it to the front, choose its name from this list (Figure 204).Clicking a window’s tab (Figure 1 on page 13) does the same thing.

Window > More WindowsThis command appears on the menu when a project contains more than nine windows. It opens a dialog box that lists all of the current project’s windows. Select a window name and click OK to bring it to the front.

List of project’s windows (choose one to bring it to the front)

FIGURE 204 DeLogger’s Window menu

Cascade

Tilevertical

Tilehorizontal

The effect of tiling many windows (horizontal or vertical)

FIGURE 205 Arranging project windows

FIGURE 206 Window > More Windows submenu


UM

-007

0-A

0

2-12 THE HELP MENU

Help > About DeLoggerThis command opens an information box that contains contact links and DeLogger’s version details.

2-13 THE TASKBAR MENU

Whenever DeLogger is running, its icon appears in your computer’s system tray at the right-hand end of the Windows taskbar. Right-clicking the icon pops-up DeLogger’s taskbar menu.

You can customize this menu — see Figure 30 (page 31).

FIGURE 207 DeLogger’s Help menu

Hyperlink to the dataTaker internet site

E-mail the author of DeLogger.

DeLogger version information

FIGURE 208 Help > About DeLogger information box

Right-click the DeLogger icon.

Taskbar

System tray

FIGURE 209 DeLogger’s taskbar menu

CHAPTER 2: MENUS 2-12 The Help Menu 135

UM

-007

0-A

0

CHAPTER 3

WINDOWS

3-1 THE PROJECT WINDOWFigure 1 (page 13) describes DeLogger’s project window.

3-2 THE FORM WINDOWA DeLogger form window is a dynamic (“live”) display of data from realtime data sources, or from historical data sources (replay files and database sessions).

Each channel of incoming data is assigned to a row in the form window’s worksheet.

Select a worksheet by clicking its tab.

Drag the splitter bar to shrink or enlarge the tab space.

Double-right-click anywhere in a worksheet to open it in the Formula One Workbook Designer, where additional commands are available if you need them (for example, Sheet > Insert Sheet, Sheet > Delete Sheet, Data > Recalc).

Rename a worksheet by double-clicking its tab (the Sheet Name dialog box opens).

Form toolbarThe buttons

duplicate many of the commands on the Form menu.

Formula bar (edit mode only)

Channel data is displayed one row per channel.

Co-ordinates of the current cell are displayed here

(edit mode only).

FIGURE 210 DeLogger’s form window

See Figure 261on page 173.



UM

-007

0-A

0

“Edit” appears in the title bar when the window is in

edit mode.

To replace the row number with a custom name,

double-click the row number (the Header Name dialog

box opens).

To assign a different channel to a row already in use,

double-click the row’s Channel cell (the Select

Channel dialog box opens).

To rename a column, double-click the column

header (the Header Name dialog box opens).

To assign a channel to an empty row, single-click the row number or in the empty

channel column. In thedialog box that opens,

select the channel you want to display in that row.

Form window toolbar — see

Connection

Latest valueTrend indicator (Up/Down)Timestamp of latest value

Maximum and minimum channel values

Channel label (from the channel’s Label column in the program builder)

Adjust the width of a column by dragging its right border in the header row (the cursor changes to ↔).

Schedule (A, B, C,…K)

FIGURE 211 A form window in edit mode (Form > Edit Mode is ticked)

Figure 261 (page 173)

Form window toolbar — see

The formula bar disappears when the form window is in

run mode.

FIGURE 212 A form window in run mode (Form > Edit Mode is un-ticked)Figure 261 (page 173)

CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS 3-2 The Form Window 137

UM

-007

0-A

0

Formula One Workbook DesignerIf you need additional worksheet power, double-right-click a DeLogger worksheet (in a form, chart or analysis window). The worksheet opens in a Formula One® Workbook Designer window, which has additional commands if you need them (such as Insert Sheet and Delete Sheet. The Workbook Designer’s functionality is similar to that of Microsoft Excel.

Double-right-click in a DeLogger worksheet to open the worksheet in a Formula One Workbook Designer window.

DeLogger worksheet

Formula One Workbook Designer

FIGURE 213 Opening a Formula One Workbook Designer window


UM

-007

0-A

0

3-3 THE CHART WINDOWA DeLogger chart window is a dynamic (“live”) display of data from realtime data sources, or from historical data sources (replay files and database sessions).It displays trend graphs — like a chart recorder.

Figures 214 to 217 describe the chart window’s features, and Figures 218 and 219 explain how to use the mouse for horizontal, vertical and diagonal scaling.

Chart toolbarThe buttons duplicate commands found on the Chart menuDrag it from its docked position to create a floating toolbar.

Drag a scale’s handle to relocate the scale.

You can, for example, drag a scale to the other side of the

trend area, or place one above another to separate

the trends (see the chart window immediately below).

Individual graph show/hide buttons

The horizontal overview bar shows the currently-visible section of data (the gray bar)in proportion to the entire data set (the full width of the trend area).

Thevertical overview bar shows the currently-visible

range (the gray bar)and the

maximum-to-minimum range of the data (the I bar)

in proportion to the maximum displayable

vertical range of the chart (the full height

of the trend area).

A small data windowappears when you restthe mouse over a graph’s Show/hide button.

Follow mode button and indicator. The chart moves (like the paper in a chart recorder) and new data enters the right-hand side of the trend area when when this button is pressed (lit).

Relocate a graph and its scale by dragging its scale handle —

Connection

Channel label (from the channel’s Label column in the program builder)Schedule (A, B, C,…K)

The graph’s data point symbol (if you’ve applied one — double-click in the trend area and go to the Curves tab in the dialog box that opens;

Axis label

“Edit” appears after the window name in the title bar when the window is in Edit Mode.

FIGURE 214 Chart window features

(see Figure 263 on page 174).

Figure 101)

see also Figure 216.

CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS 3-3 The Chart Window 139

UM

-007

0-A

0

Drag the time ruler from the left or right vertical axis. A small data window shows the

time or data coordinate.

Drag the data ruler from the top or bottom horizontal axis.

appears beside the cursor when it’s over the ruler.

FIGURE 215 Chart window rulers (for displaying precise time and data coordinates)

Each data scale has a handle that you use to drag the scale to a different column, row or scale group.

This data scale group contains two columns. The

second column contains three rows.

This data scale group contains two columns. Each column contains one row.

FIGURE 216 Chart window scale groups, columns, rows and handles


UM

-007

0-A

0

Trend area auxiliary lines Three horizontal dashed lines that divide the trend area into four equal sections (for general visual comparison of trends).To change the color of these lines, click the Auxiliary Lines button in the General Colors area of the Trend tab shown in

Curve auxiliary lines A pair of horizontal dashed lines (upper and lower) for each curve. You set their positions (to indicate limits, thresholds or ranges), and show/hide them, in the Auxiliary Lines area of the Curves tab shown in For easy identification, the color (and symbol, if you’ve applied one — ) of each pair of lines matches their curve.

FIGURE 217 Chart window auxiliary lines

Figure 100 on page 86.

Figure 101 on page 87.

see Figure 101


UM

-007

0-A

0

Move the left end of the scale by dragging horizontally with the left mouse button pressed.

The right-hand end of the scale stays fixed while you drag.

The left-hand end of the scale stays fixed while you drag.

Move the right end ofthe scale by dragging

horizontally with the right mouse button pressed.

EXPAND COMPRESS EXPANDCOMPRESS

For finer control, start dragging further from the fixed end.

HORIZONTAL SCALINGRest the mouse over the horizontal scale (the cursor changes to ) then click and drag as described here.

FIXED FIXED

HORIZONTAL SHIFTINGRest the mouse over the horizontal scale (the cursor changes to ), then hold down both mouse buttons and drag horizontally.

RIGHTLEFT

Horizontal scaling from the right

Verticalscaling

from thetop Shifting

Verticalscaling

from thebottom

Horizontal scaling from the left

Move the lower end of the scale by dragging vertically with the left mouse button pressed.

Move the upper end of the scale by dragging

vertically with the right mouse button pressed.

EX

PA

ND

COM

PRES

SEX

PA

ND

COM

PRES

S

For finer control, start draggingfurther from the fixed end.

VERTICAL SCALINGRest the mouse over the vertical scale (the cursor changes to ) then click and drag as described here.

FIXED

FIXED

The upper end of the scale stays fixed while you drag.

The lower end of the scale stays fixed while you drag.

VERTICAL SHIFTINGRest the mouse over the vertical scale (the cursor changes to ), then hold down both mouse buttons and drag vertically.

UP

DO

WN

FIGURE 218 Chart window mouse power (1 of 2) — horizontal/vertical scaling, and horizontal/vertical shifting


UM

-007

0-A

0

Re-scale from the upper right-hand corner by dragging diagonallywith the left mouse button pressed.

Re-scale from the lower left-hand cornerby dragging diagonally

with the right mouse button pressed.

The upper right-hand corner stays fixed while you drag.EXPAND COMPRESS

EXPANDCOMPRESS

For finer control, start dragging further from the fixed corner.

DIAGONAL SCALINGDrag inside the trend area (instead of along the scales) with the appropriate mouse button pressed.

DIAGONAL SHIFTING Drag inside the trend area (instead of along the scales) with both mouse buttons pressed.

EX

PA

ND

COM

PRES

S

EX

PA

ND

COM

PRES

S

FIX

ED

The lower left-hand corner stays fixed while you drag. FI

XED

UP

DO

WN

RIGHTLEFT

FIGURE 219 Chart window mouse power (2 of 2) — diagonal scaling and diagonal shifting


UM

-007

0-A

0

3-4 THE TEXT WINDOWThe text window’s main functions are• to display incoming realtime or historical data “live”

(text form) — in the display screen• to type commands to send to the dataTaker (an

alternative to the program builder if you’re familiar with the dataTaker command language) — in the entry screen.

NOTE Commands activated by some of the buttons on the entry screen toolbar are only available on this toolbar. They are not available anywhere else in DeLogger. See Figure 265 on page 175.

FIGURE 220 DeLogger’s text window

The display screen toolbar is always

available.

Bookmark

Display screen

Entry screen

The entry screen toolbar is available when you’ve clicked in the entry screen. Data from the selected

Connection appears in the display screen.

The name of the last file opened or saved in the display screen appears here.

The name of any capture file in use by the display screen appears here.





UM

-007

0-A

0

3-5 THE MIMIC WINDOWA DeLogger mimic window is a dynamic (“live”) display of data from realtime data sources, or from historical data sources (replay files and database sessions).In a mimic window, you view incoming data on various types of meters, add buttons that perform actions, and add background graphics. You can create a complete on-screen instrument/equipment panel using these tools.

FIGURE 221 DeLogger mimic window examples

Meter Panel Background image

Mimic toolbarThe buttons duplicate many of the commands on the Mimic menu.See Figure 266 on page 176.

CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS 3-5 The Mimic Window 145

UM

-007

0-A

0

Mimic Attribute Dialog BoxesSome mimics have attributes that you modify using dialog boxes that are only accessible by double-clicking specific areas on the mimic. These are shown in Figures222, 223 and 224.Single-click to identify the area (a hollow rectangle appears momentarily), then double-click the area to open the corresponding attributes dialog box.

Circular metersDouble-click

Double-click

FIGURE 222 Mimic attribute dialog boxes (1 of 3)


UM

-007

0-A

0

Double-click

Double-click

Double-click

Double-click

Temperature meter


CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS 3-5 The Mimic Window 147

UM

-007

0-A

0

Annunciator

Digital meter

LED indicator

Button

Double-click

Double-click

No attribute dialog boxes, but the Edit Panel, Scale Text Up and Scale Text Down commands are available.

No attribute dialog boxes, but the Edit Panel, Scale Text Up and Scale Text Down commands are available.



UM

-007

0-A

0

3-6 THE SPREADSHEET WINDOWA DeLogger spreadsheet window is a static display of data loaded/“dumped” from a replay file or a database session. DeLogger automatically arranges the data one row per timestamp, one column per channel.You then use standard spreadsheet tools to manipulate and analyze the data.

You can also• load the contents of the spreadsheet window’s current

worksheet into Microsoft Excel (if it’s installed on your computer) with a single command

• export the contents of the spreadsheet window’s current worksheet in a variety of formats.

Spreadsheet Window or Analysis Window?Both the spreadsheet window and the analysis63 window basically consist of a worksheet linked to a graph/chart.• If you want presentation-quality output (like Microsoft

Excel), use the spreadsheet window. But be aware that redrawing the spreadsheet window’s graph is a processor-intensive task that can take some time, especially with large data sets and 3D graphs.

• If you’re using DeLogger Pro and want powerful data analysis, use the analysis window. It’s better for looking at an entire data set, selecting and de-selecting traces, and zooming using the mouse.

Formula bar

Spreadsheet toolbar

Worksheetarea

Grapharea

FIGURE 225 DeLogger’s spreadsheet window

See Figure 267 onpage 176. See “The Spreadsheet

Graph Area” on page 151.

See “The Spreadsheet Worksheet” on page 150.

63 Analysis window: only

CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS 3-6 The Spreadsheet Window 149

UM

-007

0-A

0

The Spreadsheet WorksheetLoad a replay file or a database session into a spreadsheet window’s worksheet, then use common spreadsheet techniques and tools (similar to those of Microsoft Excel) to work with the data.See “The Spread Menu” beginning on page 104

Formula bar

Spreadsheet toolbar

Rename a worksheet by double-clicking its tab (the Sheet Name

dialog box opens).

Columns B, C, D,…Scan data: one channel per column

Column ADate and time of each scan

Double-right-click anywhere in a worksheet to open it in the Formula One Workbook Designer, where additional commands are available if you need them.

Column headers

Each row displays data from a single scan.

Row headersWorksheet

area

FIGURE 226 The spreadsheet window’s worksheet


See “Formula One Workbook Designer” on page 138.


UM

-007

0-A

0

The Spreadsheet Graph Area If you’re using DeLogger Pro, your spreadsheet windows each have their own graph area. When you load a replay file or database session into the worksheet area, DeLogger automatically plots the data in the graph area.

Many tools are available to manipulate objects in the graph area — see Figures 228 to 238, and “The Spread Menu” beginning on page 104.

DeLogger Pro provides two ways of accessing the dialog boxes that you use to configure a spreadsheet window’s chart:• Right-click anywhere in the spreadsheet chart to pop-

up a menu (Figure 228) that you use to modify the chart’s general appearance and its data series, and carry out file-related operations.See “Spreadsheet Chart Right-Click Dialog Boxes” beginning on page 152.

• For more-detailed control of the attributes of a chart element (title, data series trace, plot64, legend, axis, axis label, subtitle,…), double-click the specific element. Typical context-sensitive65 dialog boxes that open are shown in Figure 238 (page 159).See “Spreadsheet Chart Element Dialog Boxes” on page 159.

NOTE For more information, use the Help button in these dialog boxes.

Grapharea

Title

Plot(contains data series traces)

Legend

Footnote/subtitle

Background

Click a graph object (a data series, text, the legend, the background,…) to select it. Use the

handles that appear to move and resize the object.

A right-click menu is available for each graph object (including the background).

FIGURE 227 The spreadsheet window’s chart

64 Plot: the group of data series traces65 That is, relevant to the chart element you double-click.

Modify a spreadsheet chart’s type, style, layout and axes — seeModify a spreadsheet chart’s data — see

Format specific chart elements — see

File-related operations — see

FIGURE 228 Spreadsheet chart’s right-click menu

Figure 230.

Figure 229.

Figures 231 to 236.

Figure 237


UM

-007

0-A

0

Spreadsheet Chart Right-Click Dialog Boxes Figures 229 to 237 show the dialog boxes you can access by choosing commands from the spreadsheet chart’s right-click menu.

Click for context-sensitive Help.

2D 3D

Modify a spreadsheet chart’s type, style, layout and axes.

FIGURE 229 The spreadsheet chart’s right-click menu > Chart Wizard dialog box (four tabs)

Click for Help.

Modify a spreadsheet chart’s data.

FIGURE 230 The spreadsheet chart’s right-click menu > Edit Chart Data (Data Grid Editor) dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0


Show or hide common spreadsheet chart elements, reset chart formatting, and specify a backdrop for the entire spreadsheet chart.

FIGURE 231 The spreadsheet chart’s right-click menu > format General (Format Chart) dialog box (two tabs)


UM

-007

0-A

0


Control the appearance and location of the chart’s plot (the group of data series traces), the formatting and ordering of the data series, and the formatting of 3D charts.

FIGURE 232 The spreadsheet chart’s right-click menu > Format Plot dialog box (ten tabs)


UM

-007

0-A

0

Click forcontext-sensitive

Help.

➊ Select a data series.

➊ Select a data series.

➋ Format the selected data series.

➋ Format the selected data series’ label.

Control the display and appearance of an individual data series’ label.

Control the appearance of individual data series in the chart.

FIGURE 233 The spreadsheet chart’s right-click menu > Format Series submenu dialog boxes (1 of 2)


UM

-007

0-A

0

Click forcontext-sensitive

Help.

➊ Select a data point in a data series.

➊ Select a data point in a data series.

➋ Format the selected data point.

➋ Format the selected data point’s label.

Control the text/value used to label a data point, and the label’s font, format, position and backdrop.

Format the appearance of an individual data point in a data series in the chart.

FIGURE 234 The spreadsheet chart’s right-click menu > Format Series submenu dialog boxes (2 of 2)


UM

-007

0-A

0


➊ Select an axis.

➊ Select an axis.

➋ Format the selected axis.

➊ Select an axis.

➋ Format the selected axis’ label.

➋ Format the selected axis’ title.

Control the appearance of axis title text, and its font and background.

Control the position of axis labels, and their backdrop, font and format.

Control the appearance (including scale details) of chart axes.

The Scale tab’s contents change according to the axis type — Category, Value, Polar or Radar.

FIGURE 235 The spreadsheet chart’s right-click menu > Format Axis submenu dialog boxes


UM

-007

0-A

0

Control the location and appearance of the chart legend.

Control the location and appearance of the chart title.

Control the location and appearance of the chart footnote (sub-title).


FIGURE 236 The spreadsheet chart’s right-click menu Format Legend, Format Title and Format Footnote dialog boxes

Copy the chart and Paste it into another spreadsheet window’s chart area.

Load a chart file (.vtc).

Print the spreadsheet chart.Save the chart as• a native chart file (.vtc), which you can re-open in a spreadsheet chart window

using the right-click menu > Load command• a Windows Metafile (.wmf) graphics file• a Bitmap (.bmp) graphics file.

FIGURE 237 The spreadsheet chart’s file-related right-click menu commands


UM

-007

0-A

0

Spreadsheet Chart Element Dialog Boxes Spreadsheet chart elements (title, data series trace, plot, legend, axis, axis label, subtitle,…) have attributes that you modify using dialog boxes that are only accessible by double-clicking the specific element. These are listed in the table below.

Single-click to identify the element (selection handles appear), then double-click the element to open the corresponding Format… dialog box. Some typical double-click dialog boxes are shown in Figure 238.

Horizontal axisVertical axis

Chart backdropDouble-click

TitleDouble-click

FootnoteDouble-click

Legend backdropDouble-click

PlotDouble-click

Axis line or ticksDouble-click

Data seriesDouble-click

FIGURE 238 Typical spreadsheet chart element Format dialog boxes

To format... Double-click... To format... Double-click...Chart backdrop The chart, but not on a specific chart

elementGrid Any grid line

Title Any part of the title 3D base or wall Anywhere on the base or wall other than a grid line

Footnote Any part of the footnote Data series A chart element in an un-selected series or the legend key identifying the series

Legend backdrop Anywhere in the legend area other than the text or keys

Data point A data point, or a point in the same series as a selected data point

Legend text The legend text Series label A series labelPlot Anywhere in the plot area, but not on

a specific chart elementData point label A data point label

Axis label An axis labelAxis line or ticks The line or ticks on an axisAxis title The axis title text


UM

-007

0-A

0

Using the Mouse with WorksheetsYou can perform the following mouse actions in a DeLogger worksheet: Action DescriptionClick a cell Moves the active cell to the

click location. The active cell’s contents appear in the formula bar, ready for editing.

Click a row or column header, a column heading, or a scan date/time cell (a cell in column A)

Selects the entire row or column

Click in the top left corner (Figure 239)

Selects the entire worksheet

Double-right-click anywhere Opens the Formula One Workbook Designer, where additional commands are available

Double-click a worksheet’s tab

Opens a dialog box that allows you to enter a new name for the worksheet

Click and drag Selects a range of cellsCTRL + click a cell Adds the cell to the current

selection (can be separate from the current selection)

CTRL + click and drag Adds the range of cells to the current selection (can be separate from the current selection)

SHIFT + click and drag Extends the current selectionDrag a cell’s or range’s copy handle (Figure 240)

Copies the cell or range into the cells you drag across

Drag a cell’s or range’s border (cursor changes to an arrow) (Figure 240)

Moves the cell or range to the new location

Click any of these four locations to select the entire worksheet.

Click either location to select the entire row.

Click either location to select the entire column.

FIGURE 239 Selecting rows, columns or the entire worksheet

The active cell is indicated by a bold border.

Drag the copy handle (the cursor changes to a crosshair) to copy the active cell’s contents into the cell(s) you drag across.

Drag a border (the cursor changes to an arrow) to move the active cell’s contents.

Drag a border to move the range.

The active range is indicated by a bold border.

Copy handle

FIGURE 240 Copying and moving the active cell or range


UM

-007

0-A

0

3-7 THE ANALYSIS WINDOW A DeLogger analysis window is a static display of data loaded/“dumped” from a replay file or a database session. DeLogger automatically arranges the data one row per timestamp, one column per channel.You then use standard spreadsheet tools to manipulate and analyze the data.

You can also• load the contents of the analysis window’s current

worksheet into Microsoft Excel (if it’s installed on your computer) with a single command

• export the contents of the analysis window’s current worksheet in a variety of formats.

Analysis Window or Spreadsheet Window?Both the analysis66 window and the spreadsheet window basically consist of a worksheet linked to a graph/chart.• If you want presentation-quality output, use the

spreadsheet window. But be aware that redrawing the spreadsheet window’s graph is a processor-intensive task that can take some time, especially with large data sets and 3D graphs.

• If you want powerful data analysis, use the analysis66 window. It’s better for looking at an entire data set, selecting and de-selecting traces, and zooming using the mouse.

Formula bar

Analysis toolbar

Worksheetarea

Chartarea

FIGURE 241 DeLogger’s analysis window

See Figure 268 onpage 177. See “The Analysis Chart

Area” on page 163.See “The Analysis Worksheet” on page 162.

66 Analysis window: only

CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS 3-7 The Analysis Window 161

UM

-007

0-A

0

The Analysis Worksheet Load a replay file or a database session into an analysis window’s worksheet, then use common spreadsheet techniques and tools (similar to those of Microsoft Excel) to work with the data.See “The Analysis Menu” beginning on page 115.

Formula bar

Analysis toolbar

Rename a worksheet by double-clicking its tab (the Sheet Name

dialog box opens).

Columns B, C, D,…Scan data: one channel per column

Column ADate and time of each scan

Double-right-click anywhere in a worksheet to open it in the Formula One Workbook Designer, where additional commands are available if you need them.

Column headers

Each row displays data from a single scan.

Row headersWorksheet

area

FIGURE 242 The analysis window’s worksheet


See “Formula One Workbook Designer” on page 138.


UM

-007

0-A

0

The Analysis Chart Area Analysis windows (Pro only) each have their own chart area. When you load a replay file or database session into the worksheet area, DeLogger automatically plots the data in the chart area.

To manipulate the chart area, use the techniques described in “The Chart Window” beginning on page 139, and “The Analysis Menu” beginning on page 115.

Chartarea

FIGURE 243 The analysis window’s chart

Use the techniques described in “The Chart Window” beginning on page 139.

CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS 3-7 The Analysis Window 163

UM

-007

0-A

0

3-8 THE DT5/6XX PROGRAM BUILDER WINDOW

You use a DeLogger DT5/6xx program builder window to• create and edit a DT5/6xx dataTaker program• send the program to a DT5/6xx dataTaker.

Define report schedules A, B, C and D on these tabs (set a diferent rate or trigger for each tab).Define an immediate scan on this tab (carried out once only, the moment you send it to the dataTaker).

Define an alarm schedule on this tab (see

Define an X (“polled”) schedule on this tab (carried out whenever the dataTaker receives an X character from the host computer or from an alarm).

Define project-specific settings on this tabDefine the rate or trigger for statistical sampling on this tab.

Rate/trigger icon

Build a schedule graphically in the schedule’s work area

A program builder’s program consists of everything specified on ALL of these tabs.

DT5/6xx program builder toolbarThe buttons duplicate many of the commands on the Program menu.

FIGURE 244 DeLogger’s DT5/6xx program builder — main features


— see Figure 245.

➋ Right-click the schedule’s rate/trigger icon to specify when the schedule runs:time-based (Set Schedule Rate…) or event-based (Set Schedule Trigger…).

➌ Add a channel to a schedule by right-clicking in the schedule’s blank work area. Choose the channel’s details from the cascade menus that appear.

➊ Click the tab of the schedule you want to create or edit.

FIGURE 245 DeLogger’s DT5/6xx program builder — general sequence of use


UM

-007

0-A

0

3-9 THE DT8XX PROGRAM BUILDER WINDOW

You use a DeLogger DT8xx program builder window to• create and edit a DT8xx dataTaker program• send the program to a DT8xx dataTaker.

Know This:Each program builder window creates just ONE DT800 program.Although the program may contain several schedules and involve many DT800 channels, there is only one program per program builder.

Projects and ProgramsA project can contain more than one program builder. But the DT800 can only run one program at a time — when you send a new program, it automatically replaces any existing program in the DT800. (To add another project builder window, choose New on the File menu, then click the DT800 Program button.)

DT800 ProgramA DT800 program is everything you specify in a program builder window — everything defined on every tab across the bottom of the program builder (Figure 246).You create the program by choosing various schedule, channel and other items from drop-down lists and dialog boxes, ready to send to your DT800. Figure 247 shows some examples.

Scroll right to revealmore column headings.

➋ Specify the schedule’s primary details here.

➌ Specify the schedule’s channels here.

When you click in a cell in the program builder, information about the clicked item appears here.

➍ Repeat from step 1, but use a different schedule tab, if you want to include other schedules in the program (you do this when you want the DT800 to do things at different times or according to different triggers).➊ Select a schedule here: Immediate (a once-only

scan) or triggered (A, B, C,…K).

Fixed columns Scrollable columns

A program builder’s program consists of everything specified on all of these tabs (scroll right to reveal more tabs).

Scroll right to reveal more tabs.

FIGURE 246 DeLogger’s DT8xx program builder — general sequence of use

CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS 3-9 The DT8xx Program Builder Window 165

UM

-007

0-A

0

Right-Click MenuThe DT8xx program builder has a right-click menu (Figure 248) that you’ll find useful.In particular, if you’re familiar with the dataTaker programming language, the Show Program command presents you with a dialog box that contains your program in text form, line-by-line.

Click this Configure button to open the Rate dialog box.

Choose Voltage fromthis drop-down list, then… click this Configure button to open the

Voltage Wiring Configurations dialog box.

FIGURE 247 DT8xx program builder examples — click and select to build a DT800 program

FIGURE 248 DT8xx program builder right-click menu and Program Listing dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

3-10 THE EVENT LOGS WINDOWThe event logs window keeps you advised of what’s happening at your data site(s) and within DeLogger:• DeLogger event messages are displayed on the

Messages tab as they occur.• dataTaker errors are displayed on the Errors tab as

they arrive.• dataTaker alarms are displayed on the Alarms tab as

they arrive.

If you tick• Show Alarm Events on the View menu, DeLogger

opens the event logs window (Alarms tab) every time a dataTaker alarm is received67

• Show Error Events on the View menu, DeLogger opens the event logs window (Errors tab) every time a dataTaker error is received68

• Show Message Events on the View menu, DeLogger opens the event logs window (Messages tab) every time a DeLogger event occurs69.

You can alter the amount and scope of this reporting using the Confirmation Level slider (Figure 57).Keep the event logs window permanently open by ticking View Events on the View menu (see “View > View Events” on page 37).

Each tab of the event logs window has its own right-click menu:

FIGURE 249 DeLogger’s event logs window

67 Log Alarms in Figure 57 (page 52) must be ticked to enable this.

68 Log Errors in Figure 57 (page 52) must be ticked to enable this.

69 See “Load Existing Message Entries” on page 52.

FIGURE 250 Right-click menus on the Messages tab, Errors tab and Alarms tab

CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS 3-10 The Event Logs Window 167

UM

-007

0-A

0

CHAPTER 4

TOOLBARS

4-1 REPOSITIONING TOOLBARSYou can reposition DeLogger’s menu bar, system toolbar, connection toolbar, dataTaker toolbar and configuration toolbar.To do this, drag the toolbar by its gripper (handle) to the new location.

A toolbar can be docked (snapped) against other toolbars, or against the four sides of the DeLogger main window. It can also float inside or outside the main window. See (Figure 252).

Toolbars are Saved AutomaticallyWhen you exit DeLogger the toolbar positions are always saved automatically, ready for next time. See “Saving Main Window Details (Global)” on page 208.

System toolbar gripper

Connection toolbargripper

Menu bar gripper

FIGURE 251 Toolbar handles

Drag the handle so that the toolbar docks against an edge or against another toolbar, or so that it floats.

Docked horizontally

Docked vertically

dataTaker toolbarfloating outsideDeLogger’smain window

System toolbarfloating insideDeLogger’smain window

FIGURE 252 Docking and floating toolbars


UM

-007

0-A

0

4-2 THE SYSTEM TOOLBAR

4-3 THE CONNECTION TOOLBAR

4-4 THE dataTaker TOOLBARThe dataTaker toolbar is inactive until you make a connection.

Open the Project Properties dialog boxOpen a full-page print preview of the current window.Print the current window.Save the current project.Open another project.Create a new window or project

Show/hide the event logs windowShow/hide the project barShow/hide the status bar

FIGURE 253 DeLogger’s system toolbar

(see “File > Project Properties” on page 23).

(see page 167).(see page 171).

(see page 170).

Open the Connection Properties dialog boxPlay a replay file.DisconnectConnect

FIGURE 254 DeLogger’s connection toolbar

(see “Connections > Properties” on page 42).

Supervise a memory card in a connected dataTaker.Send the TEST command.Send the STATUS command.Set the dataTaker’s date and time.Open the Halt Options dialog box.Open the Run Options dialog box.

Send the RESET command.Open the Clear Memory dialog box.Send the Quit Unload command.Open the Unload dialog box.Open the Data Logging state dialog box.

FIGURE 255 DeLogger’s dataTaker toolbar

CHAPTER 4: TOOLBARS 4-2 The System Toolbar 169

UM

-007

0-A

0

4-5 THE CONFIGURATION TOOLBAR

4-6 THE STATUS BAR

Configure web publishingConfigure reportsConfigure actionsConfigure defaults

FIGURE 256 DeLogger’s configuration toolbar

Data hub activity indicator• Purple — logging data to

a database channel logging session

• Yellow — sending data to OPC or DDE destination

Prompts appear here when you pause the mouse over a button or a menu item.

The name of the current project

Data input activity indicator• Blue — realtime data return• Purple — unload data return

DeLogger Busy indicator• Green — DeLogger is ready for user

input• Red — DeLogger is busy; user input

not acceptedFIGURE 257 DeLogger’s status bar


UM

-007

0-A

0

4-7 THE PROJECT BAR The project bar presents the current project’s documents, connections and actions in Explorer-style “tree” views.

Right-click a window type to create a new document of the same type. (Choose New from the menu that pops up.)

If you close a window using its Close button ,its icon is grayed-out here. To re-open the window, double-click its icon (or use the Project Properties dialog box

Click a window name to bring that window to the front.

Right-click a connection name to pop up a context menu from which you can choose Connect or Disconnect.

When you connect to a data site, the connection’s attributes appear.

Projectbar

Actionssub-bar

Connectionssub-barClick

Click

FIGURE 258 DeLogger’s project bar

See Figure 259.

See Figure 260.

— Figure 18).

CHAPTER 4: TOOLBARS 4-7 The Project Bar 171

UM

-007

0-A

0

The Connections Sub-Bar

The Actions Sub-Bar

The version of the connected dataTaker’s firmware

The time the connection was established

The number of characters received from the dataTakerThe number of characters sent to the dataTaker

ULAST (the date and time of the last unload)

The number of errors received from the dataTaker (for a DT8xx: the number of CRC check failures; for a DT5/6xx: the number of corruptions)

Forced: Yes means Force the Connect was ticked when the connection was established —Auto: Yes means the connection was initiated by a macro.

The following details are available in the Connections sub-bar for each active connection:

dataTaker icons in the Connections sub-bar:

DT5/6xxNot connected Connected Connected, no input focus

DT8xx

FIGURE 259 The project bar’s Connections sub-bar

see the “Force the Connect” Extras panel on page 38.

FIGURE 260 The project bar’s Actions sub-bar

Right-click in the background to pop up the project bar’s context menu.

Double-click an action name to run the action.


UM

-007

0-A

0

4-8 WINDOW TOOLBARS

The Form Toolbar

Creating a Chart in a Form WindowYou can chart data in a form window worksheet. To do this, select the cells that contain the data you want to chart, click the Chart button , then drag a chart

rectangle in the worksheet (you can change its size and position later). The Chart Wizard opens — see Figure 229 on page 152.

Reset all values in the Low Value column to zero (updated at the next scan).

Left-, centre-, or right-align the contents of selected cells.

Reset all values in the High Value column to zero (updated at the next scan).

Scale view down (zoom out)Scale view up (zoom in)

Show/hide gridlinesShow/hide row and column headers

Turn Edit Mode on/off.Open the window’s Properties dialog box

Set the number of decimal places of selected cells.

Send the X schedule command (“polled” or “scan on host request” schedule).

Pause the return of data.

FIGURE 261 DeLogger’s form toolbar


See “Creating a Chart in a Form Window” on page 173.

See “Form > Object > Insert Checkbox” on page 81.

See “Form > Object > Insert Button” on page 81.

See “Form > Publish” on page 84.

Edit Mode onEdit Mode is ticked on the Form menu.

Edit Mode off (Run Mode)Edit Mode is un-ticked on the Form menu.

Edit Mode button depressed

Edit Mode button raised

Buttons available in Edit Mode

Buttons available in Run Mode

FIGURE 262 Buttons available on the form toolbar in edit mode and run mode

CHAPTER 4: TOOLBARS 4-8 Window Toolbars 173

UM

-007

0-A

0

The Chart Toolbar

The Text ToolbarsEach of a DeLogger text window’s two screens has its own toolbar:• a text display screen toolbar (Figure 264)• a text entry screen toolbar (Figure 265).

Select channels to be plotted in this chart window (the Chart Channels dialog box opens;

Rotate the graphs so that they move from top to bottom.

Click Edit Axis to open the Axis Properties dialog box

Click the Auto Re-scale button to fit the trend graphs into the chart window with maximum horizontal and vertical resolution (squeezes all the data into the window).

Open the Chart Properties dialog box.

Scale text downScale text up

Open the window’s Properties dialog box

Clear the chart.Turn Edit Mode on/off.Pause the return of data.

FIGURE 263 DeLogger’s chart toolbar


See “Chart > Publish” on page 90.


Figure 102 on page 88).

Open the text window’s Properties dialog box

Toggle the split screen view on/off.Clear the display screen.Pause the flow of incoming data to the display screen.

Capture data to disk as it arrives (as a replay file .dlr).Choose the format of incoming data (replay, text or comma-separated variable).Filter incoming data by schedule.

FIGURE 264 DeLogger’s text display screen toolbar



UM

-007

0-A

0

Send the program (send all).Send the highlighted text.Send the current line.

Save the program (.txt or .cmd).Load a DeLogger program file (.dlp or .dl8) into the entry screen as text.Open an existing command file (.txt or .cmd).

Clear the entry screen.Turn Command Edit Mode on/off.

User buttonsSet user buttons

Go to matching braceIndent the selected lines.Outdent the selected lines.Make the selected lines into comments (prefix with ').Uncomment the selected lines.

Go to the previous bookmark.Go to the next bookmark.Remove all bookmarks.

Add a bookmark to the selected lines (or remove it).

Undo your last action in the entry screen (multiple undo).Redo/re-apply your last action in the entry screen (multiple redo).

Open the Find dialog boxOpen the Replace dialog box

Find Next

Open the Script Editor Options dialog box, in which you change the operation and appearance of the current text entry screen.

FIGURE 265 DeLogger’s text entry screen toolbar

(see Figure 36 on page 35).(see Figure 36 on page 35).


UM

-007

0-A

0

The Mimic Toolbar

The Spreadsheet Toolbar

Add a temperature meter panel.Add a pie meter panel.Add an arc meter panel.Add a needle meter panel.

Add a picture.Add a button panel.Add a LED indicator panel.Add a digital panel.Add an annunciator panel.

Scale text downScale text up


Turn Edit Mode on/off.Pause the return of data.

FIGURE 266 DeLogger’s mimic toolbar


See “Mimic > Publish” on page 103.

Load a replay file into the worksheet.Load a database session into the worksheet.

Set the print range from the selection.Update the spreadsheet window’s chart.


Load the current worksheet into Excel.Export the current worksheet.Import a worksheet.


Set the number of decimal places of selected cells.Left-, centre-, or right-align the contents of selected cells.


FIGURE 267 DeLogger’s spreadsheet toolbar


See “Spread > Publish” on page 113.


UM

-007

0-A

0

The Analysis Toolbar

The DT5/6xx Program Builder Toolbar

The DT8xx Program Builder ToolbarThe DT8xx program builder doesn’t have a toolbar like the other windows.See “The DT8xx Program Builder Window” on page 165.

Load a replay file into the worksheet.Load a database session into the worksheet.

Set the print range from the selection.Update the analysis window’s chart.


Load the current worksheet into Excel.Export the current worksheet.Import a worksheet.


Set the number of decimal places of selected cells.Left-, centre-, or right-align the contents of selected cells.


FIGURE 268 DeLogger’s analysis toolbar


See “Analysis > Publish” on page 123.

Add a new high speed counter channel to the current schedule.Add a new digital channel to the current schedule.Add a new analog channel to the current schedule.

Uses the next available channel number


Arrange the channel icons in the current tab (left-align and distribute equally from top).


Turn Edit Mode on/off.

FIGURE 269 DeLogger’s DT5/6xx program builder toolbar



UM

-007

0-A

0

PART BNuts & BoltsPART B covers DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro features in detail, as well as topics for advanced users:• Chapter 5: “Actions” begins on page 179.• Chapter 6: “Reports” begins on page 199.• Chapter 7: “DeLogger Utility Software” begins on

page 203.• Chapter 8: “Saving — What, When, Where” begins

on page 208.• Chapter 9: “Advanced Topics” begins on page 210.


178 User’s Manual — DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro PART B: Nuts & Bolts

UM

-007

0-A

0

CHAPTER 5

ACTIONS

5-1 ACTIONS OVERVIEWDeLogger Pro can automate various tasks and processes, and repeatedly perform these in response to various triggers. These automated tasks or processes are called actions.DeLogger Pro has an inbuilt scripting or macro capability, which can be used in actions to interact with connected dataTakers and with the DeLogger interface. DeLogger Pro actions can also play sound files, run reports, and execute other Windows programs.Actions can be as simple as running a sound (siren) file when you launch DeLogger, or as complex as sequentially dialling a number of remote sites after midnight, downloading the data from each site, clearing the logged data from the logger at each site, and preparing a plot or report of the logged data —independently of an operator.Actions are global — actions created in one project are available to all other projects. They are stored in DeLogger’s administration database, and cannot be transported to other installations of DeLogger.IMPORTANT Actions are internal to DeLogger Pro. Don’t confuse them with dataTaker alarm actions. (However, dataTaker alarm actions can be used to trigger DeLogger actions — see Figure 58 on page 55.)

Action FunctionsActions have five major function categories:• execute macro lists or scripts• play sound files• generate reports• execute Windows program files (.exe files)• set states on a digital output card installed into the

(desktop) computerAn action can perform any mix of these function categories.

AutoRun — DeLogger Pro’s Startup ActionDeLogger Pro has a permanent action, called AutoRun, which automatically runs every time DeLogger Pro starts up.By default, AutoRun simply plays the siren.wav sound file (see Configuration > Actions > AutoRun’s Sound File field)70. But you can use AutoRun to do much more, such as• automatically loading a project and connecting to a

dataTaker when DeLogger Pro starts up• automatically running another action on startup.

Figures 58 and 59 show the startup tasks that you can do with AutoRun.The AutoRun action cannot be deleted, only edited. If there are no functions defined in AutoRun, it does not run.NOTE If you start DeLogger Pro by double-clicking a project master file (see “.dlw File” on page 22), AutoRun runs before the project loads.

70 If you want to remove/change the startup sound:DeLogger Pro — choose Configuration > Actions and delete/modify the contents of the Sound File field (Figure 58).DeLogger — remove the siren.wav file from the …\DeLogger\Sound folder.

CHAPTER 5: ACTIONS 5-1 Actions Overview 179

UM

-007

0-A

0

5-2 USING ACTIONS

Defining New ActionsOpen the Database Properties — Actions dialog box (Figure 58 on page 55) by choosing Configuration > Actions from the main menu bar. All input fields are greyed out. Click the New button, and all input fields become active.Each action requires a unique name — enter the name for your new action in the Action Name field. Note that this name is permanent — you will not be able to change this name later when editing the action. Next you need to enter details for the various tasks and processes that the action is to perform each time it executes or runs.

Chaining ActionsActions can chain to other actions, to produce a higher-level action sequence. This can simplify complex actions, and facilitate management of processes which may change periodically.For example, a project may involve a number of remote dataTaker sites, and data is to be automatically unloaded from each site into the DeLogger database each day. This could be done either by one action with a large script, or by a separate action for each site that chains to the action for the next site.If an action is to chain to another action, then the action to be “chained to” must be created before the chain can be defined within the action to be “chained from”.To chain to another action, open the list of existing actions in the Chain To input field, and select the action to chain to.

Running Macro ScriptsDeLogger Pro actions have inbuilt macro commands that can perform various interactions with connected dataTakers, and with some of the DeLogger views. These macro commands are used to create macro sequences or scripts, which execute a programmed task or function when the action to which the script belongs is run.The macro sequence is created in the Macro Text input field, using standard macros in the Macro Builder — see “Creating Macro Scripts” on page 181.Macros that interact with a connected dataTaker require identification of the connection by name. Therefore the connection definitions for the project must be defined and tested before actions using those connections can be developed.

Playing Sound FilesTo play a sound file (.wav file) when the action runs, details for the sound file must be entered into the Sound File field. Either type the path to the sound file directly into the field, or click on the browse button, navigate to the required sound file, and select it.In the AutoRun action this defaults toc:\program files\delogger\sound\siren.wav

Generating ReportsTo generate a report when the action runs, details of the report to be generated must be entered into the Report input field. The reports that can be generated are based on the report templates created in the Configuration > Reports dialog box (Figure 61), and are listed in the drop-down list for this input field. Click on the drop-down button at the right-hand end of the field and select the required report from the list. The report names listed here are the names entered in the Identifier input field in Figure 61. Note that these same reports can be manually run by selecting them under Reports > Database Reports.The generated report can be shown in a report window which opens over the other windows currently in view, printed on the system printer, or exported as an HTML document for publication on the web. Click the appropriate radio button for the required method of delivery of the report.

Executing ProgramsTo execute a Windows program when the action runs, you need to enter the filepath and program name into the Execute Program input field, or click the browse button and navigate to the program and select it. Command-line parameters that the program may need when it is run can be entered into the Parameters field. You can also elect to run the program minimized or not.For example, if the action is to launch Windows Notepad to display a data file, then the entries would be• Execute Program field:

c:\Windows\Notepad.exe• Parameters field:

c:\ProgramFiles\DeLogger\Replay\TestDat.csv

Commanding the PC263 Digital Output BoardDeLogger Pro supports the 16-channel Amplicon PC263 digital output board, which plugs directly into the ISA bus of desktop PCs. These channels can be driven ON or OFF by DeLogger Pro actions.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Select the Amplicon PC263 option from the drop-down list in the Digital Board input field, select the channel number to switch in the Channel input field, and select whether the action is to Set or Clear the channel.

Site ResponseActions can be triggered to run in DeLogger Pro by messages coming in from connected dataTakers. Sometimes it may be appropriate for the action to reply to the dataTaker at site — for example, to acknowledge that the action was in fact run. The Site Response input field is used to define such replies or responses.For example, the dataTaker at site may issue the alarm message Pump Failure{PumpOffAction}which will trigger DeLogger Pro to run the PumpOffAction action. The action can acknowledge to the site that the message was received by, say, setting a channel variable as a flag (51CV=1), or by switching off the pump directly (3DSO=1).Whatever is entered into this field must be interpretable as a command by the dataTaker.

Saving the New ActionSave the new action by clicking the Accept button in Figure 58, or abort by clicking the Cancel button.This returns you to the Database Properties — Actions dialog box. From here you can create additional actions (click New), edit existing actions (click Edit), or delete the currently-visible action (click (Delete).Click the Close button to exit the Database Properties — Actions dialog box.

Editing ActionsActions that have already been defined can later be edited. Open the Database Properties — Actions dialog box (Figure 58) and scroll to the action to be edited by clicking on the < or > buttons. When the action is located, click the Edit button and edit the action as required. You cannot edit the Action Name.Save the edited action by clicking Accept, or abort by clicking Cancel.

Deleting ActionsActions that have already been defined can be deleted. Open the Database Properties — Actions dialog box (Figure 58) and scroll to the action to be deleted using the < or > buttons. When the action is located, click the Delete button and delete the action.

Creating Macro ScriptsMacro scripts are created in the Actions dialog box, opened by choosing Configuration menu > Actions. All fields are greyed out when the dialog box initially opens. Click the New button, and all input fields become active. Enter the name for your new action in the Action Name field.Open the macro script builder by clicking the large Macro Builder button (Figure 58). This opens the Macro Builder (Figure 60), in which the macro script will be built up.In Figure 60 (page 56), the upper window is a scrollable list of the available macros, which are effectively macro templates and provide some detail of the syntax and parameters for each macro. The lower window is where you will insert appropriate macros to progressively build up the script for your new action.The lower window of the Macro Builder is actually a small text editor, and all of the usual text editing features are available including• mouse-controlled cursor placement and movement• scrolling by using mouse cursor or scroll bars• scrolling using keyboard cursor keys, and PageUp

and PageDown keys• mouse-controlled selection by click and drag to select

part of a line, whole line or multiple lines• keyboard-controlled selection using shift and cursor

keys• keyboard-controlled editing to cut (Ctrl X), copy

(Ctrl C) and paste (Ctrl V) selected text• keyboard delete of selected text (Del and Backspace)• keyboard delete of single characters (Del and

Backspace)• keyboard-controlled undo last edit (Ctrl Z)• the window is always in the insert character (Ins)

mode• macros on consecutive lines can be separated using

Shift Enter.You should have a good understanding of what process(es) you want your new action to perform, before programming the action. It may be beneficial to firstly draw up a flow chart or sequenced list.Locate the first macro template to insert into the script from the list in the upper window, and click on it to select (highlight) it. You may need to scroll to the required macro template using the scroll bar, cursor keys or PageUp and PageDown keys.Now click on the Paste button to insert the macro template into the bottom window. This pastes the macro template into the bottom window at the current position of the bottom window cursor.

CHAPTER 5: ACTIONS 5-2 Using Actions 181

UM

-007

0-A

0

When the macro template has been pasted, click in the bottom window to enable editing, and edit in details of the various parameters for the pasted macro.For example, the Unload To File macro template isUNLOAD_SITE_FILE("Connection","JobName","UnloadOptions",Timeout,"FileName.ext(.csv or .dlr)",0 for overwrite or 1 for append,0=no disconnect 1=disconnect)and the edited macro could be similar toUNLOAD_SITE_FILE("dt800","JOB1","A",120,"Test1.dlr",1,1)

For details of the parameters for each of the macro templates see “Action Macro Commands” beginning on page 184.Continue to add macro templates and edit respective parameters until the action is completed. Click OK to retain the script and close the Macro Builder, or click Cancel to abort. Your new macro script can be viewed in the Macro Text field, scrolled in the usual manner, and finally edited here if desired.Actions incorporating macro scripts can also incorporate other functions if required. Add whatever other functions you require, then click Accept to save the action and macro script in the administration database. The fields are grayed out, and the new action name is now in the Action Name list at the top of the dialog box.Click Close to close the Database Properties — Actions dialog.

Running ActionsActions can be run in a number of ways, either in response to automatically-generated triggers, or in response to direct operator interaction.When an action runs, progress of the action can be seen in the Message tab of the Event Logs window (Figure 249).Actions can be triggered in the following ways:

Action Trigger — AutoRunThe AutoRun action triggers each time DeLogger Pro is launched.

Action Trigger — ChainingActions can chain to (trigger) another action.

Action Trigger — Manually from the Actions tab of the Project Bar in DeLogger ProThe project bar (Figure 258 on page 171) is normally displayed beside the left-hand edge of the desktop. If not displayed, then enable the project bar under the View menu on the main menu bar.

The project bar has three tabs labelled Project, Connections and Actions. Click the Actions tab to display a list of defined actions (Figure 270). (You may need to click on the + symbol beside the action folder to expand the folder and display the individual actions.)

Action Trigger — Manually by Buttons Placed in the Form View and Mimic ViewButtons can be placed in the form and mimic windows, and programmed to execute an action when clicked during operation of the view.Placing an action button in a form window is covered in• “Form > Object > Insert Button” (page 81)• “Form > Object > Attach Action” (page 82)• “Form > Object > Options” (page 82).

The form window must be in run mode for the button to trigger the action. Form window buttons can be deleted by clicking (or Ctrl-clicking to select multiple objects), then pressing the Delete key.Placing an action button in a mimic window is covered in “Mimic > Buttons” on page 101. The Mimic window must be in run mode for the button to trigger the action.

Action Trigger — Externally by Alarm Messages from Connected dataTakersdataTaker alarm messages can have DeLogger Pro action names embedded within the message. Embedded action names must be within braces, for example"Pump Failure{PumpOffAction}"

DeLogger Pro scans incoming dataTaker alarm messages for any embedded action names, and runs any actions identified.NOTE You must tick Log Alarms in the Database Properties — Defaults dialog box (Figure 57 on page 52) if you want alarms to initiate an action.

Double-click an action’s name to run the action.

Actions tab

FIGURE 270 The project bar’s Actions tab


UM

-007

0-A

0

Action Trigger — Internally by DeLogger Pro AlarmsHigh and low alarm conditions can be defined for channels in the data hub — see the Properties button in Figure 63 on page 59. Actions can be attached to these alarms, to be triggered when channel data is out of the defined range.

Action Trigger — Automatically by the Schedule UtilityDeLogger Pro has an accompanying program named Schedule.exe, which can be run by choosing Start menu > Programs > DeLogger > Schedule. This is discussed fully in “Scheduling Actions (Schedule Utility)” on page 196.Schedule can run actions either• once at defined point of time, or• recursively at defined intervals varying from seconds

to months.In the Schedule utility, click Schedule menu > Add (or click the New Entry button on the toolbar), which opens a succession of dialog boxes in which the schedule is defined in terms of• schedule name• the action to run• the date or recursive date(s) on which to run• the time or recursive time(s) at which to run.

Any number of schedules can be defined, and are listed in the body of the window. Listed schedules can be Paused, Edited, Deleted and Run Now on demand.Schedule also can execute Windows programs and generate DeLogger Pro reports at defined intervals.

CHAPTER 5: ACTIONS 5-2 Using Actions 183

UM

-007

0-A

0

5-3 ACTION MACRO COMMANDS The macro commands used for creating or building macro scripts are defined below, grouped according to functionality:• “Macros for Managing Connections” (page 184)• “Macros for Commanding a dataTaker” (page 185)• “Macros for Unloading Data from a dataTaker”

(page 187)• “Macros for Managing DeLogger Pro Windows”

(page 189)• “Macros for Managing DeLogger Pro Projects”

(page 190)• “Macros for Managing Database Channel Logging

Sessions” (page 192)• “Macros for Interacting with a User” (page 194)• “Miscellaneous Macros” (page 195)

Most macro commands have parameters, some of which must be defined elsewhere in DeLogger Pro before the macros will run (for example, names of connections, ports and views).

Macros for Managing Connections

CONNECT_SITEEstablishes a connection with a local or remote dataTaker, a file or a database session.Syntax:

Example: CONNECT_SITE("dt500 Com1",NO_FORCE)

CONNECT_PORTEstablishes a connection to the local (DeLogger) modem when it auto-answers an incoming call.Syntax:

Example: CONNECT_PORT("PumpHouseA")

Used for modem connections to allow incoming alarm calls from dataTakers to be answered.

CONNECT_SITE("Connection ",NO_FORCE or FORCE)

where Connection must have been defined under “Connections > Properties” (page 42) as a connection to a dataTaker, a

file or a database session.NO_FORCE makes the connection depending on the status of the dataTaker or file. If the status does not match that in

the data hub for the job, then a connection is not completed.FORCE makes the connection without status checking. A connection is made regardless.

CONNECT_PORT("PortName ")

where PortName must have been defined under “Connections > Properties” as an auto-answer modem connection



UM

-007

0-A

0

DISCONNECTDisconnects the named connection.Syntax:

Example: DISCONNECT("dt800 Com2")

Macros for Commanding a dataTaker

DATATAKER_HALTSends the Halt (H) command to the dataTaker at the named connection to halt scanning of all defined schedules.Syntax:

Example: DATATAKER_HALT("dt500 Com1")

DATATAKER_RUNSends the Run (G) command to the dataTaker at the named connection to resume scanning of all defined schedules.Syntax:

Example: DATATAKER_RUN("dt500 Com1")

DATATAKER_LOGSends the data logging command (LOGON) to the dataTaker at the named connection to enable data logging of all defined schedules.Syntax:

Example: DATATAKER_LOG("dt500 Com1")

DISCONNECT("Connection ")

where Connection must be open, otherwise the command is ignored.

DATATAKER_HALT("Connection ")

where Connection must exist to the dataTaker with a CONNECT_SITE() macro.

DATATAKER_RUN("Connection ")


DATATAKER_LOG("Connection ")


CHAPTER 5: ACTIONS 5-3 Action Macro Commands 185

UM

-007

0-A

0

SEND_FILESends the specified command file to the dataTaker at the named connection.Syntax:

Example: SEND_FILE("Tank3",NO_PARSE,"c:\Progs\Tank3.cmd")

SEND_PROGRAMSends the specified DeLogger Pro program to the dataTaker at the named connection.Syntax:

Example: SEND_PROGRAM("Remote 500",PARSE,"Prog1.dlp")

SEND_TEXTSends the specified text to the dataTaker at the named connection.Syntax:

Examples:• SEND_TEXT("dt800 Com1","SATTN")• SEND_TEXT("dt500 Com2","3C=%2")

SEND_FILE(" Connection ",PARSE or NO_PARSE," FullFilePathName ")

where Connection must exist to the dataTaker with a CONNECT_SITE() macro.FullFilePathName is the path to the command file (can be a .txt or a .cmd file).PARSE instructs DeLogger Pro to check the file for correct syntax before

sending.NO_PARSE instructs DeLogger Pro to send the file without checking its syntax.

SEND_PROGRAM("Connection ",PARSE or NO_PARSE," ProgramName")

where Connection must exist to the dataTaker with a CONNECT_SITE() macro.ProgramName is the name of a .dlp or .dl8 file currently open within the DeLogger Pro project.PARSE instructs DeLogger Pro to check the program for correct syntax before sending.NO_PARSE instructs DeLogger Pro to send the program without checking its syntax.

SEND_TEXT("Connection "," TextToSend ")

where Connection must exist to the dataTaker with a CONNECT_SITE() macro.TextToSend is any text. It can contain substitution variables %0 to %9 that have been defined by GET_TEXT or

GET_VALUE macros.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Macros for Unloading Data from a dataTaker

UNLOAD_SITEUnloads logged data from the dataTaker at the named connection.Unloaded data can be stored in a manually-created database logging session or a text window capture file, and is available to all views by means of the data hub.Syntax:

Example: UNLOAD_SITE("dt800Modem","JOB1","",120,1)

UNLOAD_SITE_DBUnloads logged data from the dataTaker at the named connection and stores it in SessionName .Syntax:

Example: UNLOAD_SITE_DB("dt500 Com4","","A",120,"Week7",1)

UNLOAD_SITE(" Connection "," JobName"," UnloadOption ", Timeout , Disconnect )

where Connection is established if it’s not already open.JobName defines the DT800 job for which to unload data, if more than one job is running in the dataTaker.

For DT8xx dataTakers, DeLogger Pro defaults JobName to JOB1. For DT5/6xx dataTakers, which do not have a JobName, type a null field ("" ) here.

UnloadOption allows entry of specific schedules, time frames and so on for the unload data. See your dataTaker manual for details of unloading options.The general full unload command U is assumed so, if using UnloadOption , just include the options — for example, use A (which becomes UA) to unload schedule A.If no UnloadOption is required, type a null field ("" ) here and a full unload will occur.

Timeout is an inactivity timeout that is reset when each record of logged data is received. If the specified Timeout elapses, the unload macro is terminated. Valid Timeout range is 60 to 600 seconds.

Disconnect defines how to manage the Connection when the unload is completed:1 = disconnect on completion, 0 = do not disconnect.

UNLOAD_SITE_DB("Connection "," JobName"," UnloadOptions ", Timeout ," SessionName ", Disconnect )



UnloadOption allows entry of specific schedules, time frames and so on for the unload data. See your dataTaker manual for details of unloading options.The general full unload command U is assumed so, if using UnloadOption , just include the options — for example, use A (which becomes UA) to unload schedule A.If no UnloadOption is required, type a null field ("" ) here and a full unload will occur.


SessionName is either a manually-created database session (see “Configuration > Database Channel Logging Sessions” on page 60), or one created within the action by the SET_SESSION_NAME() macro.



UM

-007

0-A

0

UNLOAD_SITE_FILEUnloads logged data from the dataTaker at the named connection and stores it in a data file in thec:\Program Files\DeLogger\Replay folder.Syntax:

Example: UNLOAD_SITE_FILE("dt50","","A",120,"Test1.csv",1,1)

UNLOAD_SITE_FILE_FASTSame as UNLOAD_SITE_FILE, but only passes data to its unload destination file.

WAITWaits until the current data unload from the named connection is completed, or the current attempt to connect to the named connection is completed, or the specified timeout has expired.Syntax:

Example: WAIT("dt500 Remote",UNLOAD_COMPLETE,"500’)

UNLOAD_SITE_FILE(" Connection "," JobName"," UnloadOptions ", Timeout ," FileName.ext ",NewAppend, Disconnect



UnloadOption allows entry of specific schedules, time frames and so on for the unload data. See your dataTaker manual for details of unloading options.The general full unload command U is assumed so, if using UnloadOption , just include the options — for example, use A (which becomes UA) to unload schedule A.If no UnloadOption is required (that is, a full unload), type a null field ("" ) here.


FileName.ext is the name (including ext ension) of the destination file — see NewAppend next.NewAppend defines how to manage FileName.ext :

1 = append the data to the existing file FileName.ext .0 = save the data to a new file each time the macro runs; type a null field ("" ) for FileName.ext and DeLogger automatically creates a new filename from Connection and the timestamp at the beginning of the unload.


WAIT(" Connection ","UNLOAD_COMPLETE or CONNECT_COMPLETE,"Timeout ")

where Connection must exist to the dataTaker with a CONNECT_SITE() macro.UNLOAD_COMPLETEinstructs DeLogger Pro to wait until the unload is complete before continuing.CONNECT_COMPLETEinstructs DeLogger Pro to wait until the current attempt to connect to Connection is complete

before continuing.Timeout is defined in seconds, and should be large enough to allow sufficient time for the unload or

connection to be completed.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Macros for Managing DeLogger Pro Windows

CLEAR_CHARTClears the named chart window in the current project.Syntax:

Example: CLEAR_CHART("Chart1.dlc")

PRINT_CHARTPrints the named chart window to the default system printer.Syntax:

Example: PRINT_CHART("Chart1.dlc")

OPEN_WINDOWOpens the named DeLogger Pro window in the current project.Syntax:

Example: OPEN_WINDOW("Spread3.dls")

CLOSE_WINDOWCloses the named DeLogger Pro window in the current project.Syntax:

Example: CLOSE_WINDOW("Form1.dlf")

CLEAR_CHART("ChartName ")

where ChartName is the name in the chart window’s title bar. The project containing ChartName must be open in

DeLogger Pro’s workspace for this macro to work.NOTE Only type the chart file’s name; do not specify its path.

PRINT_CHART("ChartName ")

where ChartName is the name in the chart window’s title bar. The project containing ChartName must be open in

DeLogger Pro’s workspace for this macro to work.NOTE Only type the chart file’s name; do not specify its path.

OPEN_WINDOW("WindowName.ext ")

where WindowName.ext must be in the currently-open project folder.

NOTE Only type the file’s name; do not specify its path.

CLOSE_WINDOW("WindowName.ext ")


NOTE Only type the file’s name; do not specify its path.


UM

-007

0-A

0

SHOW_WINDOWDisplays the named DeLogger Pro window minimized, maximized, or “normal” size (restored to previous working size).Syntax:

Example: SHOW_WINDOW("Spread2.dls",3,2)

PUBLISHInitiates web publishing of the named DeLogger Pro window.Syntax:

Example: PUBLISH("Spread3.dls")

Macros for Managing DeLogger Pro Projects

PROJECT_LOADLoads the named DeLogger Pro project.Syntax:

Example: PROJECT_LOAD("TankFarm3")

PROJECT_SAVESaves the current DeLogger Pro project to the c:\DeLogger\Program Files\Project folder.

The trailing parentheses () are always required. No parameters are necessary.

Syntax:

Example: PROJECT_SAVE()

SHOW_WINDOW("WindowName.ext ", SheetNumber , ShowCommand)


NOTE Only type the file’s name; do not specify its path.SheetNumber is applicable to the form, spread and analysis views, which have multiple sheets. It is ignored for

other views, when 0 (zero) should still be enteredShowCommand 0 = show at normal size

1 = show minimised2 = show maximised

PUBLISH(" WindowName.ext ")


PROJECT_LOAD("ProjectName ")

where ProjectName must be in the c:\DeLogger\Program Files\Project folder.

PROJECT_SAVE()


UM

-007

0-A

0

PROJECT_CLOSE-Closes the currently-open DeLogger Pro project.Use a PROJECT_SAVE first if there have been any changes to the project.


Syntax:

Example: PROJECT_CLOSE()

HUB_SAVESaves the most recent values for each channel in the program list.


Syntax:

Example: HUB_SAVE()

PROJECT_CLOSE()

HUB_SAVE()


UM

-007

0-A

0

Macros for Managing Database Channel Logging SessionsUp to ten separate lists of channels from open connection(s) can be defined to log the respective incoming channel data into corresponding database sessions (see Figure 64 on page 60). In other words, there are ten database logging sessions available in the DeLogger Pro’s data database. This function is covered in “Configuration > Database Channel Logging Sessions” on page 60.

Each session has a unique name, which is the primary key to enable selective retrieval of session data from the database.These ten sessions can be set up and managed• manually as shown in Figure 64, or• automatically by macros within actions as described

below.

SESSION_STARTCreates a database channel logging session (uses one of the 10 available — see Figure 64).The data hub stores pointers to the database channel

logging structures, and keeps a list of the sessions to which each channel is applied. Note that a channel can log to more than one session at the same time.

Syntax:

Example: SESSION_START("dt500Com1","Furnace1",2,0

You can provide SessionName and SessionNumber using the GET_TEXT() and GET_VALUE() macros. For example:

SESSIONSwitches the named session to active (ON) or inactive (OFF). This macro emulates the Active tick box in Figure 64.Syntax:

Example: SESSION(3,OFF)

SESSION_START(“Connection ”,“ SessionName ”, SessionNumber ,” DataType ”)

where Connection is the name of the DeLogger Pro connection to the dataTaker that is the source of data.SessionName is a text tag that used to group this data within the database (allows for later filtering).SessionNumber is the database logging session to use: range 1 to 10.DataType is the type of data: 0 for realtime data; 1 for logged data

(emulates the Real Time Data and Logged Data radio buttons in Figure 64).

GET_TEXT(1,"Enter Session Name","My Session")GET_VALUE(2,"Enter Session Number",10)SESSION_START(“MyConnection”,“%1”,%2,0)

SESSION(SessionNumber ,ON or OFF)

where SessionNumber is the database logging session to use: range 1 to 10.


UM

-007

0-A

0

SET_SESSION_NAMEDisplays a dialog box with an input field (Figure 271) to define a session name for the numbered session. This is equivalent to entering a name in the Session field in Figure 64.Syntax:

NOTE The session should be made inactive first by using SESSION(SessionNumber ,OFF) , then activated again using SESSION(SessionNumber ,ON) .Example: SET_SESSION_NAME(3,"Enter Session Name","Test99")

SET_SESSION_SUFFIX()No longer supported.

INCREMENT_SESSION_SUFFIXNo longer supported.

SET_SESSION_NAME(SessionNumber ,” Prompt ”,” DefaultSessionName ”)

where SessionNumber is the database logging session to use: range 1 to 10.Prompt is user prompt text to be displayed in the title bar of the dialog box opened by the macro.DefaultSessionName is a session name to be applied if the user leaves the input field blank.

Prompt text appears here.

User input field

FIGURE 271 Macro text input dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

Macros for Interacting with a User

GET_TEXTDisplays a dialog box showing the Prompt message and a text input field (Figure 271). If the user enters text, the text is assigned to an internal (DeLogger) variable.

Syntax:

The variable can be used as a substitution variable in the SEND_TEXT() macro, allowing user-initiated messages and commands to be transmitted to a connection.Example: GET_TEXT(5,"Enter the schedule to Halt","HA")

SEND_TEXT("dt800 Com1","%5")

GET_VALUEDisplays a dialog box showing the Prompt message and a numeric input field (Figure 271). If the user enters a value, the value is assigned to an internal (DeLogger) variable.

Syntax:

The variable can be used as a substitution variable in the SEND_TEXT() macro, allowing user-initiated messages and commands to be transmitted to a connection.Example: GET_VALUE(2,"Enter counter start value",0)

SEND_TEXT("dt800 Com1","5C=%2")

GET_TEXT(VariableNumber ," Prompt "," DefaultText ")

where VariableNumber must be in the range 0 to 9.Prompt is user prompt text to be displayed in the title bar of the dialog box opened by the macro.DefaultText is placed into the variable if the user leaves the input field blank.

GET_VALUE(VariableNumber ," Prompt ", DefaultValue )

where VariableNumber must be in the range 0 to 9.Prompt is user prompt text to be displayed in the title bar of the dialog box opened by the macro.DefaultValue is placed into the variable if the user leaves the input field blank.


UM

-007

0-A

0

MESSAGE_BOXDisplays a Yes/No dialog box containing the defined message text.If the user clicks No, the action terminates immediately and no following macros are processed. If the user clicks Yes, execution of the action proceeds to the next macro.This macro can typically be used as an “Are You Sure?” dialog box.Syntax:

Example: MESSAGE_BOX("Do you wish to clear data from logger?")

MESSAGE_LINEDisplays the message text in the Messages tab of the Event Logs window (Figure 249 on page 167).Syntax:

Example: MESSAGE_LINE("Data download completed.")

Miscellaneous Macros

DELAYDelays executing any following macros until the specified number of seconds has elapsed.Syntax:

Example: DELAY("10")

MessageText appears here.

The action stops.The action proceeds.

FIGURE 272 Macro message box

MESSAGE_BOX("MessageText ")

where MessageText is user prompt text to be displayed in the dialog box opened by the macro.

MESSAGE_LINE("MessageText ")

where MessageText is the text you want displayed in the Messages tab of the Event Logs window.

DELAY(" Seconds ")

where Seconds is the number of seconds to wait.


UM

-007

0-A

0

5-4 SCHEDULING ACTIONS (SCHEDULE UTILITY)

The Schedule utility is provided in DeLogger Pro only, and is used to automate the running of tasks such as• DeLogger Pro actions• Windows programs• DeLogger Pro reports.

Schedule can trigger these tasks to run in a number of ways:• once at a particular date and time (for example, on

July 6th at 16:00:00)• at a user-defined interval (for example, every hour

forever)• at a user-defined interval (for example, every 12

hours) over a user-defined period (for example, the month of July)

Each definition of the task to perform and its trigger is called a schedule71. Up to 15 concurrent schedules can

be defined, each performing different tasks at different times.Schedule is a separate Windows application from DeLogger Pro. You launch it from the Windows Start menu by choosing Start > Programs > DeLogger > Schedule.For Schedule to do its work, you must launch it and leave it running on the computer. Then:• If Schedule is to run DeLogger Pro actions or reports,

DeLogger Pro must also be running and have the project open to which the scheduled actions or reports belong.

• If Schedule is to run Windows programs, DeLogger Pro does not need to be running.

Toolbar

To edit a schedule, double-click its icon

to open its Properties dialog box sequence

Menu bar

Status bar

Workspace

Show/hide the status bar. Add a new schedule.Delete the selected schedule.Edit the selected schedule.Toggle the selected schedule ACTIVE or PAUSED.Run the selected schedule now.Pause all schedules (no schedules trigger while Pause is ticked).

Show/hide the toolbar.Display schedules as a detailed list.Display schedule icons only.

The Next Schedule column shows when the schedule is due to run next.

The Status column shows ACTIVE when the schedule is enabled to run at the next trigger time, and PAUSED when the schedule is disabled. Toggle the selected schedule’s status using the Schedule > Active command (or the Toggle Active button).

The Action ID column shows the name of any action,

.exe file or report assigned to each schedule.

The Schedule ID column shows each schedule’s icon

and the unique name you gave to each schedule during definition.

FIGURE 273 The Schedule utility’s main window

(see “Schedule Icons” on page 197)

(Figure 274).

71 Don’t confuse the Schedule utility’s schedules with dataTaker schedules. They are not the same.


UM

-007

0-A

0

When you launch Schedule, it displays its main window — Figure 273.IMPORTANT The Schedule utility depends on the computer‘s clock, so make sure that the clock is set to the correct date and time (Start menu > Settings > Control Panel > Date/Time).

Schedule IconsIn the main window, the type of schedule is indicated by icons as follows:

Right-Click MenuThe following commands are duplicated on the Schedule utility’s right-click menu:• Schedule > Add• Schedule > Delete• Schedule > Properties

Adding a New ScheduleTo add a new schedule to the Schedule utility, choose Schedule > Add. Figure 274 explains the sequence of screens that opens. NOTE A Schedule utility schedule can run one or more tasks — a DeLogger Pro action and/or a Windows program and/or a DeLogger Pro report.

DeLogger Pro AreaIf you want the new schedule to run a DeLogger Pro action, enter the action details in the DeLogger Pro area of the first screen of Figure 274:• From the Action drop-down list, select the action.

The actions that appear here are those created in DeLogger Pro (see “Configuration > Actions” on page 55).

• The Schedule utility communicates with DeLogger Pro by means of DDE while running an action, and relies on DeLogger Pro responding that the action is complete before flagging the action locally as having been completed. You can set a timeout period for DeLogger Pro to respond, and the maximum number

of retries until the action completes successfully. If a retry is successful, then the trigger increments to the next trigger time. If the retries are unsuccessful, the schedule is disabled (PAUSED).In the Retry and Timeout fields, enter the number of retries and the timeout (in seconds) between retries.

Editing a ScheduleTo edit a schedule’s properties, highlight the schedule (single-click its icon) and choose Schedule > Properties (or click the Properties button on the toolbar, or simply double-click the schedule’s icon).This opens the same dialogs as for adding a new schedule (Figure 274), and any entry (other than the Schedule ID) can be edited.

Setting the Activity of a ScheduleSchedules can be• enabled to respond to triggers (schedule is ACTIVE),

or• disabled from responding to triggers (schedule is

PAUSED).To change the activity status of a schedule, highlight the schedule (single-click its icon) and choose Schedule > Active (or click the Toggle Active button on the toolbar).Each schedule’s activity status is listed in the Status column (window must be in View > Details mode).

Running a Schedule NowSchedules can be manually triggered at any time. To do this, highlight the schedule (single-click its icon) and choose Schedule > Run Now (or click the Run Now button on the toolbar).The schedule will still trigger and run at the date and time listed in the Next Schedule column (window must be in View > Details mode).

Global PauseTo prevent all schedules from running, choose Schedule > Pause (or click the Global Pause button on the toolbar).When in this mode, each schedule’s status reported in the Status column doesn’t change, but a tick appears beside Pause on the Schedule menu and the Global Pause button appears pressed.

Action icon The schedule runs the named DeLogger Pro action (previously defined in DeLogger Pro).

Report icon The schedule runs the named DeLogger Pro report (previously defined in DeLogger Pro).

Windows program icon

The schedule runs the named Windows program (.exe file).

Multiple-task icons

The schedule runs two or three tasks.

CHAPTER 5: ACTIONS 5-4 Scheduling Actions (Schedule Utility) 197

UM

-007

0-A

0

Give every schedule a unique name.

If you want the schedule to run a Windows program (.exe), type

the path to the file here, or click Browse and locate it in the

dialog box that opens.

If you want the schedule to run a DeLogger Pro report, select it here. (To create reports, see

Select Daily if you want the schedule to trigger every day

forever.Select Recurse (then make

selections from the three drop-down lists) if you want the

schedule to repeat on a particular day/month combination.

If the report requires input parameters (such as a session

name or channel name) that were specified when the report was

created , type them in the Param fields.

Set a Priority for the schedule to instruct the Schedule utility how to arbitrate the situation of two or more triggers occurring at the same time. (If several schedules’ priorities are the same and their triggers coincide, the schedules are run in alphabetical order.)0 = highest priority9 = lowest priority

If the program requires command-line Parameters when run, type them here.

Select the report’s destination:• view on-screen (Window),• print on the computer’s system

Printer, or• Export as an HTML document

stored in DeLogger Pro’s …\Publish\html\Reports folder.

Select Recurse if you want the schedule to repeat through the

day(s) defined in the Date area, type Start and End times to

specify the part of the day during which the schedule will trigger,

and type the time interval between triggers in the Frequency field.

Select Once if you want the schedule to trigger once only on

the day(s) defined in the Date area, and type the trigger time in

the format shown.

Specify an action and/or a Windows program to run.

Specify a report to run.

Specify the schedule’s trigger.

FIGURE 274 The Schedule utility’s Properties screens (for creating or editing a schedule)

See “DeLogger Pro Area” onpage 197.

“Configuration > Reports” onpage 57.)

(Figure 61)


UM

-007

0-A

0

CHAPTER 6

REPORTS

6-1 REPORTS INTRODUCTION

You can run reports on• dataTaker alarms (if you’ve enabled them for

logging72) — see “Reports > Alarms” on page 127)• dataTaker errors (if you’ve enabled them for

logging72) — see “Reports > Errors” on page 128)• the Schedule log and the actions log — see “Reports >

Log Files” on page 128)• dataTaker data — see “Reports > Database Reports” on

page 129.This is summarized in Figure 275.

Running ReportsThere are three ways of running reports:• from the Reports menu — see “The Reports Menu”

beginning on page 127• using an action, which can be triggered by an alarm

or a mimic button — see “Configuration > Actions” on page 55

• using the Schedule utility — see “Scheduling Actions (Schedule Utility)” beginning on page 196

Because actions can be chained, you can group reports together.

6-2 REPORT TOOLS AND THE DATA DATABASE

You can run reports against the replay data73 (sessions) stored in DeLogger Pro’s data database using• dedicated report-writing software such as Crystal

Reports74

• third party tools such as Access® 2.0 by Microsoft• programming tools such as Visual Basic®

• spreadsheet applications such as Microsoft Excel.DeLogger Pro’s default is to use the Crystal Reports Engine, which is installed with DeLogger. This is the preferred reporting tool because of its power, flexibility, and ease of use for both technical and non-technical users.In addition, because all the stored data can be accessed using ODBC technology, spreadsheets such as Microsoft Excel can be used to read and report on the data where more complicated calculations or graphing is required. Most software packages are now ODBC-enabled, giving a wide range of reporting and statistical options.

72 See “Logging Errors and Alarms” on page 53.

73 See the “Historical Data, Replay Data” Extras panel on page 40.

74 Crystal Reports by Crystal Computer Services, Inc.

CHAPTER 6: REPORTS 6-1 Reports Introduction 199

UM

-007

0-A

0

6-3 INSTALLED REPORTS AND SECONDARY REPORTS

DeLogger Pro has two types of reports:• installed reports (templates), and• secondary reports (also called database reports).

Installed ReportsInstalled reports are created using the third-party report-writing software Crystal Reports74 and, to be available for use within DeLogger, must reside in DeLogger’s designated reports folder (see “Installed Reports Folder” below).As Figure 275 shows, DeLogger is supplied with eight installed reports (for alarm and message reporting), and DeLogger Pro is supplied with two additional ones (for log reporting). You run these default installed reports from the Reports menu — see• “Reports > Alarms” on page 127• “Reports > Errors” on page 128• “Reports > Log Files” on page 128

or using an action — see “Configuration > Actions” on page 55.You can also write your own installed reports, or have your dataTaker representative write them for you. This is discussed in “DIY Installed Reports” on page 202. You make these DIY installed reports available using the Configuration > Reports dialog box (Figure 61 on page 57), then run them using the Reports > Database Reports dialog box (Figure 192 on page 129).

Installed Reports FolderFor DeLogger to recognize Crystal Reports .rpt files as installed reports, the .rpt files must be placed in the folder referenced by the Windows registry key HKEY_CURRENT_USER\ Software\Discbell\DeLogger\Default\ReportDir, which by default is the Reports folder inside the DeLogger installation folder (see Figure 7 on page 18).

Secondary ReportsYou create secondary reports (also called database reports) using DeLogger Pro’s Database Properties dialog box (Figure 61) — see “Configuration > Reports” on page 57.Secondary reports are based on installed reports, and exist as individual records in DeLogger’s administration database. (Yes, you use secondary reports, which are kept in DeLogger’s administration database, to run reports on DeLogger’s data database.)We’ve included a few secondary reports with DeLogger Pro. In a new DeLogger installation, they are• the default records you see when you click the

previous/next control buttons in the Configuration > Reports dialog box (Figure 61 on page 57)

• listed in the Report (Identifiers) area of the Reports > Database Reports dialog box (Figure 192 on page 129).


UM

-007

0-A

0

dlp001.rpt

dlp004.rpt

dlp003.rpt

dlp002.rpt

dlp001.rpt

dlp004.rpt

dlp003.rpt

dlp002.rpt

dlp010.rpt

dlp013.rpt

dlp012.rpt

dlp011.rpt

dlp030.rpt

dlp040.rpt

dlp030.rpt

dlp040.rpt

dlp010.rpt

dlp013.rpt

dlp012.rpt

dlp011.rpt

Default installed

report files (in …\Report

folder)

dataTaker alarm reports

dataTaker error reports

dataTaker data reports,

other reports

Schedule utility log report and action log report

Default installed reports (created outside DeLogger Pro using Crystal Reports, and supplied/installed with DeLogger).Run from the Reports menu.

DIY installed reports, and secondary reports (created in DeLogger Probased on installed reports(see Figure 99)Run from the Reports > Database

Reports dialog box

FIGURE 275 Reports overview

— see Figure 61).

(Figure 192).

See Figure 192.

CHAPTER 6: REPORTS 6-3 Installed Reports and Secondary Reports 201

UM

-007

0-A

0

6-4 GLOBAL FORMULAS

DeLogger Pro defines two global formulas:

If you select these as secondary report parameters (see Figures 61 and 192), DeLogger Pro converts them to the corresponding session names when the report is run.

6-5 DIY INSTALLED REPORTS

If you want to Do It Yourself — that is, write and install your own reports into DeLogger Pro — you’ll need to buy a copy of Crystal Reports (Version 7.0). It’s available from most software suppliers or through your local dataTaker representative.Alternatively, your dataTaker representative can write reports for you.

Installing and Using an Installed ReportTo install one of these report files:1. Place the .rpt file into DeLogger’s designated reports

folder — see “Installed Reports Folder” on page 200

2. Create a new report entry in the database (Figure 61 on page 57).You do this so that you can access the report (using the Reports > Database Reports command — page 129).

Report-Writing GuidelinesIf you want to write your own installed reports (you must use Crystal Reports to be compatible with DeLogger) we recommend that you follow this sequence:1. Decide on the data that’s required in your report

and how you’ll obtain it. Decide on where it’s best to apply any data reduction:• in the dataTaker (using statistical functions, or• in the report using its in-built functions.

2. Ensure that the data will be stored correctly in the database.Note that there is also an in-built Query in the database that will give you a cross-tab report of the first 100 data points for each channel on any session.

3. Design your report on paper.4. Decide how many parameters (maximum of eight)

will need to be passed to the report and how they will be used.The parameters defined for the report within DeLogger Pro are automatically passed into Crystal Reports formulas75 at run time with the names Param1 to Param8. These defined formulas can be utilized in other formulas or in the record/group selection criteria thereby allowing great flexibility. For example, you can use the first parameter to define a session name that is passed into the Crystal Reports formula Param1 at run time and use it in the record selection criteria to only read those records whose session name matches the parameter value.

5. Create the report using Crystal Reports.6. Move the report (.rpt file) into the Report folder in

DeLogger’s installation directory, ensuring it has a unique name.

7. Make an entry in the database for this report, along with any required default parameters.To make an entry, see Figure 61 on page 57.

8. If required, create an action entry in the database so that the report can be run from an incoming alarm or from a mimic button.Because actions can be chained, you can group reports together.

9. Run the report (see “Reports > Database Reports” on page 129) and compare the results against your control data.

@CurrentSessionID Holds the name of the current database logging session (the last block of data logged to the database)

@PreviousSessionID Holds the name of the previous database logging session (the previous block of data logged to the database)

75 You must ensure that these formulas exist in the report if you want to use them. See “Parameter Fields” on page 57.


UM

-007

0-A

0

CHAPTER 7

DELOGGER UTILITY SOFTWARE

7-1 SCHEDULE UTILITY See “Scheduling Actions (Schedule Utility)” on page 196.

7-2 SITEADMIN UTILITY There are two working databases76 used by DeLogger:• an administration database, which stores global

details such as actions, connections properties, logs of dataTaker alarms and errors, and logs of when schedules and actions executed

• a data database, which stores database logging session data

SiteAdmin is a separate utility that you use to administer and maintain these databases. It allows you to do the following tasks:

IMPORTANT• You cannot do these tasks directly from DeLogger or

DeLogger Pro.• DeLogger or DeLogger Pro must not be running when

you use SiteAdmin.• You cannot start SiteAdmin from within DeLogger or

DeLogger Pro. (Start it from the Windows taskbar by choosing Start > Programs > DeLogger > SiteAdmin, or use Explorer or My Computer to locate the siteadmin.exe file in DeLogger’s installation folder then double-click the file.)

• Not all of SiteAdmin’s functions apply to DeLogger (see table above).

WarningWhen SiteAdmin is launched, it provides the following warning:

The databases can only be accessed by one program at a time. Therefore, if DeLogger or DeLogger Pro is running, exit (quit) it now, before continuing with

76 They are FoxPro® databases — a FoxPro database engine is installed when you install DeLogger.

Delete Delete data from data logging sessions. Delete entire data logging sessions. Delete runtime logs for dataTaker alarms and dataTaker errors.Delete runtime logs for DeLogger actions and Schedule utility schedules.

Pack Pack the databases. Archive Archive the data database. Clear Clear the entire data database.Browse Browse a session’s contents.Start again

Replace a corrupt data database with a clean, new copy.

Report Produce reports of site (connections) definitions, action definitions and port definitions.

FIGURE 276 SiteAdmin’s opening warning

CHAPTER 7: DELOGGER UTILITY SOFTWARE 7-1 Schedule Utility 203

UM

-007

0-A

0

SiteAdmin. (Use Alt+Tab to switch to DeLogger or DeLogger Pro, exit it, then continue working in SiteAdmin.)

SiteAdmin’s Main WindowAfter you click OK in the warning dialog box (Figure 276), SiteAdmin’s main window opens:

Commands on the File and Edit menus (except File > Exit) have no function in the DeLogger implementation of SiteAdmin, the FoxPro® database administration tool. You use commands on the Administration and Reports menus for maintaining and reporting on your DeLogger databases.

Administration Menu

Administration > Pack DatabaseWhen you delete any database information within the various modules of the DeLogger, such as• actions and connection properties within DeLogger• schedules using the Schedule utility• logs using the SiteAdmin utility• data from database channel logging sessions using

the SiteAdmin utilityonly the links to these items within the appropriate database are removed, not the actual items. In other words, deleting items does not reduce the size of the database. (This is typical of most database software.) To

remove this un-linked/un-needed information from the database and reduce its size, you use Pack Database.

Pack Database > Administration DBPacks DeLogger’s administration database, which contains information such as• dataTaker error and alarm logs• DeLogger connection definitions• DeLogger default settings• DeLogger actions • DeLogger reports • DeLogger web publishing settings • DeLogger database channel logging session

definitions.

Pack Database > Data DBPacks DeLogger’s data database, which contains all database channel logging sessions and all unload sessions.

Administration > Session AdministrationAllows you to administer sessions. You can• clear data from selected sessions• delete selected sessions• delete all sessions• browse a session’s contents.

When you choose Session Administration, the Session Data dialog box opens:

Make a selection from the Session drop-down list, then• click Clear Session Data to clear all data from the

selected session (for database channel logging sessions, the session definition is not deleted; you can re-use it later)

• click Delete Session to delete the selected session (the session’s data and its definition are removed from the database)

• click Browse to see the contents of the selected session (a separate window opens).

FIGURE 277 SiteAdmin’s main window

FIGURE 278 SiteAdmin’s Administration menu

FIGURE 279 Session Data dialog box


UM

-007

0-A

0

Click Delete All Sessions if you want to delete ALL sessions (data and definitions) from the database. In case you click this button accidentally, an “Are you sure…?” dialog box opens giving you a chance to undo the mistake (phew).REMEMBER… to pack the data database after deleting sessions — see “Administration > Pack Database” on page 204.

Administration > Log File AdministrationAllows you to administer the dataTaker errors log and the dataTaker alarms log.If Log Errors and/or Log Alarms are ticked in DeLogger’s Configurations > Defaults dialog box (Figure 57 on page 52), errors and alarm messages from connected dataTakers are logged into the administration database. Details of when DeLogger actions run and when Schedule utility schedules run are also logged into the administration database.When you choose Log File Administration, the Log File Maintenance dialog box opens:

Click Clear Alarm Log, Clear Error Log, Clear Action Log or Clear Schedule Log to clear (empty) all information from the respective log file.REMEMBER… to pack the administration database after clearing the log file(s) — see “Administration > Pack Database” on page 204.

Administration > Archive Data DatabaseAfter prolonged use or when you complete a major project, you may want to save the data database elsewhere for future reference (“archive” it). SiteAdmin’s Archive Data Database function is a two-step process:• Firstly, you copy the current data database into one of

the archive databases or to the historical database77. You do this on the Archive To tab of the Data Archive dialog box (Figure 281).

• Secondly, you clean the current data database (that is, remove all data from it) and pack it. You do this on the Clean Database tab of the Data Archive dialog box (Figure 282).

RECOMMENDATION Pack the data database before archiving it — see “Administration > Pack Database” on page 204.

Step 1Choose Administration > Archive Data Database. The Data Archive dialog box opens (Figure 281)

Click the Archive To tab (to ensure that it’s active), then click the button corresponding to the destination you want. DeLogger replaces the contents of the destination database with a copy of the current data database. (“Are you sure…?” messages give you a chance to change your mind.)

Step 2

Click the Clean Database tab (to ensure that it’s active), then click Clean and Pack. DeLogger erases all data from the current data database and packs it. (“Are you

FIGURE 280 Log File Maintenance dialog box

77 DeLogger actually has five pre-defined data databases — the current data database, three archive databases, and an historical database. See “How Many, What, Where?” on page 226.

Step 1Replace any one of these databases with a copy of the current data database.

FIGURE 281 Data Archive dialog box — Archive To tab

Step 2Clean (erase all) and pack the data database.

FIGURE 282 Data Archive dialog box — Clean Database tab

CHAPTER 7: DELOGGER UTILITY SOFTWARE 7-2 SiteAdmin Utility 205

UM

-007

0-A

0

sure…?” messages give you a chance to change your mind.)

Copy CleanDeLogger can be used in remote situations, or in situations not ideal for computers, where it’s possible for incidents such as power fluctuations and electrical interference to occur during prolonged sessions of data logging to the database. Such disturbances may partially damage, or even corrupt, the open database file.If this occurs and you can’t use the current data database any more, your only option is to replace the damaged database with a clean, new database. You do this by clicking the Copy Clean button in the Clean Database tab of the Data Archive dialog box — Figure 283. (After you click the button, “Are you sure…?” messages give you a chance to change your mind.)

Reports Menu

SiteAdmin’s Reports menu contains commands that allow you to run three types of reports on DeLogger’s administration database.

Reports > Site ListingProduces a detailed listing of the sites or connections that have been defined within DeLogger under Connections > Properties > Serial tab (Figure 45 on page 43).

Reports > Action ListingProduces a detailed listing of the actions that have been defined within DeLogger under Configuration > Actions (Figure 58 on page 55).

Reports > PortProduces a detailed listing of the Ethernet ports that have been defined within DeLogger under Connections > Properties > Network tab (Figure 48 on page 45).

Closing SiteAdmin The File > Close command is not supported in this implementation of SiteAdmin. To close (exit/quit/shut down) SiteAdmin, either• click the Close icon at the top right-hand corner of

the main window, or• choose File > Exit.

Replace the data database with a clean, new, empty data database.

FIGURE 283 Data Archive dialog box — Copy Clean button

FIGURE 284 SiteAdmin’s Reports menu


UM

-007

0-A

0

7-3 IUSER UTILITYSee “Installing DeLogger4 on Windows NT, 2000 and XP (iUser)” on page 235.

7-4 REPLAY FILE UTILITIESTwo command-line utilities that allow you to manage replay files (.dlr) are provided with DeLogger:• dlr2dlr.exe allows you to cut large replay files into

smaller, more-manageable files based on size or date.

• dlr2txt.exe allows you to convert replay files into different forms of .csv or .txt files suitable for loading into other programs such as Excel.

The files are located in the …\DeLogger\Tools folder. They must be run from a DOS prompt (Start menu > Programs > MS-DOS Prompt, or simply double-click the file in the Windows Explorer).

FIGURE 285 dlr2dlr and dlr2txt replay file utilities

CHAPTER 7: DELOGGER UTILITY SOFTWARE 7-3 iUser Utility 207

UM

-007

0-A

0

CHAPTER 8

SAVING — WHAT, WHEN, WHERE

8-1 WHAT’S SAVED WHENAs you’d expect, you can choose whether or not to save changes you make to a project’s appearance and contents. This is explained in “Manual Saves”.In addition, be aware that DeLogger saves some information automatically. This is explained in “Automatic Saves”.

Automatic SavesSaving Main Window Details (Global)The following global information is automatically saved (in the computer’s system registry) every time you exit DeLogger — whether or not you choose to save changes:• main window details (minimized/maximized state,

position, size,…)• the last project used• toolbar and events window states and locations• all settings in the File > Customize dialog box

(background, splash screen,… — see page 29)

Saving Data Hub Details (Project-Specific) Changes you make to the data hub — done in the Data Hub Channels dialog box (see Figure 63 on page 59) — are automatically saved when you click Close in the the dialog box. They are saved to the project’s .dlw file (see page 22) and are therefore project-specific.

Saving New DocumentsWhen you add a new document to a project, DeLogger automatically saves the project (to its .dlw file).

Saving MessagesAll DeLogger message events are automatically logged in the message.txt file in DeLogger’s installation directory as they occur.

See also “Load Existing Message Entries” on page 52.

Saving Errors and AlarmsWhen the Log Errors and Log Alarms options in Figure 57 are ticked, errors and alarms from connected dataTakers are automatically logged (in the administration database) as they arrive.

Manual SavesSaving Administration DetailsThe settings on the following tabs of DeLogger’s administration dialog boxes are saved (to DeLogger’s administration database) when you click the appropriate tab’s Accept button:• all tabs in the Connections dialog box (Connections

menu > Properties)• Serial tab (Figure 45)• Network tab (Figure 48)• Modem tab (Figure 49) • Auto-Answer Modem tab (Figure 53) • File tab (Figure 54)• Database tab (Figure 55)

• Configuration (Database Properties) dialog boxes• Defaults tab (Configuration menu > Defaults;

Figure 57)• Actions tab (Configuration menu > Actions;

Figure 58) • Reports tab (Configuration menu > Reports;

Figure 61) • Web Publish tab (Configuration menu > Web

Publish; Figure 62) See also “Database Delicacies” on page 226.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Saving Project DetailsChoosing File > Save Project78 saves• all the files in the project’s folder (Figure 14):

• its .dlw file (the project’s master file)• its sub-window files (.dlf, .dlc, .dlt, .dlm,…), which

hold all the sub-window details (types, sizes, positions and so on)

• all data, information and settings in the sub-windows (for example, chart and program builder contents, and spreadsheet contents, print range and page breaks).

See also“File > Save Project” on page 23.

8-2 WHAT’S STORED WHEREDeLogger stores data and other information as follows:

See also “Database Delicacies” on page 226.

78 Or clicking Yes when asked if you want to save changes when closing a project or exiting DeLogger.

Each project’s project master file stores…(see “.dlw File” on page 22)

DeLogger data hub channels and their details

See “Configuration > Data Hub Channels” on page 59.

Automatic saves

new documents See “File > New” on page 21.the name and location of the project’s admin and data databases

See “How Many, What, Where?” on page 226.

DeLogger database channel logging session definitions

See “Configuration > Database Channel Logging Sessions” on page 60.

Windows system registry stores… DeLogger main window details Unless the Workspace State Remember… options are un-ticked — see Figure 31 on page 32.

some Defaults tab settings See “Configuration > Defaults” on page 52.

DeLogger web publishing settings

See “Configuration > Web Publish” on page 58.

DeLogger’s message.txt file stores… DeLogger messages See “Load Existing Message Entries” on page 52.

The administration database stores… dataTaker errors See “Logging Errors and Alarms” on page 53.dataTaker alarms

DeLogger connections See “The Connections Menu” on page 38.

Manual saves

some Defaults tab settings See “Configuration > Defaults” on page 52.

DeLogger actions See “Configuration > Actions” on page 55.

DeLogger secondary reports See “Configuration > Reports” on page 57.

Schedule utility schedules See “Scheduling Actions (Schedule Utility)” on page 196.

The data database stores… dataTaker data as it’s received — either in real time (saved to a logging session) or from an unload operation (saved to an unload session)

Data logging doesn’t occur automatically — you must initiate it. See “Configuration > Database Channel Logging Sessions” on page 60 and “dataTaker > Unload” on page 64.

CHAPTER 8: SAVING — WHAT, WHEN, WHERE 8-2 What’s Stored Where 209

UM

-007

0-A

0

CHAPTER 9

ADVANCED TOPICS

9-1 THE DATA HUBThe data hub79 is a central marshalling point and repository for information and data coming into DeLogger Pro from various sources. See Figure 43.DeLogger Pro’s data hub accepts• realtime and logged data from connected dataTakers• data from data files (replay files)• data from DeLogger Pro’s data database (sessions)

and individual data channels may contain• data from input channels• data from calculations in the dataTaker• data from dataTaker alarm states.

The data hub keeps track of all the individual data channels from current connections, and makes their data available to the various modules and views of DeLogger Pro. All of this information is stored in the project’s master file (see “.dlw File” on page 22) and is therefore project-specific.NOTE The data hub is only accessible in DeLogger Pro.

Data Hub Dialog BoxYou view and configure the data hub’s contents in the Data Hub Channels dialog box, which you open by choosing the Configuration menu > Data Hub Channels command — see page 59. Pressing the F5 key on your keyboard also opens this dialog box.If DeLogger is not connected to any dataTakers, and there are no replay files or database sessions open, the Data Hub Channels dialog box either• looks like an empty spreadsheet (Figure 286) if

DeLogger Pro has never been connected to a data site, or

• contains the channel entries left from previous connections.

But when DeLogger Pro is connected to a dataTaker that has a program running, or to a replay file or database session within DeLogger Pro, the data hub dialog box

79 Introduced in the “Data Hub” Extras panel on page 62.

FIGURE 286 The data hub dialog box — no channels

FIGURE 287 The data hub dialog box — one connection


UM

-007

0-A

0

contains the data channels associated with the connection (Figure 287). Moreover, if DeLogger Pro is connected to more than one data source, the data hub

dialog box contains a tab (along the bottom edge) for each connection (Figure 288). View a connection’s channels by clicking its tab.

Data Channels in the Data HubThe data hub lists the following information for every data channel of every current connection to DeLogger Pro:• connection name• job name• dataTaker scan schedule• dataTaker channel name• current value• datestamp and timestamp of current value• last value• datestamp and timestamp of last value• highest value• lowest value• units• status• software alarm limits, alarm message and alarm

action• conditional tests

• dependant tests• DDE conversation handle (hot link details)• OPC link handle• database logging sessions

Data Channel IDEach data channel in the data hub dialog box has a unique identity, which is used in DeLogger Pro to identify individual data items within the data streams available throughout a project. The data channel ID is a combination of the connection name, job name, dataTaker scan schedule and dataTaker channel name in the formatConnectionName.JobName.ScheduleName.ChannelNameFor example:• dt50 Com1.JOB1.B.5V• dt800 Com2.JOB1.B.3PT385• dt800 Com2.JOB1.B.AirTemp• dt800 Remote.Well_C.D.MotorCurrent

Changes are automatically saved (in the project’s .dlw file) when you Close the dialog box.

Tick to prevent changes to the job currently visible in the dialog box (also prevents DeLogger Pro automatically updating the job’s details in the data hub if the connection is re-made).

Clear (delete) the current job tab (and its channels) from the data hub.Cleared jobs no longer appear in the choice lists of any DeLogger Pro views. If cleared channels are specified in any of the views, DeLogger Pro generates error messages in the events log window.Take care when clearing jobs — once cleared, they can’t be recovered until DeLogger Pro makes that connection again.

File connectionSerial connectionsVirtual channels

Job tabs

Channel display settings — see See Not usedThe rate of each channel’s schedule

FIGURE 288 The data hub dialog box — several connections


Screen 1 of Figure 289. “Channel Flags” on page 59.

CHAPTER 9: ADVANCED TOPICS 9-1 The Data Hub 211

UM

-007

0-A

0

For DT5/6xx dataTakers, JobName is always JOB1. For DT8xx dataTakers, JobName is the name assigned in the program builder and defaults to JOB1.For DT5/6xx dataTakers, ScheduleName is always A, B, C or D. For DT8xx dataTakers, ScheduleName can be A, B, C, D, E,…K or a custom name assigned in the program builder.ChannelName is either the actual dataTaker command for the channel, or a custom label assigned in the program builder.

Data Hub — Automatic UpdatingWhenever DeLogger Pro connects to a dataTaker, it issues• a STATUS10 command (STATUS11 for a memory

card) to DT5/6xx dataTakers• a STATUS14 command to DT8xx dataTakers

to obtain information about the jobs and channel data that is available from the dataTaker. DeLogger Pro uses this STATUS information to build the data hub details for each connection. (See also “How the Data Hub Gets Its Information” on page 39.)In addition, if the resulting data is captured into a DeLogger replay file or database session, the STATUS information is also stored for use when you later connect to these.DeLogger Pro adds jobs and data channels to the data hub as follows:1. When you connect to a dataTaker with the Skip

STATUS Check option80 un-ticked (the default), DeLogger Pro issues• a STATUS10 to a DT5/6xx dataTaker

(STATUS11 for an inserted memory card)• a STATUS14 to a DT8xx dataTaker for each job.

2. ConnectionName.JobName combination:• If the ConnectionName.JobName combination

does not already exist in the data hub, a new entry is created for ConnectionName.JobName and all real channels are added.

• If the ConnectionName.JobName combination already exists in the data hub, its channels are flagged as “dirty” and are compared to the new list of channels as follows:• If any of the new list of channels already

exists in the hub, its dirty flag is cleared.•If any of the new list of channels does not exist

in the hub, it is added.• Old channels still flagged as dirty are

removed because they no longer exist in the connected dataTaker.

In this way, DeLogger Pro’s data hub is always automatically up-to-date with complete channel details of all the current connections. (File and database connections contain their own STATUS10/11/14 information, from which DeLogger Pro sets up the data hub for these connection types.)See also “Connections > Manual Integrity Check” on page 39).If the Synchronise channel list to dataTaker option in the Configuration > Defaults dialog box (Figure 57) is not ticked, step 2 above is not actioned for any connections (including file and database connections).If Lock Job is ticked in the data hub dialog box (Figure 63) for the ConnectionName.JobName combination, step 2 above is not actioned.The data channel information in the data hub is project-specific, and is held in the project’s master file (see “.dlw File” on page 22).

Primary and Virtual Data ChannelsThe data channels that originate from dataTakers are called primary channels.Virtual channels are data channels that you create within the data hub. They are not directly mapped to a physical channel or calculation in a dataTaker — they exist only within DeLogger Pro. For more information, see “Virtual Data Channels” beginning on page 215.

Distribution of Channel Data within DeLogger ProThe data from primary and virtual channels in the data hub is made available by the data hub to DeLogger Pro’s various functions and views. Each of these has a channel list, from which you select channels for use in the function or view. For example, see• the form window Select Channels dialog box in

Figure 211 (page 137)• the chart window Channel fields in Figure 102

(page 88)• the mimic meter Channel fields in Figure 125

(page 98).

80 Serial, network and modem connections — see Figures 45, 48 and 49.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Data Hub FunctionsThe data hub has functions that allow you to• manage primary channels and virtual channels —

see “Setting a Channel’s Properties in the Data Hub” below

• add virtual channels — see “Adding a Store Channel” on page 216 and “Adding a Calculated Channel” on page 218.

Setting a Channel’s Properties in the Data HubDeLogger’s default is to pass incoming data directly to its data views unchanged. But, in addition, the data hub contains tools that you can use to test, modify and

manage each channel’s data in various ways before passing it on. In fact, you can specify the channel’s visibility, test its range, make it dependant on another channel, and specify alarm and store settings.To set these properties for a primary channel or a virtual channel, choose Configuration menu > Data Hub Channels and then, in the dialog box that opens (Figure 63 or Figure 288), click the connection tab that contains the channel, select the channel you want to configure, and click the Properties button. DeLogger Pro presents you with the first screen of the sequence shown in Figure 289.Work through the screens in Figures 289 and 290 to configure one or more properties for the selected channel.

Screen 1: Specify the channel’s visibility.The name of the selected channel apears here.

When ticked, out-of-range channel data is clipped (set) to the respective set-point.Click Next to move to Screen 3.

Select the Condition.

Untick if you want to hide the channel from the choice lists of any DeLogger Pro functions and views.Then when you return to the data hub dialog box (at the end of this screen sequence), No appears in the Show column for this channel.When unticked, the channel is still available to virtual channels created from it.Click Next to move to Screen 2.

Type one or two set-point values as required by the condition.

Screen 2: Define a conditional test for the selected channel’s data.See

Screen 3: Define a dependancy test (the channel’s validity depends on another channel’s conditional test).

Select the “other” channel and its condition, and type one or two set-point values as required by the test.Click Next to move to Screen 4.

FIGURE 289 Setting data hub channel properties — screen sequence (1 of 2)

Continued in Figure 290 (Screens 4 and 5)

“Conditional Settings” on page 214.

See “Dependant Settings” on page 214.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Conditional SettingsIn screen 2 of Figure 289, you test the range of the selected channel’s data. Failing the test results in a change of the channel’s status flag (see “Channel Logging Mode” on page 53), which is used• as a filter for various DeLogger Pro functions and

views — see the Show Invalid Date field in, for example, Figure 98 (page 84)

• by virtual channels — see the Input Status Options dialog box at the bottom-left of Figure 290.

Failed channels display with different colours in form views.

Dependant SettingsIn screen 3 of Figure 289, you define that the validity of the selected channel’s data is dependant on the value of

Screen 5a: Store channel settings(store-type virtual channel only).See

Screen 5b: Calculated channel settings(calculation-type virtual channel only).See

Screen 4: Specify internal (DeLogger Pro) alarms for the selected channel.See

Apply up to five alarm tests to the channel.

For each of the five tests you want to apply:• Tick Active to enable the alarm test.• Type the alarm threshold Value.• Type a Text message (optional).• Tick Generate Alarm Event to display the text

message in the Event Logs window when the alarm becomes true.

• If you want the alarm to trigger an Action, select the action in the drop-down list.

For a primary channel, click Finish.For a virtual channel, click Next to move to Screen 5a or 5b.

FIGURE 290 Setting data hub channel properties — screen sequence (2 of 2)

“Alarm Settings” on page 215.

“Store Channels” on page 216.

“Calculated Channels” on page 218.

From Fig. 289

See the Advanced Settings rows in the table on page 217.


UM

-007

0-A

0

another channel. For example, a channel that monitors the temperature of a furnace can be defined as valid only if the furnace is actually operating, as indicated by another channel.Channels from all jobs are listed in the Channel drop-down list in screen 3 (where you select the “other” channel). This means that you can assign the validity of a data channel on one dataTaker to depend on the value of a data channel on a different dataTaker.Failing the test results in a change of the channel’s status flag (see “Channel Logging Mode” on page 53), which is used• as a filter for various DeLogger Pro functions and

views — see the Show Invalid Date field in, for example, Figure 98 (page 84)

• by virtual channels — see the Input Status Options dialog box at the bottom-left of Figure 290.

Failed channels display with different colours in form views.

Alarm SettingsSee screen 4 of Figure 290 and note the following:• The optional Text message is displayed in form

worksheets and in mimic window annunciators.• When ticked, Generate Alarm Event instructs

DeLogger Pro to• generate an internal alarm that sends the contents

of the Text field to the Alarms tab of the event logs window (simulates an alarm from a dataTaker)

• embed the selected Action in the alarm message, causing the action to be run whenever the alarm is generated.

Alarm status is only checked when data has not failed either conditional or dependancy tests (that is, when data is not partially- or fully-invalid).Channels in alarm states display with different colors in mimic views. If you want to change the default colors — advanced users only — modify the system registry key HKEY_CURRENT_USERS\Software\Discbell\DeLogger\Alarms LLColour LColour NormalColour HColour HHColour. The colors are defined in hexadecimal in three octets (first is the blue component value, second is the green component value, third is the red component value); values for each octet range from 00 (no color for this component) to FF (full color for this component).

Virtual Data ChannelsAs introduced in “Primary and Virtual Data Channels” on page 212, virtual channels are data channels that you create within the data hub. They are not directly mapped to a physical channel or calculation in a dataTaker — they exist only within DeLogger Pro.A virtual channel can be derived from primary channels or from other virtual channels. For example, a virtual channel could be a 15-minute rolling or static average of a primary channel, and itself could be used as the basis of a 24-hour rolling average. There are two types of virtual channels:• store channels• calculated channels

A store channel is a one-dimensional array81 that can be filled with successive readings of another real or virtual channel, and a calculation made against the accumulated data. The size of the array is user-defined, as is the type of function used to calculate the result. The store can be• rolling, where successive readings are added and the

oldest removed, or• resetting, where the array is filled, the calculation

made and the store cleared ready for re-triggering.There are also options to control the status of the data being entered into the array. See “Store Channels” on page 216 for details.A calculated channel is based on a spreadsheet and can take any current real or virtual channel reading and apply user-defined algorithms. The result must be limited to a single reading within a user-specified cell. This result cell is used as the calculated channel reading. See “Calculated Channels” on page 218 for details.

The Virtual Job Data HubIn the data hub, virtual channels are listed on the Virtual… tab for the JobName of the dataTaker that is providing the base values. When you click a virtual tab in the data hub, additional buttons appear on the right-hand side of the dialog box. Figure 291 explains.

Order of CalculationReal channels are updated when new data is received for them. Each virtual channel is then called to check if it needs to re-calculate, which it does by checking if any of the base channels it uses have updated.Virtual channels are called to calculate in the order they are displayed in the data hub (Figure 291). Therefore, if

81 Array: a sequence of memory locations used to store successive readings.


UM

-007

0-A

0

a virtual channel is based on another virtual channel (the base channel), the based-on channel must be later in the displayed order (that is, lower down the dialog box) than the base channel. You change the order of display using the Move Up and Move Down buttons in Figure 291.

Store ChannelsA store channel is a virtual channel that stores successive readings from a real or virtual base channel, and calculates a result based on a selected function. There are two types of store channels; rolling and resetting.

Rolling Store ChannelA rolling store channel fills an array82 with successive real or virtual base channel readings, calculates the result, and waits for the next base channel reading.When the second and subsequent base readings are received, the rolling store shifts all of the values in the array down one, places the new reading at the end of the array, then re-calculates. Therefore the frequency of the result is initially the base channel rate times the array

size, but will then be every time the base channel updates.The size of each array is limited to 4096 readings.

Resetting Store ChannelA resetting store channel fills an array82, calculates a result, and then clears the array ready to re-fill again when the trigger condition is met. Therefore the frequency of a result is the base channel update rate times the array size, controlled by the trigger frequency. If the trigger frequency is set lower the number of entries required to fill the array, the calculation is made at the trigger point and the data is tagged PARTIALLY_INVALID .NOTE The trigger frequency is always synchronised to the time units selected. For example, if Seconds is selected, the trigger is always be synchronised to the 0th second of each minute.

Adding a Store ChannelTo add a store-type virtual channel:1. Choose Configuration menu > Data Hub Channels.2. In the dialog box that opens (Figure 288 on

page 211), click the Add Virtual button.DeLogger Pro presents you with the first screen of the sequence shown in Figures 293 and 294 (page 219).

Virtual channels job tab

Clears the stores of all channels on the current tab

Clears the selected channel’s store

Deletes the selected virtual channel

FIGURE 291 The data hub dialog box — typical virtual job tab




See “Order of Calculation” (page 215).

82 Array: a sequence of memory locations used to store successive readings.


UM

-007

0-A

0

3. Work through screens 1 to 4, configuring the new virtual channel’s visibility, conditional test, dependancy test and alarms if you want.83

4. In screen 5:a) In the Type area, select Rolling or Fixed Store.b) In the Allowed Input area, you can specify that

the virtual channel is only updated with Realtime data, or with Logged data.

c) Click Next.5. In screen 6a that opens (Figure 294 on page 220),

specify the final details of the new store channel.The next table describes the items in screen 6a.

6. When you’re done in screen 6a, click Finish to complete the definition of the virtual channel.The new virtual channel appears on the Virtual.JOB1 tab of the data hub, and is available in the choice lists of the various functions and views of DeLogger Pro.

Store Channel FunctionsThe following functions are available for calculations in store channels:• Average — calculates the average value of the array• Maximum — calculates the maximum reading within

the array• Minimum — calculates the minimum reading within

the array• Average Deviation — calculates the average

deviation using the formula

• Standard Deviation (Sample) – calculates the standard deviation (based on a sample) using the formula

• Standard Deviation (Entire) — calculates the standard deviation (based on the entire population) using the formula

• Variance — calculates the variance using the formula

• 50th Percentile (median value) — returns the 50th percentile of values in a range. You can use this function to establish a threshold of acceptance (for

example, to examine values above the 50th percentile).

• 25th Percentile (first quartile) — returns the 25th percentile of values in a range. You can use this function to establish a threshold of acceptance (for example, to examine values above the 25th percentile).

83 You can change these later. This is covered in “Setting a Channel’s Properties in the Data Hub” on page 213.

1n--- x x–∑

n x2∑ x∑( )2

–

n n 1–( )---------------------------------------

n x2∑ x∑( )2

–

n2

---------------------------------------

n x2∑ x∑( )2

–

n n 1–( )---------------------------------------

Channel Label Type a unique name for the new virtual channel.

Base Channel Select the primary or virtual base channel from the drop-down list.

Rate Display field only. Shows the update rate of the virtual channel (duplicates the base channel’s rate).

Array Size Select the number of values to be stored for each calculation.

Exceedency Determines when the result of the virtual channel becomes invalid. It allows up to this number of entries to fail conditional and dependancy tests (the channel is flagged as PARTIALLY_INVALID), and switches into fully invalid mode when the threshold is reached (the channel is flagged as INVALID).Setting to 0 removes this check(= always valid).A rolling store channel is flagged as PARTIALLY_INVALID until the array is filled.

Type Select the type of calculation required:• average• maximum• minimum• SD — sample• SD — entire population• average deviation• variance• 25th percentile• 50th percentile (median)• 75th percentile

See “Store Channel Functions” below.Rolling Store Tick for a rolling store. Leave un-ticked

for a resetting store.Trigger/Synchronise every

Select the trigger interval in the Day/Hour/Minute/Second field and the number field.

Adv

ance

d Se

tting

s (b

utto

n) Failed Conditional allowed in Array

Choose base channel inclusion options (dialog box is shown in bottom-left of Figure 290)

Failed Dependancy allowed in ArrayPartially Invalid allowed in Array

Table: Store channel — items in screen 6a of Figure 294


UM

-007

0-A

0

• 75th Percentile (third quartile) — returns the 75th percentile of values in a range. You can use this function to establish a threshold of acceptance (for example, to examine values above the 75th percentile).

• 90th Percentile — returns the 90th percentile of values in a range. You can use this function to establish a threshold of acceptance (for example, to examine values above the 90th percentile).

• 95th Percentile — returns the 95th percentile of values in a range. You can use this function to establish a threshold of acceptance (for example, to examine values above the 95th percentile).

Calculated ChannelsA calculated channel is a virtual channel with its own spreadsheet that primary channels or other virtual channels are pasted into. You can define various calculations using these channels and specify a result cell.RECOMMENDATION Complex calculated channels can slow the DeLogger Pro down, so simple calculations should still be processed within the dataTaker.

Adding a Calculated ChannelTo add a calculated-type virtual channel:1. Choose Configuration menu > Data Hub Channels.2. In the dialog box that opens (Figure 288 on

page 211), click the Add Virtual button.DeLogger Pro presents you with the first screen of the sequence shown in Figures 293 and 294 (page 219).

3. Work through screens 1 to 4, configuring the new virtual channel’s visibility, conditional test, dependancy test and alarms if you want.84

4. In screen 5:a) In the Type area, select Calculated.b) In the Allowed Input area, you can specify that

the virtual channel is only updated with Realtime data, or with Logged data.

c) Click Next.5. In screen 6b that opens (Figure 294 on page 220),

do the following:a) In the Channel Label field, type a unique name

for the new virtual channel.b) Click in cell A1 to highlight the first row of the

spreadsheet, then click the Add Channel(s) button.

c) In the Select Channel(s) for Virtual dialog box that opens, select the channel(s) you want to use as the base channel(s) then click OK.You can select one or more channels from any source. That is, any channels that are currently in the data hub, including other virtual channels and channels from different dataTakers.To select a group of adjacent channels, click the first channel of the group and drag to the last channel or the group (or Shift-click the last channel). To select a group of non-adjacent channels, hold down the Ctrl key while you click the channels you want.

d) Click in cell D1 (or E1, F1, G1,…), then enter your calculation formula in the formula bar (Figure 292).Multiple steps for the calculation can use additional cells, with the result occurring in the last cell.

e) Type the reference to the result cell in the Result Cell Reference field.

f) Type units text in the Units fieldg) Tick Failed Conditional or Dependant Allowed in

Calculation if you want the channel’s value to be included in the calculation even if it has failed conditional or dependancy checks you may have applied (Screens 2 and 3 in Figure 293).Allowing failed values may distort the calculated channel’s result.

h) Tick Synchronised Update if you want DeLogger Pro to calculate and update the calculated channel only when all of the base channels used in its calculation have been updated. (You specified these channels in step 5.c) above.)When Synchronised Update is ticked and a calculated channel is called to update,

84 You can change these later. This is covered in “Setting a Channel’s Properties in the Data Hub” on page 213.

Formulabar

FIGURE 292 Screen 6b example


UM

-007

0-A

0

DeLogger Pro firstly checks in the data hub to see if any of its base channels have been updated. If so, it updates the base value(s), recalculates the spreadsheet, and takes the result for the calculated channel from the cell defined in the Result Cell Reference field (Figure 292).

6. When you’re done in screen 6b, click Finish to complete the definition of the virtual channel.The new virtual channel appears on the Virtual.JOB1 tab of the data hub, and is available in the choice lists of the various functions and views of DeLogger Pro.

Screen 1: Specify the new virtual channel’s visibility.

Screen 2: Define a conditional test for the new virtual channel’s data.See

Tells you that you’re creating a new virtual channel. (You name the channel on the last screen.)

Screen 3: Define a dependancy test (the virtual channel’s validity depends on another channel’s conditional test).

FIGURE 293 Data hub — adding a virtual channel (1 of 2)Continued in Figure 294 (screens 4, 5 and 6)




“Conditional Settings” on page 214.

See “Dependant Settings” on page 214.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Screen 4: Specify internal (DeLogger Pro) alarms for the new virtual channel.

Screen 5: Specify the new virtual channel’s type — rolling or calculated.

Screen 6a: Name the new store-type virtual channel and specify its settings.

Screen 6b: Name the new calculated-type virtual channel and specify its settings.

Screen 6awhen youclick Next

Screen 6bwhen youclick Next

FIGURE 294 Data hub — adding a virtual channel (2 of 2)

See “Store Channels” (page 216) and “Calculated Channels” (page 218).


See “Adding a Store Channel” (page 216).

See “Alarm Settings” on page 215.

See “Adding a Calculated Channel” (page 218).

From Fig. 293


UM

-007

0-A

0

9-2 REMOTE DATA SITES AND THE MODEM MANAGER

DeLogger Pro supports connection to remote dataTakers using PSTN, GSM, CDMA, radio and satellite telemetry systems, by means of appropriate modems at the host and remote locations.These connections are defined in the Connections > Properties > Modem dialog box (Figure 49 on page 46), and can use any modem that has been installed in your computer’s Start > Control Panel > Modems dialog box as the local modem. (There is no requirement to install the local modem into DeLogger Pro itself.)At the remote location, special attention is required when setting up the remote dataTaker and remote modem. This will vary for the different types of remote modems that are available for PSTN, GSM, CDMA, radio and satellite telemetry systems. The procedures to set up the remote site are detailed in your dataTaker’s user manual (available as PDF files from www.datataker.com).If the remote site involves a DT5/6xx dataTaker and dataTaker MM-01 Modem Manager, MM-1 Support must be ticked in Figure 49 (page 46) to instruct DeLogger Pro to use Modem Manager protocol when connecting to the site.Also be sure to enter any passwords that may be installed in the remote Modem Manager. To do this, click the Password button in Figure 49 and enter the details in the Security dialog box that opens (Figure 52).Installing and configuring the Modem Manager at the remote site is detailed in the Modem Manager User’s Manual.

CHAPTER 9: ADVANCED TOPICS 9-2 Remote Data Sites and the Modem Manager 221

UM

-007

0-A

0

9-3 DDE (DYNAMIC DATA EXCHANGE)Because DeLogger Pro supports DDE, other Windows programs can query and control various aspects of DeLogger Pro.For example, DeLogger Pro’s DDE mechanism allows the following to be implemented:• Other software can request a variety of housekeeping

information such as• lists of available sites• lists of connected data logger channels• lists of defined host PC actions.

• Other software can request data from connected dataTakers, from the data database, or from files.

• Commands can be sent from other software directly to any connected dataTaker.

• Host PC actions and individual macros can be run within DeLogger Pro.

• An advise loop85 can be set up for any channel in the data hub.

DDE ConceptsTo use DDE, you need to understand the concepts presented in this section. They are• server and client• conversation, service name, topic and item• message structure• the ChannelName item

Server and ClientDDE is a method of inter-process communication between various DDE-capable Windows programs. This inter-process communication can be, for example, the passing of data between processes, the passing of service requests between processes, or the synchronising of events.DDE uses shared memory to communicate between programs, and has a protocol to manage and synchronise the process.Some programs are providers of the data and information that is communicated by the DDE process, while other programs are users of the data and information communicated. Software that provides the data and information is termed a DDE Server, while an application that requests and receives the data and information is termed a DDE Client.

DeLogger Pro: DDE ServerDeLogger Pro is a DDE server, providing data and information in response to requests from DDE client software.When DeLogger Pro is serving, think of it as maintaining a set of post boxes for dataTaker data, where each box holds the latest value for each piece of data or information. Each value is available to any DDE client that requests it.As a DDE server, DeLogger Pro effectively becomes a conduit between the dataTakers that are connected to the computer, and software that can use the data coming from the dataTakers (such as spreadsheet, database, graphics and statistics packages).

For Example…DeLogger Pro can, for example, provide data from selected dataTaker channels to Microsoft Excel, where that data is automatically placed in an Excel cell and continuously automatically updated. Or Excel can send commands to the dataTaker, instructing DeLogger Pro to initiate various services such as transmitting supplied text strings to the dataTaker.

Possible Incomplete DataBe aware that a DDE client may not receive every data value that’s available from DeLogger Pro.This “underrun” situation occurs if the DDE client’s request rate is slower than the rate at which the data is available within DeLogger Pro.

DDE TerminologyThere are four terms you need to be familiar with in order to use DeLogger Pro’s DDE capability:• DDE conversation• DDE service name• DDE topic• DDE item

DDE ConversationA DDE conversation is the communication between a DDE client and a DDE server.The DDE client first requests a conversation with the DDE server, then requests various data and services from it. The DDE server in turn responds by sending data to the DDE client, or by executing procedures within itself.

85 Advise loop: the server (DeLogger) advises the client that the item of interest (channel) has updated; it’s then up to the client to request the data.


UM

-007

0-A

0

DDE Service Name, Topic and ItemDDE programs use a three-tiered identification structure to distinguish their conversations from others:• The highest tier in the hierarchy is the DDE service

name. The service name identifies the particular software to which the conversation is directed. DeLogger Pro uses the service name DELOGGER, which is registered with the DDE Management Library (DDEML) of Windows when DeLogger Pro starts.

• The second tier is the DDE topic, which broadly groups the DDE services available within an application. The DDE topics defined for DeLogger Pro are listed in the DDE Topics and Items table on page 224.

• The third tier is the DDE item, which defines the particular services available in each topic. The DDE items defined for the DeLogger Pro topics are also listed in the table below.

DDE Message StructureDDE conversations have the following general message structure:

Note the two important separators | and !:• The service name and topic are separated by a pipe

character |.• The topic and item are separated by an exclamation

character !.For example:

Spaces are not permitted within the message structure, unless within names bounded by single quote characters.

The ChannelName DDE ItemSeveral of the DeLogger Pro DDE topics listed in the DDE Topics and Items table below have ChannelName as a DDE item. This refers to data originating from dataTaker channels at the site, and the particular ChannelName is constructed using the following format:

Here are three examples:

ChannelName as defined by DeLogger Pro• is contained within single quotes• has a space character either side of the slash

characters ( / ) that separate the SiteName, ScheduleID and ChannelID.

Default dataTaker channel IDs (such as 5V or 7PT385) are used if no custom channel IDs (such as Boiler Pressure or AirTemp) are specified.This same data item naming structure is used within DeLogger Pro whenever lists of available channel data are displayed.

ServiceName|Topic!Item

DeLogger|Channel!'Local_1.Job1.A.5TK'

'Connection.Job.Schedule.Label'

'MyLogger.Job1.A.5TK'

'Local_600.Job1.B.AirTemp'

'Remote.Job1.C.RiverLevel'

CHAPTER 9: ADVANCED TOPICS 9-3 DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) 223

UM

-007

0-A

0

DeLogger Pro Topics and ItemsThe topics and items that are defined for DeLogger Pro are listed in the DDE Topics and Items table below.You can use these topics and items to communicate requests to DeLogger Pro from within any program that has DDE client capabilities. The user interface to the DDE capabilities is not the same in all DDE client software, so you’ll need to refer to the DDE client’s documentation to determine how to perform DDE conversations with DeLogger Pro. But in general terms, there will be modules or dialog boxes with names such as DDE In and DDE Out, and DDE Send and DDE Receive in which you specify the service name, topic and item of your conversations with DeLogger Pro.The XTYP_nnnnn commands or messages listed in the Action column of the DDE Topics and Items table are the actual low-level request messages made by the DDE client application to the Windows DDEML (Dynamic Data Exchange Management Library) that manages DE conversations. These details are provided for advanced users who intend to use VBasic, VBA, or C/C++ to create custom DDE client applications that communicate with DeLogger Pro.

DDE Between DeLogger Pro and Excel Microsoft Excel is a common DDE client you can use with DeLogger Pro. But because Excel does not have a full high-level user interface for DDE conversations, you’ll need to develop appropriate macros in VBA86 to perform DDE tasks. The VBA macro language in Excel has a number of DDE functions or methods that can be used with the topics and items listed in the table on page 224.

Delogger2 Macro FilesThe files Delogger2.xlm and Delogger2.xla (located in the Excel folder in the DeLogger installation folder — see Figure 7) provide an example of programming DDE conversations between DeLogger Pro and Microsoft Excel:• You can open the Delogger2.xlm macro sheet in

Excel, then use the Excel Tools menu > Macro > Macros command to access the VBA macros that provide the DDE functionality.Delogger2.xlm could be used as the basis for developing more advanced DDE applications.

• Delogger2.xla is the Delogger2.xlm macro file compiled to an add-in, which you can permanently add into Excel using Tools > Add-Ins.The functionality of the macros is available, but the actual macro scripts are not.

When Delogger2 is loaded into Excel, either as the macro sheet Delogger2.xlm or the add-in

Topic Item Description ActionChannel ChannelName Request a latest data value for the named channel. XTYP_REQUEST

XTYP_ADVREQSystem Site

ChannelAction

Request a list of sites available.Request a list of channels available.Request a list of host PC actions available.Supported:SZDDESYS_ITEM_TOPICSSZDDESYS_ITEM_FORMATSSZDDESYS_ITEM_HELPSZDDESYS_ITEM_STATUSNot supported:SZDDESYS_ITEM_ITEMLIST

XTYP_REQUESTXTYP_ADVREQ

SiteName Send the text contained within a DDE data block to the named site. XTYP_POKEChannel ChannelName Add the named channel to the advise list. XTYP_ADVSTARTChannel ChannelName Remove the named channel from the advise list. XTYP_ADVSTOPAction Execute the host PC action named in a DDE data block. XTYP_EXECUTE

86 VBA: Visual Basic for Applications


UM

-007

0-A

0

Delogger2.xla, a DeLogger menu appears in the Excel main menu bar (Figure 295). The commands on the DeLogger menu call into VBA scripts that perform the tasks.

Excel ProceduresThe following procedures87 assume you’re using Microsoft Excel 97 (SR2) or later.

➲ To insert an updating dataTaker channel into an Excel worksheet cell:1. Start DeLogger Pro, connect to a dataTaker, and

ensure that data is returning from the channels into DeLogger Pro.

2. Start Excel, then either• open the DeLogger2.xlm macro file, or• ensure that Delogger2.xla is included as an

add-in. (See “Delogger2 Macro Files” on page 224.)

Enable Macros if prompted to do so.A DeLogger menu appears in the Excel main menu bar.

3. In a new or an existing Excel worksheet:a) Select the cell that you want to paste the

DeLogger Pro channel item into.b) From the Excel DeLogger menu, choose

PasteChannel.After a brief pause for Excel to establish a DDE conversation with DeLogger Pro, Excel opens a dialog box displaying a list of available data channels.

4. From the list of available channels, select the one88 you want to insert, then click OK.The channel’s label is pasted into the selected cell on the worksheet, and its value is pasted into the adjacent cell. Now whenever the value changes in DeLogger Pro, it is simultaneously updated in the Excel cell.

➲ To view the source of Delogger2.xlm:1. Make a copy of Delogger2.xlm and name it

Delogger2.bak.2. Start Excel and open Delogger2.xlm.3. Enable Macros if prompted to do so.4. Choose Tools > Macro > Visual Basic Editor.5. Choose Delogger2.xlm from the project pane.6. Select Module1 in the Modules folder under

Delogger2.xlm.A window opens containing the VBA text of the program.

7. Inspect the VBA program.You may edit the program here if required.

➲ To manually insert an updating channel into a worksheet cell:You can manually define a DDE data channel link to DeLogger Pro in Excel worksheet cells. This does not require Delogger2 to be loaded into Excel.1. Start Excel and ensure a worksheet is showing.2. Select a cell on the worksheet and enter DDE link

text into the formula bar above the worksheet. The general format is

The link text is case sensitive, and your channel’s ChannelName must be enclosed in single quotes and typed exactly as specified in DeLogger Pro. For example:

3. Repeat to add more data channel links into the Excel worksheet.

87 DDE is active by default. You don’t need to enable it anywhere within DeLogger.

Paste DeLogger Pro channel data links into worksheet cells.Run DeLogger Pro host PC actions.Send text (commands) to the dataTaker connected to DeLogger Pro.Open a dialog box containing a list of the topics supported by DeLogger Pro.

FIGURE 295 The Excel DeLogger menu

88 You can select multiple channels from the list of available channels by clicking and dragging down the list, or by shift-clicking. Multiple channels are pasted into successive cells below the selected cell on the worksheet.

=DELOGGER|Channel!'ChannelName'

=DELOGGER|Channel!'LOCAL600.Job1.A.1V'

CHAPTER 9: ADVANCED TOPICS 9-3 DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) 225

UM

-007

0-A

0

9-4 DATABASES

Database DelicaciesHere are some useful facts about DeLogger databases:

How Many, What, Where?DeLogger requires two working (“current”) databases; an administration database and a data database. (Their functions are listed in “What’s Stored Where” on page 209.)When you install DeLogger, a default FoxPro administration database and a default FoxPro data database are placed in DeLogger’s default database location (the Data folder inside DeLogger’s installation folder — see Figure 7), for use with all of your projects. But, if you want, you can• change the type of one or both databases (for

example, you can use Access instead of FoxPro)• change the location of one or both databases• use different databases for different projects.

These matters are discussed later in this section.In addition, DeLogger Pro has four more data databases89 that are provided to simplify your database management. Here’s a summary of DeLogger Pro’s default databases:

Global or Project-Specific?The actual admin database and data database used by each project is specified in the project’s .dlw file (see “.dlw File” on page 22) and are therefore “project-specific”. But, because many users stay with DeLogger’s default databases for all of their projects, these databases are effectively “global”.

Separate DeLogger InstancesIf a database is a client/server type, you can use multiple projects on separate DeLogger instances.

DeLogger’s Default DatabasesDeLogger uses two databases to store data and other information; an administration database and a data database. Both of these are FoxPro format and are located in the …/DeLogger/Data folder.

ODBCThe databases are referenced through ODBC drivers with the default names• Site7 for the administration database• Site7d1 for the data database.

The ODBC data source names (DSNs) are installed as System DSN, which allows to them to be used by any user on the computer.

Default LocationsThe locations of the default FoxPro databases are• …\DeLogger\Data\Admin\site7.dbc• …\DeLogger\Data\Data\site7d1.dbc

See Figure 7.

Clean Data DatabaseThere is also an empty copy of the data database in the …\DeLogger\Data\Clean folder. You can copy this group of files to a new folder and set it up as an alternative data database. Make sure that the original folder is not modified because it’s used by the SiteAdmin utility when doing data database archiving and cleaning.

Additional DatabasesAlthough the default DSN is set up at a global level and DeLogger uses them by default, each DeLogger project can override the default and use any other defined DSN. This means, for example, that you can have a data database and an admin database for each project, if you define multiple databases and DSNs.

Data Database SchemaThe data database schema historically consists of three tables:• data_header — holds information about the session• data_details — holds channel details• data_data — holds the data values and times

The data_data table will grow the most and this is the table to reference when writing reports or extracting data.

89 They are named Archive 1, Archive 2, Archive 3 and Historical 1 for “historical reasons”. In practice, simply consider them as four data databases that you can use as archive destinations for your working data database.

Working (“current”) databases

Administration database Stores admin information

Data database Store dataArchive databases

Archive 1Archive 2Archive 3Historical 1


UM

-007

0-A

0

Database Size and Performance IssuesWriting to relational databases is always going to be slower than writing to a flat file because entries need to be indexed and attached to linked lists. However, some databases (mainly mainstream client/server) are faster than others and many can be tuned for performance.If a lot of database logging is anticipated (with large size or high speed) it’s worth planning an alternative data database option:• For both speed (DT800 throughput) and size

(>250MB), a client/server implementation is recommended. The most highly-recommended database is Microsoft SQL Server™ 2000 because it’s one of the fastest and most flexible.

• A cheaper solution is to use Linux and Postgres (or MySQL) as the OS and server software can be freely downloaded. They are secure and reliable systems used and proved by many major companies, and they are supported by the open software model.

Administration DatabaseThe admin database requires little maintenance other than periodically clearing down the log files. This is done from the SiteAdmin utility. The main log files to watch are the error_log and the alarm_log. The latest version of DeLogger allows the error and alarm logs to be cleared from the event logs window (alarm is protected by a registry entry).

Data DatabaseThe data database requires maintenance when used, because it can quickly grow in size and start to cause performance issues. As a rule of thumb, it should not be allowed to grow beyond 250MB. One of the main reasons for this is that FoxPro is a direct file access database and the ODBC driver constructs a database cursor in the temporary directory that is equal to a snapshot of the database. This means that if the data database is 250MB in size, the ODBC driver also constructs a 250MB temporary file in the TEMP directory. If it is anticipated that large databases (>250MB) will be used then a change to a client/server database is recommended.

Alternative DatabasesWe recommend that the administration database be left as the default FoxPro type, unless shared access is required, because administration tools are provided for this type.The setting-up of a new administration database is the same as for the data type described below.The currently-supported alternative databases are• File-Based

• Access 2000 (not recommended for large databases)

• Client/Server• Microsoft SQLServer (6.5/7/2000) — tested on

Windows 2000 Advanced Server and Windows NT® Server

• MySQL — tested on Windows 2000 Professional, Windows 2000 Advanced Server and Red Hat Linux 6.2

• PostGres — tested on Red Hat Linux 6.2 Schemata for these alternatives are available from www.datataker.com. The recommended types are• Microsoft SQL 2000 for the Microsoft Windows

platform• PostGres for the Linux platform• MySQL for Windows and Linux platforms.

The Linux alternative has been certified with Red Hat 6.2 and PostGres 7.1.1 although no problems are expected from different versions of Linux or PostGres. Both Linux and PostGres are freely-downloadable and are royalty-free.

Setting Up an Alternative DatabaseSetting up a database server is not a trivial task and is beyond the scope of this manual. It is expected that most organisations will have an IT section capable of setting up and maintaining databases. If you require further information or help on the subject, please contact your dataTaker representative.Once the alternative database server is set up and working a new System DSN should be defined from the ODBC Data Source Administrator to allow DeLogger access. It is recommended that a new System DSN be used to allow a fallback situation if the server is unavailable at startup time (DeLogger will notify and prompt in this situation). Once a new System DSN is defined and the connection tested via the ODBC Data Source Administrator, the DeLogger project can be set to use the new database connection.To do this, open the File menu > Project Properties dialog box (Figure 18 on page 23) and select the new DSN in

CHAPTER 9: ADVANCED TOPICS 9-4 Databases 227

UM

-007

0-A

0

the Channel Data Database Data Source Name (DSN) list, then close the dialog box and the project. The new DSN will be used the next time you open that project.Delogger does not provide any administration tools for these alternative databases because it’s assumed that there will be database administrators maintaining the server(s).


UM

-007

0-A

0

9-5 DELOGGER PRO WEB PUBLISHING

DeLogger Pro can create HTML (browser) versions of the following data views:• form windows• chart windows• mimic windows• spreadsheet window charts• analysis window charts

DeLogger Pro publishes these .htm files (and associated .jpg graphics files) in a prescribed structure to the Publish folder in DeLogger’s installation folder (Figure 297). The files can then be made available to a connected intranet90 and viewed using a browser. This is explained in “Intranet (Local) Publishing” on page 230.In addition, DeLogger Pro can use FTP to copy these published files over a local network or dial-up connection to another web server (on the Internet, or on another intranet, for example.) This is explained in “Internet (WWW) Publishing” on page 231.

Manual and Automatic Web PublishingWhen you enable intranet publishing (described in “Configuration > Web Publish” on page 58), manual triggering of the publishing operation is also enabled. That is, publishing occurs whenever you choose the view’s Publish command (or click the button on its toolbar).In addition, you can enable automatic publishing, which triggers publishing whenever the view updates by receiving new data. You activate this function separately for each window by ticking Publish on Update in each window’s Properties dialog box. See• “Form > Properties” on page 84• “Chart > Properties” on page 90• “Mimic > Properties” on page 103• “Spread > Properties” on page 114• “Analysis > Properties” on page 123.

Home Page and Documents PageYou may freely modify the home page index.htm (Figure 296) to suit your company’s requirements. However, we recommend that you always keep the Documents link (to documents.htm located in …\DeLogger\Publish\html) because you’ll use it often.

Home page index.htm(in …\DeLogger\Publish)

Documents link(to documents.htm)

Documents page documents.htm(in …\DeLogger\Publish\html)

List of published documents

FIGURE 296 Default published web pages

90 Intranet: a private, network-based collection of web servers and websites, usually located within one company or organization.

CHAPTER 9: ADVANCED TOPICS 9-5 DeLogger Pro Web Publishing 229

UM

-007

0-A

0

(The documents.htm file always contains an up-to-date list of published documents, because DeLogger Pro re-creates documents.htm from the contents of the …\DeLogger\Publish\html folder every time a view is published or re-published.)You may also alter the appearance of the documents page (documents.htm, Figure 296). To do this, you alter the template file (also called documents.htm) located in …\DeLogger\templates91. This template file is read each time the working copy of documents.htm is re-created.See also “Personalizing the Data Site” on page 232.

Changing the Default Web Publishing LocationsYou can change the location of DeLogger Pro’s default web publishing folders.You carry out this re-direction by using Windows Regedit.exe to modify the following registry keys:• HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Discbell\DeLogger\

Default\PublishDir(default key value data is PUBLISH)

• HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Discbell\DeLogger\ Default\PublishDocumentsFolder(default key value data is html)

Of course, unless you’re an experienced Microsoft Windows user, we recommend that you do not do this.IMPORTANT For web publishing to work, the new location must contain the same directory structure as the original location — in other words, copy the folder structure to the new location.

Publishing QualityThe quality (and corresponding size) of any required graphics files produced during the creation of web pages is controlled by the JPEG picture quality setting in Figure 62 (page 58).

Intranet (Local) Publishing When enabled for intranet web publishing, DeLogger Pro saves published HTML pages and associated graphics files in a fixed directory structure in the main DeLogger installation folder (the default is …\DeLogger\Publish).To configure DeLogger Pro for intranet publishing, open the Configuration menu > Web Publish dialog box (Figure 62 on page 58) and tick Publish to Intranet (Local). Then when you click Accept and Close the dialog box, a manual Publish command and toolbar button become available for the appropriate windows. Use these to publish HTML versions of the views, or enable automatic web publishing — see “Manual and Automatic Web Publishing” on page 229.If you open the file …\Publish\index.htm (in DeLogger’s installation folder) in a browser92 and click the Documents link, you’ll have access to the published DeLogger Pro views in the browser.

91 But don’t remove the %% placeholders: these are substituted by DeLogger Pro when it creates the document listings.


Publish must contain index.htm, the default site entry page (home page).

Templates must contain documents.htm (the documents template) and multidoc.htm (the views template).

Publish\html must contain documents.htm, DeLogger Pro’s generated documents list (documents page).

Contain DeLogger Pro generated files

Contains graphics files

FIGURE 297 Required folder structure for web publishing

92 Internet Explorer 5.5 or later is preferred.


UM

-007

0-A

0

Internet (WWW) Publishing Besides publishing to a local folder, DeLogger Pro can also copy the published files to another server by means of FTP93 transfer. This means you can publish the updating DeLogger Pro HTML files to a local (corporate) web server or to a remote (internet) web server, and the publishing link can include a local network and/or a dial-up connection.For slower links, you can reduce the size (and therefore the quality) of generated images. See the JPEG Picture Quality field in Figure 62 (page 58).DeLogger Pro automatically establishes the connection using the User Name, Password and Initial Directory specified in the Web Publish dialog box (Figure 62 on page 58).Activating Internet publishing is a two-step process:1. Configure DeLogger Pro by opening the

Configuration menu > Web Publish dialog box (Figure 62 on page 58). In the dialog box• tick both Publish to Intranet (Local) and Publish to

Internet (WWW)• type the destination URL, User Name, Password

and directory • click the Accept button then the Close button.

A manual Publish command and toolbar button become available in the form, chart, mimic, spread and analysis windows. You can also enable automatic web publishing — see “Manual and Automatic Web Publishing” on page 229.

2. Enable Internet publishing separately for each view you want to publish. Do this by opening the individual window’s Properties dialog box and ticking Publish to Internet. See• “Form > Properties” on page 84• “Chart > Properties” on page 90• “Mimic > Properties” on page 103• “Spread > Properties” on page 114• “Analysis > Properties” on page 123.

Dial-Up ConnectionIf a dial-up connection is part of the FTP file link, DeLogger Pro uses the source computer’s default Windows Dial-Up Networking connection. This is set on the Connections tab of Windows Start menu > Settings > Control Panel > Internet Options/Properties dialog box (Figure 298).

Required Folder Structure for Web PublishingFigure 297 shows the necessary structure and contents of the Publish folder and the Templates folder in DeLogger’s installation directory.

AlternativesThere are many other ways to transfer the contents of the data site to a local or remote web server, including• scripting FTP commands and scheduling a batch file • using the existing directory structure as a virtual

directory from the web server (both IIS and Apache allow this).

93 File Transfer Protocol: a set of rules used for copying files between computers on an intranet or on the Internet.

The source computer’s default dial-up connection.

FIGURE 298 DeLogger Pro uses the computer’s default dial-up connection for FTP transfer of published files.

CHAPTER 9: ADVANCED TOPICS 9-5 DeLogger Pro Web Publishing 231

UM

-007

0-A

0

Publishing FrequencyTo protect against overload and to minimise dial-up connection times, DeLogger Pro’s frequency of publishing is separate from its frequency of view update.Here’s the sequence:1. A DeLogger Pro view publish request is accepted

and queued. 2. If the view publish timer is not active it is started.3. If the timer has expired, the queued list is examined

and any duplicate requests removed.4. A publish action is run. At its completion, a

documents list update request is queued.5. If Publish to Internet (WWW) is ticked in the

Configuration menu > Web Publish dialog box (Figure 62) and Publish to Internet is ticked in the view’s Properties dialog box, the document is added to the FTP list.

6. If the FTP timer is not running it is started.7. When the FTP timer expires, the queue is examined

and duplicate entries removed.8. The FTP session is initiated and the files transferred.9. The FTP disconnect timer is started.10. The FTP session stays open for a pre-determined

time and any more requests for transfer are handled immediately.

11. When the FTP session disconnect timer expires, the session is closed.

See “FTP Delays” on page 58.

Publishing ReportsYou can configure DeLogger Pro to publish reports in HTML (browser) format.To do this:1. Write or obtain the .rpt report file you want to

publish, and put it into the …\DeLogger\Reports folder.See “DIY Installed Reports” on page 202.

2. Create a secondary report based on the report file.See “Configuration > Reports” on page 57.

3. Create an action to run the secondary report, making sure that Export HTML is selected (Figure 58).See “Configuration > Actions” on page 55.

4. Run the action.DeLogger Pro places the resulting .htm file in the …\DeLogger\Publish\html\Reports folder.

RECOMMENDATION Unlike intranet and Internet publishing, report publishing does not trigger re-creation of the list of published documents (the documents.htm file — see “Home Page and Documents Page” on page 229). Therefore we recommend that you configure a window for publishing and thereby force updating of the list of published documents so that it contains the report name. (You can simply chain an action that contains a PUBLISH(" WindowName.ext ") macro to the action created in step 3. above.)

Personalizing the Data SiteYou can do any or all of the following to personalize the published HTML pages:• Modify the index.htm file — see Figure 297. (But

don’t remove the link to documents.htm.)• Modify the template file …\DeLogger\templates\

documents.htm. (But don’t remove the %% placeholders: these are substituted by DeLogger Pro when it creates the document listings.)

• Modify the …\DeLogger\templates\multidoc.htm file. (But don’t remove the %%InsertSRC placeholder: DeLogger Pro substitutes this with HTML code and images.)

• Add any other HTML pages required.


UM

-007

0-A

0

9-6 DELOGGER OPC SERVEROPC (OLE for Process Control) was developed to provide a standard interface to facilitate the development of servers and clients by multiple vendors that would operate together seamlessly. DeLogger supports Version 1 of the specification, which is suitable for most cases of data retrieval.DeLogger has been developed to support OPC as a data server allowing any OPC client access to realtime or logged data from its DT5/6xx dataTakers.

DeLogger OPC ArchitectureThe OPC implementation for DeLogger is shown in Figure 299.

The DeLogger OPC Server need not be running on the same machine as the DeLogger application process but consideration should be given to performance if it is to be located across a slower link (that is, a WAN). However, we recommend that the DeLogger OPC Server is configured to run on the same machine as DeLogger as this will give the best performance.DeLogger will install all the required components on the server machine but some manual setup is still required. (Note that there are differences between operating systems, so some options may be on different dialog boxes.)

Setting Up DeLogger OPC Server on a Win2000 WorkstationTo set up the DeLogger OPC Server on a Win2000 workstation:1. Run the program executable

OPC_DA20_Components.exe located in the …/DeLogger/opc server folder.

2. Ensure the Automation Interface is registered with the system by typing regsvr32.exe OPCProxy.dll from a command window.

3. Ensure the DeLogger OPC server DLL is registered with the system by typing regsvr32.exe deLoggerOPCServer.dll from a command window.

4. Run dcomcnfg.exe from Start menu > Run and do the following:a) Ensure Enable Distributed COM on this computer is

checked or selected.b) Select deLogger OPC Server and check that the

default properties conform to your company’s security measures.

c) Close dcomcnfg.exe.5. Run the client application and check that DeLogger

OPC Server is accessible.

Setting Up Client Access on a Separate Win2000 WorkstationTo set up client access on a separate Win2000 workstation:1. Run the program executable

OPC_DA20_Components.exe located in the …/DeLogger/opc server folder.

2. Copy the file deLoggerOPCServer.dll from the server machine and register it with the system by typing regsvr32.exe deLoggerOPCServer.dll from a command window.

3. Run dcomcnfg.exe from Start menu > Run and do the following:a) Ensure Enable Distributed COM on this computer is

checked or selected.b) Select deLogger OPC Server and check that the

default properties conform to your company’s security measures.

c) From the Location tab, select Run application on the following computer and choose the computer where the DeLogger OPC server is located.

d) Close dcomcnfg.exe.

DeLogger CustomInterface

DeLoggerOPC Server

OPC Data AccessAutomationInterface

OPC Client

DeLogger

dataTakers

FIGURE 299 DeLogger OPC architecture

CHAPTER 9: ADVANCED TOPICS 9-6 DeLogger OPC Server 233

UM

-007

0-A

0

You should now be able to start up your OPC client software and connect through to DeLogger using the OPC interface. If DeLogger is not running, it should start up automatically when selected as a server from OPC client software.The DeLogger OPC Server is distributed as a DLL. So, if the OPC client software is running on a separate computer, DeLoggerOPCServer.dll should be run by the surrogate process DLLHOST.EXE, which should be found in the Windows/system(32) folder. To set this up, add a new String Value in the registry using regedit.exe.The details of the key are:• Key: HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\AppID\{764EA6DE-8DF8-

11D2-AC14-00A024A242A2}• New String Value: DllSurrogate• Value of: C:\WINNT\system32\dllhost.exe or

wherever your dllhost.exe is located.This ensures that the DeLogger OPC Server runs in its own surrogate process, which improves performance when operating across a network.


UM

-007

0-A

0

9-7 INSTALLING DELOGGER4 ON WINDOWS NT, 2000 AND XP (IUSER)

The multi-user Windows NT, 2000 and XP operating systems require special consideration when installing applications software for multiple users. These platforms are usually set up with an Administrator who has full privileges and file access, and one or more Users who have limited privileges and file access. The various privileges and file access rights are managed by the security elements of these operating systems.Installation of DeLogger4 onto Windows NT, 2000 or XP operating systems involves• installation of the various folders and files for the

DeLogger4 application• updating of some of the Windows system files (in

C:\Windows\System32) for earlier versions of the Windows platforms

• adding new entries and changing entries in the Windows registry.

The Administrator has all of the rights to make these changes, but a User does not. A User cannot successfully install DeLogger4 onto any of these operating systems.

Who This Procedure is ForIf you are installing DeLogger4 onto Windows NT, 2000 or XP operating systems where• the operating system does not have separate

Administrator and User groups set up (that is, everyone is an Administrator, which is usually indicated by there being no logon dialog during startup)

• you will be using DeLogger4 only while logged on as the Administrator

• others will be using DeLogger4 only while logged on as the Administrator

then the procedures described below do not apply to you. In these cases, simply start Windows in the usual way and proceed to install and use DeLogger4.However, if your installation of Windows is setup by an Administrator for one of more Users, you will need to proceed as described below when installing DeLogger4.

Access Rights to WindowsIt is not recommended that the Administrator installs DeLogger4 onto Windows NT, 2000 or XP for a User; rather that the User installs DeLogger4. However, a User must have appropriate rights to install DeLogger4 onto Windows NT, 2000 or XP. Although a User can be given Administrator rights for this purpose,

we recommend that the User be given Power User rights (one level down from Administrator rights), which allow the User to modify the computer setup and install programs including system files, but not to access files that belong to other users.A User is given Power User rights by adding this User to the pre-defined Power Users group that is available on Windows NT/2000/XP platforms for this very purpose.This is explained below for the three operating systems.

Windows NT1. Have the Administrator restart Windows NT and log

on as the Administrator (may require a password).Now increase the User’s access rights to Power User as follows:2. Click Start > Programs > Administrative Tools

(Common) > User Manager.The User Manager dialog box opens.

3. Select Administrators and click Add to add a user to the Administrator group.

4. Select the Domain name for the local computer.5. Select the User name to upgrade and click Add to

add it to the Administrator group.6. Click OK to save the new setting, and click OK to

close the successive dialog boxes.7. Re-start Windows and login as the User who now

has the Power User access rights, and proceed to install DeLogger4.

After installation of DeLogger4, these Power User rights can be reduced again if desired.

Windows 20001. Have the Administrator restart Windows 2000 and

log on as the Administrator (may require a password).

Now increase the User’s access rights to Power User as follows:2. Click Start > Settings > Control Panel to open the

Control Panel folder, then double-click Users and Passwords.

3. Select the User Name of the User to be upgraded.4. Click Properties.5. Click the Group Membership tab.

CHAPTER 9: ADVANCED TOPICS 9-7 Installing DeLogger4 on Windows NT, 2000 and XP (iUser) 235

UM

-007

0-A

0

6. Select either• Standard User (Power Users Group), or• Other then select Power Users from the drop-

down list.7. Click OK to save the new setting, and click OK to

close the successive dialog boxes.8. Re-start Windows and login as the User who now

has the Power User access rights, and proceed to install DeLogger4.

After installation of DeLogger4, these Power User rights can be reduced again if desired.

Windows XP1. Have the Administrator restart Windows XP and log

on as the Administrator (may require a password).Now increase the User’s access rights to Power User as follows:2. Click Start > Control Panel to open the Control Panel

folder, then double-click User Accounts.3. Proceed as for Windows 2000 (above).

Note that you do not require Administrator or Power User rights to run DeLogger4, although there are other issues as discussed below.

Configuring the Windows RegistryDeLogger4 maintains various key information in the Windows system registry. The registry entries required to run DeLogger4 are kept in the HKEY_LOCAL_USER hive. Each User who has a unique login to the Windows operating system will have their own entry in this section of the registry. This is because the HKEY_LOCAL_USER is an internal mapping to one of the entries in the HKEY_USERS hive. Therefore, the User who logged in and installed DeLogger4 will have the DeLogger entries set up in their HKEY_LOCAL_USER hive.As a consequence, other Users cannot run DeLogger4 when they login under their own User name, since they do not have any entries for DeLogger4 in their HKEY_CURRENT_USER hive.This is the main reason why DeLogger4 should not be installed for other users by an Administrator, who is not going to use DeLogger4.To overcome the somewhat unusual situation where more than one unique login User wants to run a single installation of DeLogger4 on the same computer, DeLogger4 does the following:• During installation, the DeLogger4 installation

program writes a file named install.reg to the

…\DeLogger\User folder, which contains a copy of the DeLogger4 keys from the installing User’s HKEY_CURRENT_USER hive.

• DeLogger4 has a utility named iUser setup in the …\DeLogger\iUser folder, which you run when a different User has logged in. This will add the required DeLogger keys to the new User’s registry. The iUser Setup utility will also set up the ODBC DSN entries for the new User.

The overall installation and use scenario then becomes:1. User A, with Power User privileges, installs

DeLogger4 into, say, the C:\Program Files\DeLogger folder.

2. User A can run DeLogger4.3. User B, who only has normal User privileges, logs

on to Windows but cannot run DeLogger.4. User B runs C:\Program Files\DeLogger\iUser\

setup.exe, which adds the DeLogger keys to User B’s HKEY_LOCAL_USER hive.

5. User B can now run DeLogger.User B can either be an existing User, or can be a new User added to the platform since the installation of DeLogger4.There will still be issues with ownership of files and access to files, and so User A and User B should essentially maintain their own set of data files.If the privileges for User B (probably Users group) don’t allow access to the DeLogger directory owned by User A, then DeLogger will not run. This should not be a problem, but may require the directory where DeLogger was installed to be set to full access for User B either as an individual or via any group that User B belongs to.

iUser Setup UpgradeIMPORTANT The iUser setup utility shipped with DeLogger4 Version 4V2R10 has a problem setting the ODBC database DSN paths.A later version of the utility is available from www.dataTaker.com and should be downloaded, copied into the …\DeLogger\iUser folder of your installation of DeLogger and unzipped, if you wish to install provision for multiple users in DeLogger4.


UM

-007

0-A

0

9-8 DELOGGER MESSAGINGDeLogger can forward incoming dataTaker alarms to the default mail system. It utilises MAPI, so the workstation must be correctly set up and configured to send e-mail using MAPI. DeLogger has been developed and tested using Outlook 2000 as the mail client, although any MAPI-compliant client can be used. Please ensure that mail can be sent from the workstation before setting-up Delogger mail handling.Although the current implementation requires manual set up, it is expected that in future versions this will be automated and user-friendly interfaces provided.When DeLogger messaging support is enabled, alarms received by DeLogger are passed on to the message handler process, which checks to see if it is to be forwarded to the mail sub-system (using MAPI). The check is made by reading the messaging.csv file and looking for relevant matching entries. If a matching entry is found, the alarm is forwarded according to the values of that entry. The message subject is set within the registry and the message body is the text of the alarm. By using dataTaker embedded channel readings, a full definition of the alarm can be provided. (Value and Time of Value can be inserted into the alarm by the dataTaker).The messaging process is started automatically by DeLogger (using an OLE interface) when it first needs to pass an alarm for checking. If the logon to the mail service is not automatic, a dialog box asks you to log on to the mail system with a chosen profile. This happens each time it is first started up.DeLogger also processes the alarm internally and actions any defined responses.Multiple entries can be defined for the same site/alarm so that different recipients can be selected. You can also use a group e-mail address for wider distribution.The mail system can be set up to use an internal or external mail server (MS Exchange, POP3 server, IMAP server), which is accessed directly or by dial-up. These all need to be set up within the OS prior to using the DeLogger mail handler.

Enabling Alarm Mail SupportRun the registry editor (regedit.exe) and modify the following keys to have a value of 1:• HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Discbell\DeLogger

\Message\MailAlarmEnabled• HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Discbell\DeLogger

\Message\MailHandlerEnabledRestart DeLogger to enable the above changes.

Defining Alarm Routing The details are held in a file called messaging.csv located in the …/DeLogger/messaging folder. Its format is

To add an entry, edit the file and enter the relevant details.■ Example:

Be careful with the syntax because DeLogger is sensitive to small errors in the file.Modification of this file will be done automatically in future versions by means of user-friendly dialog boxes.

Message HandlerThe handler has two display views: the left one shows messages awaiting processing, and the right one displays those messages processed along with further details. It is started automatically be DeLogger when needed, or can be started manually by a script or from Explorer.It is intended that this handler will be improved to allow the setting-up of the alarm routing and to handle SMS.

TroubleshootingThe first check is always to see if the mail client on the workstation can send e-mail to the addresses defined in the messaging.csv file.Check that the DeLogger mail handler is enabled in the Windows registry.Check that the DeLogger mail handler OLE interface is registered by running the DLPMessageHandler.exe file.Check that the entries in messaging.csv are valid for the incoming alarm.

" Type "," SubType "," Site "," F1"," F2"," F3"," F4"," F5"," F6"," F7"," F8"," F9"

where Type is M for mail

SubType is 0

Site is the site name generating the alarm messages (case-sensitive)

F1 is the text field used as the To: mail header

F2 is the e-mail address that this entry’s details references

F3 is the text field used as the SubjectF4 is a list of comma-separated alarm

numbers; ensure that the last entry has a trailing comma

F5 is valid hours — not currently usedF6 … F9 NA

"M","0","MySite","DeLogger","[email protected]","DeLogger Reported Alarm","1,2,3,4,5,","0-24",,,,

CHAPTER 9: ADVANCED TOPICS 9-8 DeLogger Messaging 237

UM

-007

0-A

0

PART CAppendixesPART C contains useful reference information:• Appendix 1: “Keyboard Shortcuts” begins on

page 239.• Appendix 2: “Worksheet Functions” begins on

page 240.


238 User’s Manual — DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro PART C: Appendixes

UM

-007

0-A

0

APPENDIX 1Keyboard Shortcuts

Menu-Specific Shortcuts General ShortcutsMenu Command ShortcutFile New Ctrl+N

Open Ctrl+OSave Project Ctrl+SPrint Ctrl+PPrint Preview Ctrl+Alt+P

Edit Undo Ctrl+ZRedo Ctrl+YCut Ctrl+XCopy Ctrl+CPaste Ctrl+VPaste Values Ctrl+Alt+VDelete Ctrl+KCopy Down Ctrl+DCopy Right Ctrl+RFind Alt+F3Find (text entry screen) Ctrl+FReplace (text entry screen) Ctrl+HGo To Matching Brace Ctrl+BSelect All Ctrl+A

dataTaker Data Logging Ctrl+Alt+GUnload Ctrl+Alt+UQuit Unload Ctrl+Alt+QRun Ctrl+Alt+RHalt Ctrl+Alt+H

Form Publish Alt+PChart Publish Alt+PText > Entry Screen Command Edit Mode Ctrl+Alt+E

Send Line Ctrl+Alt+LSend Program Ctrl+Alt+AGo To Matching Brace Ctrl+B

Mimic Publish Alt+PSpread Load Session From File Alt+F

Publish Alt+PAnalysis Load Session From

DatabaseAlt+D

Load Session From File Alt+FPublish Alt+P

Program DT5/6xx (.dlp)

Send To Connection Ctrl+Alt+A

Program DT8xx (.dl8)

Send To Connection Ctrl+Alt+ASend To Connection And Save As RESET Job

Ctrl+Alt+O

Action ShortcutOpen the Connections dialog box. F2Open the Data Hub Channels dialog box. F5Capture the current DeLogger screen as a JPEG (.jpg) file — automatically saved in DeLogger’s Grab folder and named with the date and time of capture. See Figure 7 on page 18.

Shift+F12

Full screen (maximizes DeLogger’s main window)

Ctrl+Shift+L

Return from full screen (restores DeLogger’s main window size)

Ctrl+Shift+F

Toggle the display of the current window’s border — the window cannot be moved, resized or minimized.

Ctrl+Shift+B

APPENDIX 1 KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS 239

UM

-007

0-A

0

APPENDIX 2Worksheet FunctionsYou can use the functions listed below in DeLogger• form window worksheets (page 136)• spreadsheet window worksheets (page 150)• analysis window worksheets (page 162)• Formula One Workbook Designer worksheets

(page 138).These DeLogger worksheet functions are similar to those supported by other spreadsheet software such as Microsoft Excel.

ABSReturns the absolute value of a number.Syntax:

An absolute value does not display a positive or negative sign.

Examples■ The following two functions both return the value 1:

ACOSReturns the arc cosine of a number.Syntax:

The resulting angle is returned in radians (from 0 to π). To convert the resulting radians to degrees, multiply the radians by 180/PI().

Examples■ The function

returns 1.05 .■ The function

returns 1.77 .

See also• PI (page 269)• COS (page 247).

ACOSHReturns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number.Syntax:

ABS(number )

where number is any number

ABS(–1)

ABS(1)

ACOS(number )

where number is the cosine of the angle (range 1 to –1)

ACOS(0.5)

ACOS(–0.2)

ACOSH(number )

where number is any number equal to or greater than 1


UM

-007

0-A

0



returns 1.76 .

See also• ASINH (page 242)• ATANH (page 242)• COSH (page 247).

ADDRESSCreates a cell address as text.Syntax:


returns $F$5.■ The function

returns SALES!F5.

See also• TRUE (page 281)• COLUMN (page 246)• OFFSET (page 268)• ROW (page 275).

ANDReturns True if all arguments are true; returns False if at least one argument is false.Syntax:

Examples■ The following function returns True because both arguments are true:

■ The following function returns False:

See also:• TRUE (page 281)• FALSE (page 252)• NOT (page 266)• OR (page 269)• ROW (page 275).

ASCReturns a copy of text in which the double-byte characters (if any) have been converted to single-byte.Syntax:

Any double-byte characters that do not have single-byte equivalents are left in their original form.

See also DBCS (page 250).

ASINReturns the arcsine of a number.Syntax:

ACOSH(1.2)

ACOSH(3)

ADDRESS(row , column , ref_type [, a1][, sheet ])

where row is the row number for the cell

addresscolumn is the column number for the cell

addressref_type is the cell reference type. Valid

values for this argument are1 Absolute2 Absolute row, relative column3 Relative row, absolute column4 Relative

a1(optional)

is the reference format, which must be TRUE() to represent an A1 reference format. The R1C1 reference format is not supported.

sheet(optional)

is the name of an external worksheet view control. Omitting this argument assumes that the reference exists in the current spreadsheet.

ADDRESS(5,6,1)

ADDRESS(5,6,4,TRUE(),"SALES.")

AND(logical_list )

where logical_list is a list of conditions separated by

commas. You can include as many as 30 conditions in the list. The list can contain logical values or a reference to a range containing logical values. Text and empty cells are ignored. If there are no logical values in the list, the error #VALUE! is returned.

AND(1+1=2,5+5=10)

AND(TRUE(),FALSE())

ASC(text )

where text is the text containing double-byte characters

ASIN( number )

APPENDIX 2 WORKSHEET FUNCTIONS 241

UM

-007

0-A

0

The resulting angle is returned in radians (ranging from –π/2 to π/2). To convert the resulting radians to degrees, multiply the radians by 180/PI().

Example■ The following function returns —1.57:

See also• PI (page 269)• ASINH (page 242)• SIN (page 276).

ASINHReturns the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number.Syntax:



returns —2.09.

See also• ACOSH (page 240)• ASIN (page 241)• ATANH (page 242)• SINH (page 277).

ATANReturns the arctangent of a number.Syntax:

The resulting angle is returned in radians, ranging from –π/2 to π/2. To convert the resulting radians to degrees, multiply the radians by 180/PI().



returns –1.33 .

See also• PI (page 269)• ATAN2 (page 242)• ATANH (page 242)• TAN (page 279).

ATAN2Returns the arctangent of the specified coordinates.Syntax:

The arctangent is the angle from the x axis to a line with end points at the origin (0, 0) and a point with the given coordinates (x, y). The angle is returned in radians, ranging from –π to π, excluding –π.



returns 3.04 .

See also• ATAN (page 242)• ATANH (page 242)• TAN (page 279).

ATANHReturns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number.Syntax:

where number is the sine of the resulting angle

(range –1 to 1)

ASIN(–1)

ASINH( number )


ASINH(5.3)

ASINH(–4)

ATAN(number )

where number is the tangent of the angle

ATAN(3.5)

ATAN(–4)

ATAN2(x, y)

where x is the x coordinatey is the y coordinate

ATAN2(3,6)

ATAN2(–1,0.1)

ATANH(number )

where number is a number between –1 and 1,

excluding –1 and 1


UM

-007

0-A

0



returns –0.26 .

See also• ACOS (page 240)• ASINH (page 242)• TANH (page 279).

AVERAGEReturns the average of the supplied numbers. The result of AVERAGE is also known as the arithmetic mean.Syntax:

As many as 30 numbers can be included in the list, and the list can contain numbers or a reference to a range of cells that contains numbers. Text, logical expressions, or empty cells in a referenced range are ignored. All numeric values (including 0) are used.



returns 134, the average of the values in the range of cells C15:C17.

See also• MAX (page 263)• MIN (page 264).

ATANH(0.5)

ATANH(–0.25)

AVERAGE(number_list )

where number_list is a list of numbers separated by

commas

AVERAGE(5,6,8,14)

AVERAGE(C15:C17)


UM

-007

0-A

0

CALLCalls a procedure in a DLL (Dynamic Link Library).There are two syntax forms of this function:When CALL is used with REGISTER.ID, as shown in syntax 1, the DLL is loaded and remains loaded until the program is dismissed.

When CALL is used alone, as shown in syntax 2, the DLL is loaded, the function is called, and then the DLL is unloaded.IMPORTANT CALL is provided for advanced users only. If you use it incorrectly, you may cause errors that will require you to restart the computer.Syntax 1 — used with REGISTER.ID:

Syntax 2 — used alone:

For declarations made in C, it is assumed that your compiler defaults to 8-byte doubles, 2-byte shor t integers, and 4-byte long integers. In the Windows programming environment, all pointers should be far pointers.Pascal calling conventions are used for all functions called from DLLs. For most C compilers, you must add the –Pascal keyword to the function declaration.If the return value for your custom function uses a pass-by-reference data type, a null pointer can be passed as the return value. The null pointer is interpreted as the #NUM! error value.For the F and G data types, a custom function can modify

an allocated string buffer. If the return value type code is F or G, the value returned by the function is ignored. The list of function arguments is searched for the first data type that corresponds to the return value type. The current contents of the allocated string buffer is taken for the return value. 256 bytes is allocated for the argument; therefore, a function can return a larger string than it receives.You can use a single digit (n), with a value from 1 to 9, as the code for type_text . The variable in the location pointed to by the nth argument is modified instead of the return value; this process is referred to as modifying in place. The nth argument must be a pass-by-reference

CALL( register_id , argument1 , …)

CALL( module_text , procedure , type_text , argument1 , …)

where register_id is the value returned by a previously executed REGISTER.ID function.argument1 is the arguments to be passed to the procedure.module_text is quoted text or reference specifying the name of the dynamic link library (DLL) that contains the

procedure.procedure is text specifying the name of the function in the DLL in Formula One. The function name is case

dependent in 32-bit Formula One.type_text is text specifying the data type of the return value and the data types of all arguments to the DLL or

code resource. The first letter of type_text specifies the return value. The data types you use for type_text are described in the following table:

Data type Description Pass by C declarationA Logical (False = 0, True = 1) Value short intB IEEE 8-byte floating point number Value doubleC Null-terminated string (255 characters maximum) Reference char *D Byte-counted string (first byte contains string length;

255 characters maximum)Reference unsigned char *

E IEEE 8-byte floating point number Reference double *F Null-terminated string (255 characters maximum) Reference char *G Byte-counted string (first byte contains string length;

255 characters maximum)Reference unsigned char *

H Unsigned 2-byte integer Value unsigned short intI Signed 2-byte integer Value short intJ Signed 4-byte integer Value long intL Logical (False = 0, True = 1) Reference short int *M Signed 2-byte integer Reference short int *N Signed 4-byte integer Reference long int *


UM

-007

0-A

0

data type. In addition, you must declare the function void. For most C compilers, you can add the Void keyword to the function declaration.

Examples■ The following macro formula registers the GetTickCount function from Microsoft Windows. GetTickCount returns the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since Windows was started.

Assuming that this REGISTER.ID function is in cell A5, after your macro registers GetTickCount, you can use the CALL function to return the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since Windows was started:

■ On a worksheet, you can use the following CALL formula (syntax 2) to call the GetTickCount function:

CEILINGRounds a number up to the nearest multiple of a specified significance.Syntax:

Regardless of the sign of the number, the value is rounded up, away from zero. If number is an exact multiple of significance , no rounding occurs.If number or significance is non-numeric, the error #VALUE! is returned. When the arguments have opposite signs, the error #NUM! is returned.

Examples■ The following function returns 1.25 :

■ The following function returns –150 :

See also• EVEN (page 252)• FLOOR (page 254)• INT (page 256)• ODD (page 268)• ROUND (page 274)• TRUNC (page 281).

CHARReturns a character that corresponds to the supplied ASCII code.Syntax:

The character and associated numeric code are defined by Windows in the ASCII character set.

Examples■ The following function returns the character F:

■ The following function returns the character #:

See also CODE (page 246).

CHOOSEReturns a value from a list of numbers based on the index number supplied.Syntax:

index can be a cell reference, or a formula that returns any value from 1 to 29. If index is less than 1 or greater than the number of items in item_list , #VALUE! is returned. If index is a fractional number, it is truncated to an integer.

Examples■ The following function returns Q2:

■ The following function returns the average of the contents of range A1:A10:

See also INDEX (page 256).

REGISTER.ID("Kernel32","GetTickCount","J")

CALL(A5)

CALL("Kernel32","GetTickCount","J!")

CEILING( number , significance )

where number is the value you want to roundsignificance is the multiple to which you want

to round

CEILING(1.23459,0.05)

CEILING(–148.24,–2)

CHAR(number )

where number is a value between 1 and 255 that

specifies an ASCII character

CHAR(70)

CHAR(35)

CHOOSE(index , item_list )

where index is a number that refers to an item in

item_list

item_list is a list of numbers, formulas, or text separated by commas. This argument can also be a range reference. You can specify as many as 29 items in the list.

CHOOSE(2,"Q1","Q2","Q3","Q4")

AVERAGE(CHOOSE(1,A1:A10,B1:B10,C1:C10))


UM

-007

0-A

0

CLEANRemoves all non-printable characters from the supplied text.Syntax:

Text imported from another environment may require this function.

Examples■ The following function returns Payments Due because the character returned by CHAR(8) is nonprintable:

See also• CHAR (page 245)• TRIM (page 280).

CODEReturns a numeric code representing the first character of the supplied string.Syntax:

The numeric code and associated string are defined in your computer’s character set. (The character set used by Windows is the ANSI character set.)

Examples■ The following function returns 65:

■ The following function returns 98:

See also CHAR (page 245).

COLUMNReturns the worksheet column number of the supplied reference.Syntax:


■ The following function returns 4 if the function is entered in cell D2:

See also• COLUMNS (page 246)• ROW (page 275).

COLUMNSReturns the number of columns in a range reference.Syntax:

Example■ The following function returns 4:

See also• COLUMN (page 246)• ROWS (page 275).

CONCATENATEJoins several text strings into one string.Syntax:

The & operator can be used instead of CONCATENATE to join text items.

Examples■ The following example returns Sale Pric e:

Note the space character after Sale .

CLEAN(text )

where text is any worksheet information

CLEAN("Payments"&CHAR(8)&"Due")

CODE(text )

where text is any string

CODE("A")

CODE("b")

COLUMN(reference )

where reference is a reference to a cell or range.

Omitting the argument returns the number of the column in which COLUMN is placed.

COLUMN(B3)

COLUMN()

COLUMNS(range )

where range is a reference to a range of cells

COLUMNS(A1:D5)

CONCATENATE(text1 , text2 , …)

where text1 , text2 ,…

represent up to 30 text items to be joined into a single text item. The text items can be strings, numbers, or single-cell references.

CONCATENATE("Sale ","Price")


UM

-007

0-A

0

■ Suppose in a sales worksheet, C3 contains client 11, C6 contains dataTakers, and C9 contains the number 9. The following example returns Sales 2000 to 2002: 9 dataTakers for client 11 :

Note the space character after 2002: , between C9 and C6, and either side of for .


COSReturns the cosine of an angle.Syntax:


■ The following function returns 0.28 :

See also• ACOS (page 240)• ASINH (page 242)• ATANH (page 242)• COSH (page 247)• PI (page 269).

COSHReturns the hyperbolic cosine of a number.Syntax:



See also• ASINH (page 242)• ATANH (page 242)• COS (page 247).

COUNTReturns the number of values in the supplied list.Syntax:

COUNT only counts numbers, or numerical values such as logical values, dates and text representations of dates. If you supply a range, only numbers and numerical values in the range are counted. Empty cells, logical values, text, and error values in the range are ignored.



See also• AVERAGE (page 243)• COUNTA (page 247)• SUM (page 278).

COUNTAReturns the number of non-blank values in the supplied list.Syntax:

COUNTA returns the number of cells that contain data in a range. Null values ("") are counted, but references to empty cells are ignored.


CONCATENATE("Sales 2000 to 2002: ",C9," ",C6," for ",C3)

COS(number )

where number is the angle in radians. If the angle is in

degrees, convert the angle to radians by multiplying the angle by PI()/180.

COS(1.444)

COS(5)

COSH(number )


COSH(2.10)

COSH(.24)

COUNT(value_list )

where value_list is a list of values. The list can contain

as many as 30 values.

COUNT(5,6,"Q2")

COUNT("09/07/02","09/21/02","09/28/02")

COUNTA(expression_list )

where expression_list is a list of expressions. As

many as 30 expressions can be included in the list.

COUNTA(32,45,"AbcdEfg","")


UM

-007

0-A

0

■ The following function returns 0 when the specified range contains all empty cells:

See also• AVERAGE (page 243)• COUNT (page 247)• PRODUCT (page 270)• SUM (page 278).

COUNTIFReturns the number of cells (within a range) that meet a given criteria.Syntax:

Examples■ If cells B4 to B7 contain 33, 55, 76, and 86 respectively, the function

returns the value 3.■ If cells C4 to C8 contain DT50, DT500, DT615, DT800 and DT800 respectively, the function

returns 2.

See also• AVERAGE (page 243)• COUNTA (page 247)• SUM (page 278)• SUMIF (page 278).

DATEReturns the serial number (see NOW) of the supplied date.Syntax:

Examples■ The following function returns 34506 :

■ The following function returns 36225 :

See also• DATEVALUE (page 248)• DAY (page 249)• MONTH (page 266)• NOW (page 266)• TIMEVALUE (page 280)• TODAY (page 280)• YEAR (page 284).

DATEVALUEReturns the serial number (see NOW) of a date supplied as a text string.Syntax:



COUNTA(C38:C60)

COUNTIF(range , criteria )

where range is the range of cells from which you

want to count cellscriteria is the number, expression, or text that

defines the cells to be counted

COUNTIF(B3:B6,">50")

COUNTIF(C4:C8,"DT800"

DATE(year , month , day )

where year is a number from 1900 to 2078. If year is

between 1920 to 2019, you only need specify two digits to represent the year; otherwise specify all four digits.

month is a number representing the month (for example, 12 represents December). If a number greater than 12 is supplied, the number is added to the first month of the specified year.

day is a number representing the day of the month. If the number you specify for day exceeds the number of days in that month, the number is added to the first day of the specified month.

DATE(94,6,21)

DATE(99,3,6)

DATEVALUE(text )

where text is a date in text format between January 1

1900 and December 31 2078. If you omit the year, the current year is used.

DATEVALUE("3/6/94")

DATEVALUE("12/25/95")


UM

-007

0-A

0

See also• NOW (page 266)• TIMEVALUE (page 280)• TODAY (page 280).

DAYReturns the day of the month that corresponds to the date represented by the supplied number.Syntax:



See also• HOUR (page 255)• MINUTE (page 265)• MONTH (page 266)• NOW (page 266)• SECOND (page 276)• TODAY (page 280)• WEEKDAY (page 284)• YEAR (page 284).

DAYS360Returns the number of days between two dates based on a 360-day year (twelve 30-day months). Use this function to help compute payments if your accounting system is based on twelve 30-day months.Syntax:

start_date and end_date can be text strings using numbers to represent the month, day, and year (for example, "1/30/93" or "1-30-93"), or they can be serial numbers (see NOW) representing the dates.If start_date occurs after end_date , DAYS360 returns a negative number.If method is set to False and• start_date is the 31st of a month, start_date

becomes equal to the 30th of the same month.• end_date is the 31st of a month and start_date

is less than the 30th of a month, end_date becomes equal to the 1st of the next month, otherwise end_date becomes equal to the 30th of the same month.

If method is set to True, start_date s or end_date s that occur on the 31st of a month become equal to the 30th of the same month.NOTE To determine the number of days between two dates in a normal year, you can use normal subtraction. For example, "12/31/93"–"1/1/93" equals 364.

ExampleThe following function returns 1:

DAY(serial_number )

where serial_number is a date represented as a

serial number (see NOW) or as text (for example, 06-21-02 or 21-Jun-02).

DAY(34399)

DAY("06-21-94")

DAYS360(start_date , end_date [, method ])

where start_dateend_date

are the two dates between which you want to know the number of days.

method(optional)

is a logical value that specifies whether the European or US method should be used in the calculation. If False (or omitted), the US (NASD) method is used. If True, the European method is used. The default is based on the local translation. It should be correct for your location.

DAYS360("1/30/02","2/1/02")


UM

-007

0-A

0

DBReturns the real depreciation of an asset for a specific period of time using the fixed-declining-balance method.Syntax:

Example■ The following function returns 1451.52 :

See also• DDB (page 250)• SLN (page 277)• SYD (page 279)• VDB (page 283).

DBCSReturns a copy of text in which single-byte characters (if any) have been converted to double-byte characters.Syntax:

Any single-byte characters that do not have double-byte equivalents are left in their original (single-byte) form.

See also ASC (page 241).

DDBReturns the depreciation of an asset for a specific period of time using the double-declining-balance method or a declining-balance factor you supply.Syntax:

The double-declining-balance method uses an accelerated rate where the highest depreciation occurs in the first period, decreasing in successive periods.All arguments for this function must be positive numbers.


See also• DB (page 250)• SLN (page 277)• SYD (page 279)• VDB (page 283).

DB(cost , salvage , life , period [, months ])

where cost is the initial cost of the assetsalvage is the salvage value of the assetlife is the number of periods in the useful life

of the assetperiod is the period for which to calculate the

depreciation. The time units used to determine period and life must match.

months(optional)

is the number of months in the first year of the item’s life. Omitting this argument assumes there are 12 months in the first year.

DB(10000,1000,7,3)

DBCS(text )

where text is the text containing single-byte characters

DDB(cost , salvage , life , period [, factor ])



depreciation. The time units used to determine period and life must match.

factor(optional)

is the rate at which the balance declines. Omitting this argument assumes a default factor of 2, the double-declining-balance factor.

DDB(10000,1000,7,3)


UM

-007

0-A

0

DOLLARReturns the specified number as text, using currency format and the supplied precision.Syntax:

NOTE “Local” currency refers to the currency format for the current system — that is, the one specified in Windows’ Regional Settings control panel.DOLLAR returns the specified number format as text using the computer’s current currency format. If you want to always convert to the USDollar format regardless of the language of your system, use USDOLLAR (page 282).

Examples■ The following function returns $1023.79 :

■ The following function returns $500 :

See also• FIXED (page 253)• TEXT (page 280)• VALUE (page 282).

ERROR.TYPEReturns a number corresponding to an error:

Syntax:

Example■ The following function returns 2 if the formula in cell D4 attempts to divide by zero:

See also• ISERR (page 258)• ISERROR (page 258).

DOLLAR(number [, precision ])

where number is a number, a formula that evaluates

to a number, or a reference to a cell that contains a number

precision(optional)

is a value representing the number of decimal places to the right of the decimal point. Omitting this argument assumes the standard number of decimal places for the local currency.

DOLLAR(1023.789)

DOLLAR(495.301,–2)

Number Error1 #NULL!

2 #DIV/0!

3 #VALUE!

4 #REF!

5 #NAME?

6 #NUM!

7 #N/A

#N/A Other

ERROR.TYPE(cell_ref )

where cell_ref is a cell reference

ERROR.TYPE(D4)

: 251

UM

-007

0-A

0

EVENRounds the specified number up to the nearest even integer.Syntax:



See also• CEILING (page 245)• FLOOR (page 254)• INT (page 256)• ODD (page 268)• ROUND (page 274)• TRUNC (page 281).

EXACTCompares two expressions for identical, case-sensitive matches. True is returned if the expressions are identical; False is returned if they are not.Use EXACT to test text being entered into a cell.Syntax:

Examples■ The following function returns True:

■ The following function returns False:

See also• LEN (page 261)• SEARCH (page 275).

EXPReturns the value of e raised to the specified power. The constant e is 2.71828182845904 (the base of the natural logarithm).Syntax:



See also• LN (page 261)• LOG (page 261).

FACTReturns the factorial of a specified number.Syntax:



See also PRODUCT (page 270).

FALSEReturns the logical value False . This function always requires the trailing parentheses.Syntax:

You can also type False directly into a worksheet cell or formula.

See also TRUE (page 281).

EVEN(number )

where number is any number, a formula that evaluates to

a number, or a reference to a cell that contains a number

EVEN(2.5)

EVEN(2030.45)

EXACT(expression1 , expression2 )

where expression1 is any textexpression2 is any text

EXACT("Abc99","Abc99")

EXACT("Abc99","abc99")

EXP(number )

where number is any number as the exponent

EXP(2.5)

EXP(3)

FACT(number )

where number is any non-negative integer. If you supply

a real number, FACT truncates the number to an integer before calculation.

FACT(2.5)

FACT(6)

FALSE()


UM

-007

0-A

0

FINDSearches for a text string within another text string and returns the character position at which the search string first occurs.Syntax:

FIND is case-sensitive, and you cannot use wildcard characters in the search_text .



See also• EXACT (page 252)• LEN (page 261)• MID (page 264)• SEARCH (page 275).

FINDBSearches for a string of text within another text string and returns the byte position at which the search string first occurs.Syntax:

FINDB is case-sensitive, and you cannot use wildcard characters in the search_text .



FIXEDRounds a number to the supplied precision, formats the number in decimal format, and returns the result as text.Syntax:

Examples■ The following function returns 2,000.500 :


See also• DOLLAR (page 251)• ROUND (page 274)• TEXT (page 280)• VALUE (page 282).

FIND( search_text , text [, start ])

where search_text is the text to find. If you specify an

empty string (""), FIND matches the first character in text.

text is the text to be searchedstart(optional)

is the character position in text where the search begins (the first character in text is character number 1). When you omit this argument, the default starting position is character number 1.

FIND("time","There's no time left")

FIND("4","Aisle 4, Part 123-4-11",9)

FINDB( search_text , text [, start ])

where search_text is the text to find. If you specify an

empty string (""), FINDB matches the first byte in text.

text is the text to be searchedstart(optional)

is the byte position in text where the search begins (the first byte in text is byte number 1). When you omit this argument, the default starting position is byte number 1.

FINDB("time","There's no time like the present")

FINDB("4","Aisle 4, Part 123-4-11", 9)

FIXED( number [, precision ][, no_commas])

where number is any numberprecision(optional)

is the number of digits that appear to the right of the decimal place. When this argument is omitted, a default precision of 2 is used. If you specify negative precision, number is rounded to the left of the decimal point. You can specify a precision as great as 127 digits.

no_commas(optional)

determines if thousands separators (commas) are used in the result. Use 1 to exclude commas in the result. If no_commas is 0 or the argument is omitted, thousands separators are included (for example, 1,000.00 ).

FIXED(2000.5,3)

FIXED(2009.5,–1,1)

: 253

UM

-007

0-A

0

FLOORRounds a number down to the nearest multiple of a specified significance.Syntax:

Regardless of the sign of the number, the value is rounded down, toward zero. If number is an exact multiple of significance , no rounding occurs.If number or significance is non-numeric, #NAME? is returned. When the arguments have opposite signs, #NUM! is returned.


■ The following function returns –148 :

See also• CEILING (page 245)• EVEN (page 252)• INT (page 256)• ODD (page 268)• ROUND (page 274)• TRUNC (page 281).

FVReturns the future value of an annuity based on regular payments and a fixed interest rate.Syntax:

The units used for interest must match those used for nper . For example, if the annuity has an 8 percent annual interest rate over a period of 5 years, specify 8 percent/12 for interest and 5*12 for nper .Cash paid out is shown as a negative number.Cash received is shown as a positive number.

Examples■ The following function returns 4,774.55 :

■ The following function returns 531,550.86 :

See also• IPMT (page 257)• NPER (page 267)• PMT (page 269)• PPMT (page 270)• PV (page 271)• RATE (page 271).

HLOOKUPSearches the top row of a table for a value and returns the contents of a cell in that table that corresponds to the location of the search value.Syntax:

HLOOKUP compares the information in the top row of search_range to the supplied search_item . When

FLOOR(number , significance )

where number is the value you want to roundsignificance is the multiple to which you want

to round

FLOOR(1.23459,0.05)

FLOOR(–148.24,–2)

FV( interest , nper , payment [, pv ][, due_type ])

where interest is the fixed interest ratenper is the number of payments in an

annuitypayment is the fixed payment made each periodpv(optional)

is the present value or the lump sum amount that the annuity is currently worth. When you omit this argument, a present value of 0 is assumed.

due_type(optional)

indicates when payments are due. Use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period or 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period. When you omit this argument, 0 is assumed.

FV(5%,8,–500)

FV(10%/12,240,–700,1)

HLOOKUP(search_item , search_range , row_index )

where search_item is a value, text string, or reference

to a cell containing a value that is matched against data in the top row of search_range

search_range is a reference to the range (table) to be searched. The cells in the first row of search_range can contain numbers, text, or logical values. The contents of the first row must be in ascending order (for example, –2, –1, 0, 2…, A through Z, False, True). Text searches are not case-sensitive.

row_index is the row in search_range from which the matching value is returned. row_index can be a number from 1 to the number of rows in search_range .If row_index is less than 1, the error #VALUE! is returned. When row_index is greater than the number of rows in the table, the error #REF! is returned.


UM

-007

0-A

0

a match is found, information located in the same column and supplied row (row_index ) is returned.If search_item cannot be found in the top row of search_range , the largest value that is less than search_item is used. When search_item is less than the smallest value in the first row of the search_range , the error #REF! is returned.

Examples

■ For the worksheet shown in Figure 300, the following function returns 22.63 :

■ For the worksheet shown in Figure 300, the following function returns #REF! :

See also• INDEX (page 256)• LOOKUP (page 262)• MATCH (page 263)• VLOOKUP (page 283).

HOURReturns the hour component (in 24-hour format) of the specified time.Syntax:

The result is an integer ranging from 0 (12:00 AM) to 23 (11:00 PM).



See also• DAY (page 249)• MINUTE (page 265)• MONTH (page 266)• NOW (page 266)• SECOND (page 276)• WEEKDAY (page 284)• YEAR (page 284).

IFTests a logical condition and returns a specified value.Syntax:

Example■ The following function returns Greater if the value in cell A1 is greater than 10, and Less if the value in A1 is less than 10:

See also• AND (page 241)• FALSE (page 252)• NOT (page 266)• OR (page 269)• TRUE (page 281).

HLOOKUP("Northeast",B1:E5,3)

HLOOKUP("Pacific",B1:E5,7)

HOUR(time )

where time is the time as a serial number (see NOW).

The decimal portion of the number represents time as a fraction of the day.

HOUR(34259.4)

HOUR(34619.976)

FIGURE 300 HLOOKUP exampleIF( condition , true_value , false_value )

where condition is any logical expressiontrue_value is the value to be returned if

condition evaluates to Truefalse_value is the value to be returned if

condition evaluates to False

IF(A1>10,"Greater","Less")

: 255

UM

-007

0-A

0

INDEXReturns the contents of a cell from a specified range.Syntax:

If row , column , and range do not point to a cell within reference , #REF! is returned. If row and column are omitted, INDEX returns the range in reference specified by range .

Examples

■ he following function returns $1415.35 :

■ For the worksheet shown in Figure 301, the following function returns $1634.58 :

See also• CHOOSE (page 245)• HLOOKUP (page 254)• LOOKUP (page 262)• MATCH (page 263)• VLOOKUP (page 283).

INDIRECTReturns the contents of the cell referenced by the specified cell.Syntax:

Example■ The following function returns the contents of the cell that C1 references. If C1 contains D1, the contents of D1 are returned:

See also OFFSET (page 268).

INTRounds the supplied number down to the nearest integer.Syntax:


■ The following function returns –11:

See also• CEILING (page 245)• FLOOR (page 254)• MOD (page 265)• ROUND (page 274)• TRUNC (page 281).

INDEX( reference [, row ][, column ][, range ])

where reference is a reference to one or more ranges.

If reference specifies more than one range, separate each reference with a comma and enclose the reference in parentheses. For example, (A1:C6,B7:E14,F4 ).If each range in reference contains only one row or column, you can omit the row or column argument. For example, if reference is A1:A15, you can omit the column argument and simply use INDEX(A1:A15,3,,1) .

row(optional)

is the row number in reference from which you want to return data

column(optional)

is the column number in reference from which you want to return data

range(optional)

specifies the range from which data is returned if reference contains more than one range. For example, if reference is (A1:A10,B1:B5,D14:E23) , A1:A10 is range 1, B1:B5 is range 2, and D14:E23 is range 3.

INDEX(A2:B6,2,2)

INDEX((A2:B6,D2:E6),4,2,2)

FIGURE 301 INDEX example

INDIRECT( ref_text [, a1])

where ref_text is a reference to a cell that references a

third cell. If ref_text is not a valid reference, the error #REF! is returned.

a1(optional)

is the reference format. This argument must be TRUE() to represent an A1 reference format; the R1C1 reference format is not supported.

INDIRECT(C1)

INT( number )

where number is any real number

INT(10.99)

INT(–10.99)


UM

-007

0-A

0

IPMTReturns the interest payment of an annuity for a given period, based on regular payments and a fixed periodic interest rate.Syntax:


Examples■ The following function returns –117.87 :

■ The following function returns –117.09 :

See also• PV (page 271)• PMT (page 269)• PPMT (page 270)• RATE (page 271).

IRRReturns internal rate of return for a series of periodic cash flows.Syntax:

The internal rate of return is the interest rate received for an investment consisting of payments (specified by negative numbers) and investments (specified by positive numbers).IRR is calculated iteratively, cycling through the calculation until the result is accurate to .00001%. If the result cannot be found after 20 iterations, #NUM! is returned. When this occurs, supply a different value for guess .

Examples

■ For the worksheet shown in Figure 302, the following function returns 3.72% :

■ For the worksheet shown in Figure 302, the following function returns –49.26% :

See also• MIRR (page 265)• NPV (page 267)• RATE (page 271).

IPMT( interest , per , nper , pv ,[ fv ],[ type ])

where interest is the fixed periodic interest rateper is the period for which to return the

interest payment. This number must be between 1 and nper .

nper is the number of paymentspv is the present value, or the lump sum

amount the annuity is currently worthfv(optional)

is the future value, or the value after all payments are made. If this argument is omitted, the future value is assumed to be 0.

type(optional)


IPMT(8%/12,2,48,18000)

IPMT(8%/12,2,48,18000,0,1)

IRR( cash_flow [, guess ])

where cash_flow is a reference to a range that contains

values for which to calculate the internal rate of return. The values must contain at least one positive and one negative value. During calculation, IRR uses the order in which the values appear to determine the order of the cash flow. Text, logical values, and empty cells in the range are ignored.

guess is the estimate of the internal rate of return. If no argument is supplied, a rate of return of 10 percent is assumed.

IRR(B1:B6)

IRR(B1:B3,–20%)

FIGURE 302 IRR example

: 257

UM

-007

0-A

0

ISBLANKDetermines if the specified cell is blank.Syntax:

If the referenced cell is blank, True is returned.If the referenced cell is not blank, False is returned.

Example■ The following function returns True if A1 is a blank cell:

See also• ISERR (page 258)• ISERROR (page 258)• ISLOGICAL (page 258)• ISNA (page 259)• ISNONTEXT (page 259)• ISNUMBER (page 259)• ISREF (page 260)• ISTEXT (page 260).

ISERRDetermines if the specified expression returns an error value.Syntax:

If the expression returns any error except #N/A! , True is returned. Otherwise, False is returned.

Example■ The following function returns True if A1 contains a formula that returns an error such as #NUM!:

See also• ISBLANK (page 258)• ISERROR (page 258)• ISLOGICAL (page 258)• ISNA (page 259)• ISNONTEXT (page 259)• ISNUMBER (page 259)• ISREF (page 260)• ISTEXT (page 260).

ISERRORDetermines if the specified expression returns an error value.Syntax:

If the expression returns any error value, such as #N/A , #VALUE!, #REF! , #DIV/0! , #NUM!, #NAME?, or #NULL! , True is returned. Otherwise, False is returned.

Examples■ The following function returns True :

■ The following function returns False if A1 contains a formula that does not return an error.

See also• ISBLANK (page 258)• ISERR (page 258)• ISLOGICAL (page 258)• ISNA (page 259)• ISNONTEXT (page 259)• ISNUMBER (page 259)• ISREF (page 260)• ISTEXT (page 260).

ISLOGICALDetermines if the specified expression returns a logical value.Syntax:

If the expression returns a logical value, True is returned. Otherwise, False is returned.

Example■ The following function returns True because ISBLANK returns a logical value:

ISBLANK( reference )

where reference is a reference to any cell

ISBLANK(A1)

ISERR( expression )

where expression is any expression

ISERR(A1)

ISERROR(expression )


ISERROR(4/0)

ISERROR(A1)

ISLOGICAL( expression )


ISLOGICAL(ISBLANK(A1))


UM

-007

0-A

0

See also• ISBLANK (page 258)• ISERR (page 258)• ISERROR (page 258)• ISNA (page 259)• ISNONTEXT (page 259)• ISNUMBER (page 259)• ISREF (page 260)• ISTEXT (page 260).

ISNADetermines if the specified expression returns the #N/A! (value not available) error.Syntax:

If the expression returns the #N/A! error, True is returned. Otherwise, False is returned.

Example■ The following function returns True if cell A1 contains the NA() function or returns the error value #N/A! :

See also• NA (page 266)• ISBLANK (page 258)• ISERR (page 258)• ISERROR (page 258)• ISLOGICAL (page 258)• ISNONTEXT (page 259)• ISNUMBER (page 259)• ISREF (page 260)• ISTEXT (page 260).

ISNONTEXTDetermines if the specified expression is not text.Syntax:

If the expression returns any value that is not text, True is returned. Otherwise, False is returned.

Examples■ The following function returns True if cell F3 contains a number or is a blank cell:

■ The following function returns False :

See also• ISBLANK (page 258)• ISERR (page 258)• ISERROR (page 258)• ISLOGICAL (page 258)• ISNA (page 259)• ISNUMBER (page 259)• ISREF (page 260)• ISTEXT (page 260).

ISNUMBERDetermines if the specified expression is a number.Syntax:

If the expression returns a number, True is returned. Otherwise, False is returned. If expression returns a number represented as text (for example, "12" ), False is returned.

Examples■ The following function returns True :


See also• ISBLANK (page 258)• ISERR (page 258)• ISERROR (page 258)• ISLOGICAL (page 258)• ISNA (page 259)• ISNONTEXT (page 259)• ISREF (page 260)• ISTEXT (page 260).

ISNA( expression )


ISNA(A1)

ISNONTEXT(expression )


ISNONTEXT(F3)

ISNONTEXT("text")

ISNUMBER(expression )


ISNUMBER(123.45)

ISNUMBER("123")

: 259

UM

-007

0-A

0

ISREFDetermines if the specified expression is a range reference.Syntax:

If the expression returns a range reference, True is returned. Otherwise, False is returned.

Example■ The following function returns True :

See also• ISBLANK (page 258)• ISERR (page 258)• ISERROR (page 258)• ISLOGICAL (page 258)• ISNA (page 259)• ISNONTEXT (page 259)• ISNUMBER (page 259)• ISTEXT (page 260).

ISTEXTDetermines if the specified expression is text.Syntax:

If the expression returns text, True is returned. Otherwise, False is returned.

Example■ The following function returns True :

See also• ISBLANK (page 258)• ISERR (page 258)• ISERROR (page 258)• ISLOGICAL (page 258)• ISNA (page 259)• ISNONTEXT (page 259)• ISNUMBER (page 259)• ISREF (page 260).

LEFTReturns the left-most characters from the specified text string.Syntax:


■ The following function returns 2nd:

See also• MID (page 264)• RIGHT (page 273).

LEFTBReturns the left-most byte from the specified text string.Syntax:


■ The following function returns 2nd:

ISREF( expression )


ISREF(A3)

ISTEXT( expression )


ISTEXT("2nd Quarter")

LEFT( text [, num_chars ])

where text is any text stringnum_chars(optional)

is the number of characters to return. This value must be greater than or equal to zero. If num_chars is greater than the number of characters in text, the entire string is returned. Omitting this argument assumes a value of 1.

LEFT("2nd Quarter")

LEFT("2nd Quarter",3)

LEFTB( text [, num_chars ])


is the number of bytes to return. This value must be greater than or equal to zero. If num_chars is greater than the number of bytes in text, the entire string is returned. Omitting this argument assumes a value of 1.

LEFTB("2nd Quarter")

LEFTB("2nd Quarter",3)


UM

-007

0-A

0

LENReturns the number of characters in the supplied text string.Syntax:



See also• EXACT (page 252)• SEARCH (page 275).

LENBReturns the number of bytes in the supplied text string.Syntax:



LNReturns the natural logarithm (based on the constant e) of a number.Syntax:

LN is the inverse of the EXP function.



See also• EXP (page 252)• LOG (page 261)• LOG10 (page 261).

LOGReturns the logarithm of a number to the specified base.Syntax:



See also• EXP (page 252)• LN (page 261)• LOG10 (page 261).

LOG10Returns the base-10 logarithm of a number.Syntax:



See also• EXP (page 252)• LN (page 261)• LOG (page 261).

LEN( text )

where text is any text string. Spaces in the string are

counted as characters.

LEN("3rd Quarter")

LEN("1-3")

LENB(text )

where text is any text string. Spaces in the string are

counted as bytes.

LENB("3rd Quarter")

LENB("1-3")

LN( number )

where number is any positive real number

LN(12.18)

LN(20.09)

LOG(number [, base ])

where number is any positive real numberbase(optional)

is the base of the logarithm. Omitting this argument assumes a base of 10.

LOG(1)

LOG(10)

LOG10(number )

where number is any positive real number

LOG10(260)

LOG10(100)

: 261

UM

-007

0-A

0

LOOKUPSearches for a value in one range and returns the contents of the corresponding position in a second range.Syntax:

If lookup_value does not have an exact match in lookup_range , the largest value that is less than or equal to lookup_value is found and the corresponding position in result_range is returned. When lookup_value is smaller than the data in lookup_range , #N/A is returned.

Examples

■ For the worksheet shown in Figure 303, the following function returns Detroit :

■ For the worksheet shown in Figure 303, the following function returns #N/A :

See also• HLOOKUP (page 254)• INDEX (page 256)• VLOOKUP (page 283).

LOWERChanges the characters in the specified string to lowercase characters. Numeric characters in the string are not changed.Syntax:

Examples■ The following function returns 3rd quarter :

■ The following function returns john doe :

See also• PROPER (page 270)• UPPER (page 281).

LOOKUP(lookup_value , lookup_range , result_range )

where lookup_value is the value for which to search in

the first rangelookup_range is the first range to search and

contains only one row or one column. The range can contain numbers, text, or logical values. To search lookup_range correctly, the expressions in the range must be placed in ascending order (for example, –2, –1, 0, 1, 2..., A through Z, False, True). The search is not case-sensitive.

result_range is a range of one row or one column that is the same size as lookup_range

LOOKUP("North",A2:A7,B2:B7)

LOOKUP("Alabama",A2:A7,B2:B7)

FIGURE 303 LOOKUP example

LOWER(text )


LOWER("3rd Quarter")

LOWER("JOHN DOE")


UM

-007

0-A

0

MATCHCompares a specified value against values in a range and returns the position of the matching value in the search range.Syntax:

When using comparison method 0 and lookup_value is text, lookup_value can contain wildcard characters. The wildcard characters are * (asterisk), which matches any sequence of characters, and ? (question mark), which matches any single character.When no match is found for lookup_value , #N/A is returned.

Examples

■ For the worksheet shown in Figure 304, the following function returns 5:


See also • HLOOKUP (page 254)• INDEX (page 256)• LOOKUP (page 262)• VLOOKUP (page 283).

MAXReturns the largest value in a specified list of numbers.Syntax:

number_list can contain numbers, logical values, text representations of numbers, or a reference to a range containing those values.Error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers return errors.If a range reference is included in the list, text, logical expressions, and empty cells in the range are ignored.If there are no numbers in the list, 0 is returned.


■ The following function returns the largest value in the range:

See also• AVERAGE (page 243)• MIN (page 264).

MATCH(lookup_value , lookup_range [, comparison ])

where lookup_value is the value against which to

compare. It can be a number, text, or logical value, or a reference to a cell that contains one of those values.

lookup_range is the range to search. It contains only one row or one column. The range can contain numbers, text, or logical values.

comparison(optional)

is a number that represents the type of comparison to be made between lookup_value and the values in lookup_range . When you omit this argument, comparison method 1 is assumed.When comparison is 0, the first value that is equal to lookup_value is matched. When using this comparison method, the values in lookup_range can be in any order.When comparison is 1, the largest value that is less than or equal to lookup_value is matched. When using this comparison method, the values in lookup_range must be in ascending order (for example, ...-2, -1, 0, 1, 2..., A through Z, False, True).When comparison is –1, the smallest value that is greater than or equal to lookup_value is matched. When using this comparison method, the values in lookup_range must be in descending order (for example, True, False, Z through A, ...2, 1, 0, -1, -2...).

MATCH(7600,B2:B7,1)

MATCH("D*",A2:A7,0)

MAX(number_list )

where number_list is a list of as many as 30 numbers,

separated by commas

MAX(50,100,150,500,200)

MAX(A1:F12)

FIGURE 304 MATCH example

: 263

UM

-007

0-A

0

MIDReturns the specified number of characters from a text string, beginning with the specified starting position.Syntax:

If start_position plus the number of characters in num_chars exceeds the length of text, the characters from start_position to the end of text are returned.

Examples■ The following function returns Expenses :


See also• CODE (page 246)• FIND (page 253)• LEFT (page 260)• RIGHT (page 273)• SEARCH (page 275).

MIDBReturns the specified number of bytes from a text string, beginning with the specified starting position.Syntax:

If start_position plus the number of bytes in num_chars exceeds the length of text , the bytes from start_position to the end of text are returned.

Examples■ The following function returns Expenses :


MINReturns the smallest value in a specified list of numbers.Syntax:

Error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers return errors.If a range reference is included in the list, text, logical expressions, and empty cells in the range are ignored. If there are no numbers in the list, 0 is returned

MID( text , start_position , num_chars )

where text is the text string containing the

characters you want to extractstart_position is the position of the first

character to return from text . If start_position is 1, the first character in text is returned.If start_position is greater than the number of characters in text , an empty string (" ") is returned.If start_position is less than 1, #VALUE! is returned.

num_chars is the number of characters to return. If num_chars is negative, #VALUE! is returned.

MID("Travel Expenses",8,8)

MID("Part #45-7234",7,2)

MIDB( text , start_position , num_chars )

where text is the string from which to

return bytesstart_position is the position of the first byte

to return from text.If start_position is 1, the first byte in text is returned.If start_position is greater than the number of bytes in text , an empty string (" ") is returned.If start_position is less than 1, #VALUE! is returned.

num_chars is the number of bytes to return. If num_chars is negative, #VALUE! is returned.

MIDB("Travel Expenses",8,8)

MIDB("Part #45-7234",7,2)

MIN( number_list )

where number_list is a list of as many as 30

numbers, separated by commas. The list can contain numbers, logical values, text representations of numbers, or a reference to a range containing those values.


UM

-007

0-A

0


■ The following function returns the smallest value in the range:

See also• AVERAGE (page 243)• MAX (page 263).

MINUTEReturns the minute that corresponds to a supplied date.Syntax:

The result is an integer ranging from 0 to 59.



See also• DAY (page 249)• HOUR (page 255)• MONTH (page 266)• NOW (page 266)• SECOND (page 276)• WEEKDAY (page 284)• YEAR (page 284).

MIRRReturns the modified internal rate of return for a series of periodic cash flows.Syntax:

The modified internal rate of return considers the cost of the investment and the interest received on the reinvestment of cash.

See also• IRR (page 257)• NPV (page 267)• RATE (page 271).

MODReturns the remainder after dividing a number by a specified divisor.Syntax:


■ The following function returns –2:

MIN(50,100,150,500,200)

MIN(A1:F12)

MINUTE(serial_number )

where serial_number is the time as a serial number

(see NOW). The decimal portion of the number represents time as a fraction of the day.

MINUTE(34506.4)

MINUTE(34399.825)

MIRR(cash_flows , finance_rate , reinvest_rate )

where cash_flow is a reference to a range that

contains values for which to calculate the modified internal rate of return. The values must contain at least one positive and one negative value.Values that represent cash received should be positive; negative values represent cash paid. During calculation, MIRR uses the order in which the values appear to determine the order of cash flow.Text, logical values, and empty cells in the range are ignored.

finance_rate is the interest rate paid on money used in the cash flow

reinvest_rate is the interest rate received on money reinvested from the cash flow

MOD(number , divisor )

where number is any numberdivisor is any nonzero number. If divisor is 0,

#DIV/0! is returned.

MOD(–23,3)

MOD(–23,–3)

: 265

UM

-007

0-A

0

See also• INT (page 256)• ROUND (page 274)• TRUNC (page 281).

MONTHReturns the month that corresponds to a supplied date.Syntax:

MONTH returns a number ranging from 1 (January) to 12 (December).



See also• DAY (page 249)• HOUR (page 255)• MINUTE (page 265)• NOW (page 266)• SECOND (page 276)• TODAY (page 280)• WEEKDAY (page 284)• YEAR (page 284).

NAReturns the error value #N/A , which represents “not available”.Syntax:

Use NA to mark cells that lack data without leaving them empty. Empty cells may not be correctly represented in some calculations.IMPORTANT Although NA does not use arguments, you must supply the empty parentheses to correctly reference the function.

See also ISNA (page 259).

NOTReturns a logical value that is the opposite of its value.Syntax:

If logical is false, NOT returns True . Conversely, if logical is true, NOT returns False .

Examples■ The following function returns False :


See also• AND (page 241)• IF (page 255)• OR (page 269).

NOWReturns the current date and time as a serial number.Syntax:

The result of this function changes only when a recalculation of the worksheet occurs.

See also• DATE (page 248)• DAY (page 249)• HOUR (page 255)• MINUTE (page 265)• MONTH (page 266)• SECOND (page 276)• TODAY (page 280)• WEEKDAY (page 284)• YEAR (page 284).

Serial NumberIn a serial number, numbers to the left of the decimal point represent the date, and numbers to the right of the decimal point represent the time.

MONTH(serial_number )

where serial_number is the date as a serial number

(see NOW) or as text (for example, 06-21-94 or 21-Jun-94)

MONTH("06-21-94")

MONTH(34626)

NA()

NOT(logical )

where logical is an expression that returns a logical

value such as True or False

NOT(TRUE())

NOT(MONTH("12/25/94")=12)

NOW()


UM

-007

0-A

0

NPERReturns the number of periods of an investment based on regular periodic payments and a fixed interest rate.Syntax:



See also• PV (page 271)• IPMT (page 257)• PMT (page 269)• PPMT (page 270)• PV (page 271)• RATE (page 271).

NPVReturns the net present value of an investment based on a series of periodic payments and a discount rate.Syntax:

The time span NPV uses for calculation begins one period before the first cash flow date and ends when the last cash flow payment is made. This function is based on future cash flows. When your first cash flow occurs at the beginning of the first period, the first value must be added to the NPV result, not supplied as a value in value_list .


See also• FV (page 254)• IRR (page 257)• PV (page 271).

NPER(interest , pmt , pf [, fv ][, type ])

where interest is the fixed interest ratepmt is the fixed payment made each

period. Generally, pmt includes the principal and interest, not taxes or other fees.

pf is the present value, or the lump-sum amount that a series of future payments is currently worth

fv(optional)

is the future value, or the balance to attain after the final payment. Omitting this argument assumes a future balance of 0.

type(optional)

indicates when payments are due. Use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period, or 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period. When you omit this argument, 0 is assumed.

NPER(12%/12,–350,–300,16000,1)

NPER(1%,–350,–300,16000)

NPV(discount_rate , value_list )

where discount_rate is the rate of discount for one

periodvalue_list is a list of as many as 29

arguments or a reference to a range that contains values that represent payments and income.During calculation, NPV uses the order in which the values appear to determine the order of cash flow.Numbers, empty cells, and text representations of numbers are included in the calculation. Errors and text that cannot be translated into numbers are ignored. If value_list is a range reference, only numeric data in the range is included in the calculation. Other types of data in the range, such as empty cells, logical values, text, and error values are ignored.

NPV(8%,–12000,3000,3000,3000,7000)

: 267

UM

-007

0-A

0

ODDRounds a specified number up to the nearest odd integer.Syntax:



See also• CEILING (page 245)• EVEN (page 252)• FLOOR (page 254)• INT (page 256)• ROUND (page 274)• TRUNC (page 281).

OFFSETReturns the contents of a range that is offset from a starting point in the worksheet.Syntax:

OFFSET does not change the current selection in the worksheet.Because it returns a reference, OFFSET can be used in any function that requires or uses a cell or range reference as an argument.

Examples■ The following function returns the contents of cell D4:

■ The following function returns the sum of the values in the range E3:F5:

ODD(number )

where number is any number, a formula that

evaluates to a number, or a reference to a cell that contains a number

ODD(3.5)

ODD(6)

OFFSET(ref , rows , columns [, height ][, width ])

where ref is a reference to a cell from which the

offset reference is based. If you specify a range reference, #VALUE! is returned.

rows is the number of rows from ref that represents the upper-left cell of the offset range. A positive number represents rows below the starting cell; a negative number represents rows above the starting cell. If rows places the upper-left cell of the offset range outside the worksheet boundary, #REF! is returned.

columns is the number of columns from ref that represents the upper-left cell of the offset range. A positive number represents columns right of the starting cell; a negative number represents columns left of the starting cell. If columns places the upper-left cell of the offset range outside the spreadsheet boundary, #REF! is returned.

height(optional)

is a positive number representing the number of rows to include in the offset range. Omitting this argument assumes a single row.

width(optional)

is a positive number representing the number of columns to include in the offset range. Omitting this argument assumes a single column.

OFFSET(B1,3,2,1,1)

SUM(OFFSET(A1,2,4,3,2))


UM

-007

0-A

0

ORReturns True if at least one of a series of logical arguments is true.Syntax:

Example■ The following function returns True because one of the arguments is true:

See also• AND (page 241)• IF (page 255)• NOT (page 266).

PIReturns the value of pi (π), which is 3.14159265358979 when calculated to 15 significant digits.Syntax:

IMPORTANT Although PI does not use arguments, you must supply the empty parentheses to correctly reference the function.

See also• COS (page 247)• SIN (page 276)• TAN (page 279).

PMTReturns the periodic payment of an annuity, based on regular payments and a fixed periodic interest rate.Syntax:

PMT returns only the principal and interest payment. It does not include taxes or other fees.The units used for interest must match those used for nper . For example, if the annuity has an 8 percent annual interest rate over a period of 5 years, specify 8 percent/12 for interest and 5*12 for nper .Cash paid out is shown as a negative number.Cash received is shown as a positive number.


■ The following function returns –436.52 :

See also• IPMT (page 257)• PV (page 271)• NPER (page 267)• PPMT (page 270)• PV (page 271)• RATE (page 271).

OR(logical_list )

where logical_list is a list of conditions separated

by commas. You can include as many as 30 conditions in the list. The list can contain logical values or a reference to a range containing logical values. Text and empty cells are ignored. If there are no logical values in the list, the error value #VALUE! is returned.

OR(1+1=1,5+5=10)

PI()

PMT(interest , nper , pv [, fv ][, type ])

where interest is the fixed periodic interest ratenper is the number of periods in the annuitypv is the present value, or the amount the

annuity is currently worthfv(optional)

is the future value, or the amount the annuity will be worth. When you omit this argument, a future value of 0 is assumed.

type(optional)


PMT(8%/12,48,18000)

PMT(8%/12,48,18000,0,1)

: 269

UM

-007

0-A

0

PPMTReturns the principal paid on an annuity for a given period.Syntax:

The units used for interest must match those used for nper . For example, if the annuity has an 8 percent annual interest rate over a period of 5 years, specify 8 percent/12 for interest and 5*12 for nper .


■ The following function returns -319.43 :

See also• FV (page 254)• IPMT (page 257)• NPER (page 267)• PMT (page 269)• PV (page 271)• RATE (page 271).

PRODUCTMultiplies a list of numbers and returns the result.Syntax:


See also• FACT (page 252)• SUM (page 278).

PROPERReturns the specified string in proper-case format.Syntax:

In proper-case format, the first alphabetic character in a word is capitalized. If an alphabetic character follows a number, punctuation mark, or space, it is capitalized. All other alphabetic characters are lowercase. Numbers are not changed by PROPER.

Examples■ The following function returns 3Rd Quarter :

■ The following function returns John Doe :

See also• LOWER (page 262)• UPPER (page 281).

PPMT(interest , per , nper , pv ,[ fv ],[ type ])

where interest is the fixed periodic interest rateper is the period for which to return the

principalnper is the number of periods in the annuitypv is the present value, or the amount the

annuity is currently worthfv is the future value, or the amount the

annuity will be worth. When you omit this argument, a future value of 0 is assumed.

type indicates when payments are due. Use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period or 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period. When you omit this argument, 0 is assumed.

PPMT(8%/12,2,48,18000)

PPMT(8%/12,2,48,18000,0,1)

PRODUCT(number_list )


separated by commas. The list can contain numbers, logical values, text representations of numbers, or a reference to a range containing those values.Error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers return errors.If a range reference is included in the list, text, logical expressions, and empty cells in the range are ignored.All numeric values, including 0, are used in the calculation.

PRODUCT(1,2,3,4)

PROPER(text )


=PROPER("3rd Quarter")

=PROPER("JOHN DOE")


UM

-007

0-A

0

PVReturns the present value of an annuity, considering a series of constant payments made over a regular payment period.Syntax:




See also• FV (page 254)• IPMT (page 257)• NPER (page 267)• PMT (page 269)• PPMT (page 270)• RATE (page 271).

RANDReturns a number selected randomly from a uniform distribution greater than or equal to 0 and less than 1.Syntax:

IMPORTANT Although RAND does not use arguments, you must supply the empty parentheses to correctly reference the function.

Example■ The following function returns a random number greater than or equal to 0 and less than 10:

RATEReturns the interest rate per period of an annuity, given a series of constant cash payments made over a regular payment period.Syntax:

RATE is calculated iteratively, cycling through the calculation until the result is accurate to .00001%. If the result cannot be found after 20 iterations, #NUM! is returned. When this occurs, supply a different value for guess .

ExampleThe following function returns the monthly interest rate of 0.0067; the annual interest rate (0.0067 multiplied by 12) is 8%:

See also• FV (page 254)• IPMT (page 257)• NPER (page 267)• PMT (page 269)• PPMT (page 270)• PV (page 271).

PV( interest , nper , pmt [, fv ][, type ])

where interest is the fixed periodic interest ratenper is the number of payment periods in the

investmentpmt is the fixed payment made each periodfv is the future value, or the amount the

annuity will be worth. When you omit this argument, a future value of 0 is assumed.


PV(8%/12,48,439.43)

PV(8%/12,48,-439.43)

RAND()

RAND()*10

RATE(nper , pmt , pv [, fv ][, type ][, guess ])

where nper is the number of periods in the annuitypmt is the fixed payment made each period.

Generally, pmt includes only principal and interest, not taxes or other fees.

pv is the present value of the annuityfv is the future value, or the amount the annuity

will be worth. When you omit this argument, a future value of 0 is assumed.


guess is your estimate of the interest rate. If no argument is supplied, a value of 0.1 (10%) is assumed.

RATE(48,–439.43,18000)

: 271

UM

-007

0-A

0

REGISTER.IDReturns the register ID of the specified DLL (Dynamic Link Library) that has been previously registered. If the DLL has not been registered, this function registers the DLL, and then returns the register ID.Syntax:

For declarations made in C, it is assumed that your compiler defaults to 8-byte doubles, 2-byte short integers, and 4-byte long integers. In the Windows programming environment, all pointers should be far pointers.Pascal calling conventions are used for all functions called from DLLs. For most C compilers, you must add the –Pascal keyword to the function declaration.If the return value for your custom function uses a pass-by-reference data type, a null pointer can be passed as the return value. The null pointer is interpreted as the #NUM! error value.For the F and G data types, a custom function can modify an allocated string buffer. If the return value type code is F or G, the value returned by the function is ignored. The list of function arguments is searched for the first data type that corresponds to the return value type. The current contents of the allocated string buffer is taken for the return value. 256 bytes is allocated for the argument; therefore, a function can return a larger string than it receives.You can use a single digit (n), with a value from 1 to 9, as the code for type_text . The variable in the location pointed to by the nth argument is modified instead of the return value; this process is referred to as modifying in place. The nth argument must be a pass-by-reference data type. In addition, you must declare the function

void. For most C compilers, you can add the Void keyword to the function declaration.

Examples■ The following formula registers the GetTickCount function and returns the register ID:

Assuming that GetTickCount was already registered on another worksheet using the preceding formula, the following formula returns the register ID for GetTickCount:

REPLACEReplaces part of a text string with another text string; character-specified.Syntax:

Examples■ The following function returns "For the year: 1994" :

See also• MID (page 264)• SEARCH (page 275)• TRIM (page 280)• REPLACEB (page 273).

REGISTER.ID( module_text , procedure , type_text )

where module_text is the text specifying the name of

the DLL that contains the functionprocedure is the text specifying the name of

the function in the DLL. The function name is case-dependent.

type_text is the text specifying the data type of the return value and the data types of all arguments to the DLL. The first letter of type_text specifies the return value. If the function or code resource is already registered, you can omit this argument. For a complete list of the data types available, see the type_text parameter of CALL (page 244).

REGISTER.ID("Kernel32","GetTickCount","J!")

REGISTER.ID("Kernel32","GetTickCount")

REPLACE (orig_text , start_position ,num_chars , repl_text )

where orig_text is the original text stringstart_position is the character position where

the replacement begins. If start_position is greater than the number of characters in orig_text , repl_text is appended to the end of orig_text . If start_position is less than 1, #VALUE! is returned.

num_chars is the number of characters to replace. If this argument is negative, #VALUE! is returned.

repl_text is the replacement text string

REPLACE("For the year: 1993",18,1,"4")


UM

-007

0-A

0

REPLACEBReplaces part of a text string with another text string; byte-specified.Syntax:

Examples■ The following function returns "For the year: 1994" :

See also REPLACE (page 272).

REPTRepeats a text string a specified number of times.Syntax:

The result of REPT cannot exceed 255 characters.

Example■ The following function returns error-error-error-error-error-:

RIGHTReturns the right-most characters from a given text string.Syntax:

Examples■ The following function returns r :

■ The following function returns Quarter :

See also• LEFT (page 260)• MID (page 264).

RIGHTBReturns the right-most bytes from a given text string.Syntax:

Examples■ The following function returns r :

■ The following function returns Quarter :

REPLACEB(orig_text , start_position ,num_chars , repl_text )

where orig_text is the original text stringstart_position is the byte position where the

replacement begins. If start_position is greater than the number of bytes in orig_text , repl_text is appended to the end of orig_text . If start_position is less than 1, #VALUE! is returned.

num_chars is the number of bytes to replace. If this argument is negative, #VALUE! is returned.

repl_text is the replacement text string

REPLACEB("For the year: 1993",18,1,"4")

REPT(text , number )

where text is any text stringnumber is the number of times you want text to

repeat. If number is 0, empty text (" ") is returned.

REPT("error-",5)

RIGHT( text [, num_chars ])


is the number of characters to return. The value must be greater than or equal to zero. If num_chars is greater than the number of characters in text, the entire string is returned. Omitting this argument assumes a value of 1.

RIGHT("2nd Quarter")

RIGHT("2nd Quarter",7)

RIGHTB(text [, num_chars ])


is the number of bytes to return. The value must be greater than or equal to zero. If num_chars is greater than the number of bytes in text, the entire string is returned. Omitting this argument assumes a value of 1.

RIGHTB("2nd Quarter")

RIGHTB("2nd Quarter",7)

: 273

UM

-007

0-A

0

ROUNDRounds a number to a specified number of decimal places.Syntax:



See also• CEILING (page 245)• FLOOR (page 254)• INT (page 256)• MOD (page 265)• ROUNDDOWN (page 274)• ROUNDUP (page 274)• TRUNC (page 281).

ROUNDDOWNRounds a number down to a specified number of decimal places.Syntax:



See also• CEILING (page 245)• FLOOR (page 254)• INT (page 256)• MOD (page 265)• ROUND (page 274)• ROUNDUP (page 274)• TRUNC (page 281).

ROUNDUPRounds a number up to a specified number of decimal places.Syntax:



See also• CEILING (page 245)• FLOOR (page 254)• INT (page 256)• MOD (page 265)• ROUND (page 274)• ROUNDDOWN (page 274)• TRUNC (page 281).

ROUND(number , precision )

where number is any valueprecision is the number of decimal places to

which number is rounded.When a negative precision is used, the digits to the right of the decimal point are dropped and the absolute number of significant digits specified by precision are replaced with zeros.If precision is 0, number is rounded to the nearest integer.

ROUND(123.456,2)

ROUND(9899.435,–2)

ROUNDDOWN(number , precision )

where number is any real number you want to round

down (towards zero)precision is the number of decimal places to

which number is rounded.When a negative precision is used, the digits to the right of the decimal point are dropped and the absolute number of significant digits specified by precision are replaced with zeros.If precision is 0, number is rounded down to the nearest integer.

ROUNDDOWN(3.14159,3)

ROUNDDOWN(31415.92654,-2)

ROUNDUP(number , precision )

where number is any real number you want to round

up (away from zero)precision is the number of decimal places to

which number is rounded.When a negative precision is used, the digits to the right of the decimal point are dropped and the absolute number of significant digits specified by precision are replaced with zeros.If precision is 0, number is rounded up to the nearest integer.

ROUNDUP(76.9,0)

ROUNDUP(31415.92654,-2)


UM

-007

0-A

0

ROWReturns the row number of a supplied cell reference.Syntax:

Omitting reference returns the row number of the cell in which ROW is entered.



ROWSReturns the number of rows in a range reference.Syntax:



See also• COLUMN (page 246)• ROW (page 275).

SEARCHLocates the position of the first character of a specified text string within another text string.Syntax:

Text is searched from left to right, starting at the position specified. The search is not case-sensitive. If text does not contain the search string, #VALUE! is returned.



See also• FIND (page 253)• MID (page 264)• REPLACE (page 272)• SUBSTITUTE (page 278).

ROW(reference )

where reference is a cell or range reference

ROW(B3)

ROWS(range )

where range is a reference to a range of cells

ROWS(A1:D5)

ROWS(C30:F35)

SEARCH(search_text , text [, start_position ])

where search_text is the text to find. To search for

an asterisk or question mark, include a tilde (~) before the character.The search string can contain wildcard characters. The available wildcard characters are * (asterisk), which matches any sequence of characters, and ? (question mark), which matches any single character.

text is the text to be searchedstart_position(optional)

is the character position where the search begins. If the number you specify is less than 0 or greater than the number of characters in text, #VALUE! is returned. Omitting this argument assumes a starting position of 1.

SEARCH("?5","Bin b45")

SEARCH("b","Bin b45",4)

: 275

UM

-007

0-A

0

SEARCHBLocates the position of the first byte of a specified text string within another text string.Syntax:

Text is searched from left to right, starting at the position specified. The search is not case-sensitive. If text does not contain the search string, #VALUE! is returned.



SECONDReturns the second that corresponds to the supplied date.Syntax:



See also• DAY (page 249)• HOUR (page 255)• MINUTE (page 265)• MONTH (page 266)• NOW (page 266)• WEEKDAY (page 284).

SIGNDetermines the sign of a specified number.Syntax:

SIGN returns 1 if the specified number is positive; -1 if it is negative; 0 if it is 0.

Examples■ The following function returns -1 :


See also ABS (page 240).

SINReturns the sine of a supplied angle.Syntax:



See also• ASIN (page 241)• PI (page 269).

SEARCHB(search_text , text [, start_position ])

where search_text is the text to find. To search for

an asterisk or question mark, include a tilde (~) before the character.The search string can contain wildcards. The available wildcard characters are * (asterisk), which matches any sequence of characters, and ? (question mark), which matches any single character.

text is the text to be searchedstart_position is the byte position where the

search begins. If the number you specify is less than 0 or greater than the number of bytes in text, #VALUE! is returned. Omitting this argument assumes a starting position of 1.

SEARCHB("?5","Bin b45")

SEARCHB("b","Bin b45",4)

SECOND(serial_number )

where serial_number is the time as a serial number

(see NOW). The decimal portion of the number represents time as a fraction of the day.

SECOND(0.259)

SECOND(34657.904)

SIGN( number )


SIGN(–123)

SIGN(123)

SIN( number )

where number is the angle in radians. If the angle is in

degrees, convert the angle to radians by multiplying the angle by PI()/180.

SIN(45)

SIN(90)


UM

-007

0-A

0

SINHReturns the hyperbolic sine of a specified number.Syntax:



See also• ASINH (page 242)• PI (page 269).

SLNReturns the depreciation of an asset for a specific period of time using the straight-line-balance method.Syntax:


See also• DDB (page 250)• SYD (page 279)• VDB (page 283).

SQRTReturns the square root of a specified number.Syntax:



See also SUMSQ (page 279).

STDEVReturns the standard deviation of a population based on a sample of supplied values. The standard deviation of a population represents an average of deviations from the population mean within a list of values.Syntax:


See also• STDEVP (page 277)• VAR (page 282)• VARP (page 282).

STDEVPReturns the standard deviation of a population based on an entire population of values. The standard deviation of a population represents an average of deviations from the population mean within a list of values.Syntax:


SINH( number )


SINH(1)

SINH(3)

SLN(cost , salvage , life )

where cost is the initial cost of the assetsalvage is the salvage value of the assetlife is the number of periods of the useful life

of the asset

SLN(10000,1000,7)

SQRT(number )

where number is any positive number. If you specify a

negative number, the error #NUM! is returned.

SQRT(9)

SQRT(2.5)

STDEV(number_list )


separated by commas. The list can contain numbers or a reference to a range that contains numbers.

STDEV(4.0,3.0,3.0,3.5,2.5,4.0,3.5)

STDEVP(number_list )



STDEVP(4.0,3.0,3.0,3.5,2.5,4.0,3.5)

: 277

UM

-007

0-A

0

See also• STDEV (page 277)• VAR (page 282)• VARP (page 282).

SUBSTITUTEReplaces a specified part of a text string with another text string.Syntax:

Examples■ The following function returns "Second Quarter Results" :

■ The following function returns "Shipment 45, Bin 52" :

See also• REPLACE (page 272)• TRIM (page 280).

SUMReturns the sum of the specified numbers.Syntax:


■ The following function returns 4000 when each cell in the range contains 1000:

See also• AVERAGE (page 243)• COUNT (page 247)• COUNTA (page 247)• PRODUCT (page 270)• SUMSQ (page 279).

SUMIFReturns the sum of the specified cells based on the given criteria.Syntax:

SUBSTITUTE(text , old_text , new_text [, instance ])

where text is a text string that contains the text to

replace. You can also specify a reference to a cell that contains text.

old_text is the text string to be replacednew_text is the replacement textinstance specifies the occurrence of old_text

to replace. If this argument is omitted, every instance of old_text is replaced.

SUBSTITUTE("First Quarter Results","First","Second")

SUBSTITUTE("Shipment 45,Bin 45","45","52",2)

SUM(number_list )


separated by commas.The list can contain numbers, logical values, text representations of numbers, or a reference to a range containing those values. Error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers return errors.If a range reference is included in the list, text, logical expressions, and empty cells in the range are ignored.

SUM(1000,2000,3000)

SUM(A10:D10)

SUMIF( range , criteria [, sum_range ])

where range is the range of cells you want

evaluatedcriteria is a number, expression, or text that

defines which cells are added. For example, criteria can be expressed as 15, "15" , ">15 " or "cars" .

sum_range(optional)

is the actual cells to sum. These cells are only summed if their corresponding cells in range match the criteria . If this argument is omitted, the cells in range are summed.


UM

-007

0-A

0

See also• AVERAGE (page 243)• COUNT (page 247)• COUNTA (page 247)• COUNTIF (page 248)• PRODUCT (page 270)• SUM (page 278).

SUMSQSquares each of the supplied numbers and returns the sum of the squares.Syntax:


See also SUM (page 278).

SYDReturns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the sum-of-years method. This depreciation method uses an accelerated rate, where the greatest depreciation occurs early in the useful life of the asset.Syntax:


See also• DDB (page 250)• SLN (page 277)• VDB (page 283).

TANReturns the tangent of the specified angle.Syntax:



See also• ATANH (page 242)• ATAN2 (page 242)• PI (page 269)• TANH (page 279).

TANHReturns the hyperbolic tangent of a number.Syntax:

Examples■ The following function returns -0.96 :


See also• ATANH (page 242)• COSH (page 247)• SINH (page 277)• TAN (page 279).

SUMSQ(number_list )


separated by commas.The list can contain numbers, logical values, text representations of numbers, or a reference to a range containing those values.Error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers return errors.If a range reference is included in the list, text, logical expressions, and empty cells in the range are ignored.

SUMSQ(9,10,11)

SYD(cost , salvage , life , period )



depreciation. The time units used to determine per and life must match.

SYD(10000,1000,7,3)

TAN(number )

where number is the angle in radians. To convert a

number expressed as degrees to radians, multiply the degrees by PI()/180.

TAN(0.645)

TAN(45*PI()/180)

TANH(number )


TANH(-2)

TANH(1.2)

: 279

UM

-007

0-A

0

TEXTReturns a number as text, using the specified formatting.Syntax:


■ The following function returns 10/19/94 :

See also• DOLLAR (page 251)• FIXED (page 253)• VALUE (page 282).

TIMEReturns a serial number (see NOW) for the supplied time.Syntax:



See also• HOUR (page 255)• MINUTE (page 265)• NOW (page 266)• SECOND (page 276)• TIMEVALUE (page 280).

TIMEVALUEReturns a serial number (see NOW) for the supplied text representation of time.Syntax:



See also• HOUR (page 255)• MINUTE (page 265)• NOW (page 266)• SECOND (page 276)• TIME (page 280).

TODAYReturns the current date as a serial number (see NOW).Syntax:

This function is updated only when the worksheet is recalculated.

See also• DATE (page 248)• DAY (page 249)• NOW (page 266).

TRIMRemoves all spaces from text except single spaces between words.Syntax:

Text that is imported from another environment may require this function.

TEXT(number , format )

where number is a ny value, a formula that evaluates to a

number, or a reference to a cell that contains a value

format is a string representing a number format. The string can be any valid format string including "General" , "M/DD/YY" , or "H:MM AM/PM" . The format must be surrounded by a set of double quotation marks. Asterisks cannot be included in format .

TEXT(123.62,"0.000")

TEXT(34626.2,"MM/DD/YY")

TIME( hour , minute , second )

where hour is a number from 0 to 23minute is a number from 0 to 59second is a number from 0 to 59

TIME(12,26,24)

TIME(1,43,34)

TIMEVALUE(text )

where text is a time in text format

TIMEVALUE("1:43:43 am")

TIMEVALUE("14:10:07")

TODAY()

TRIM( text )

where text is any text string or a reference to a cell that

contains a text string


UM

-007

0-A

0

Example■ The following function returns Level 3, Gate 45 :

See also• CLEAN (page 246)• MID (page 264)• REPLACE (page 272)• SUBSTITUTE (page 278).

TRUEReturns the logical value True . This function always requires the trailing parentheses.Syntax:

You can also type True directly into a worksheet cell or formula.

See also FALSE (page 252).

TRUNCTruncates a given number to an integer.Syntax:

TRUNC removes the fractional part of a number to the specified precision without rounding the number.



See also• CEILING (page 245)• FLOOR (page 254)• INT (page 256)• MOD (page 265)• ROUND (page 274).

TYPEReturns the argument type of a given expression.Syntax:

The valid values returned by this argument are:

Examples■ The following function returns 1 if cell A1 contains a number:


See also• ISBLANK (page 258)• ISERR (page 258)• ISERROR (page 258)• ISLOGICAL (page 258)• ISNA (page 259)• ISNONTEXT (page 259)• ISNUMBER (page 259)• ISREF (page 260)• ISTEXT (page 260).

UPPERChanges the characters in a specified string to uppercase characters.Syntax:

Numeric characters in the string are not changed.

TRIM(" Level 3, Gate 45 ")

TRUE()

TRUNC(number [, precision ])

where number is any valueprecision(optional)

is the number of decimal places allowed in the truncated number. Omitting this argument assumes a precision of 0.

TRUNC(123.456,2)

TRUNC(9899.435,–2)

TYPE(expression )


1 Number2 Text string4 Logical value16 Error value

TYPE(A1)

TYPE("Customer")

UPPER(text )


: 281

UM

-007

0-A

0

Examples■ The following function returns 3RD QUARTER:

■ The following function returns JOHN DOE:

See also• LOWER (page 262)• PROPER (page 270).

USDOLLARReturns a specified number as text using the USDollar format and a supplied precision. Omitting the precision argument assumes two decimal places.Syntax:

See also DOLLAR (page 251).

VALUEReturns specified text as a number.Syntax:



See also• DOLLAR (page 251)• FIXED (page 253)• TEXT (page 280).

VARReturns the variance of a population based on a sample.Syntax:


See also• STDEV (page 277)• STDEVP (page 277)• VARP (page 282).

VARPReturns the variance of a population based on an entire population of values.Syntax:


See also• STDEV (page 277)• STDEVP (page 277)• VAR (page 282).

UPPER("3rd Quarter")

UPPER("JOHN DOE")

USDOLLAR(number [, precision ])

where number is a number, a formula that evaluates

to a number, or a reference to a cell that contains a number

precision(optional)

is a value representing the number of decimal places to the right of the decimal point. Omitting this argument assumes two decimal places.

VALUE(text )

where text is any text string, a formula that evaluates to a

text string, or a cell reference that contains a text string. You can also specify a date or time in a recognizable format (for example, M/DD/YY for dates or H:MM AM/PM for time). If the format is not recognized, #VALUE! is returned.

VALUE(9800)

VALUE("123")

VAR(number_list )



VAR(4.0,3.0,3.0,3.5,2.5,4.0,3.5)

VARP(number_list )



VARP(4.0,3.0,3.0,3.5,2.5,4.0,3.5)


UM

-007

0-A

0

VDBReturns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using a variable method of depreciation.Syntax:


See also• DDB (page 250)• SLN (page 277)• SYD (page 279).

VLOOKUPSearches the first column of a table for a value and returns the contents of a cell in that table that corresponds to the location of the search value.Syntax:

VLOOKUP compares the information in the first column of search_range to the supplied search_item . When a match is found, information located in the same row and supplied column (column_index ) is returned.If search_item cannot be found in the first column of search_range , the largest value that is less than search_item is used. When search_item is less than the smallest value in the first column of the search_range , #REF! is returned.

Examples

■ For the worksheet shown in Figure 305, the following function returns $28,700 :

VDB(cost , salvage , life , start_period ,end_period [, factor ][, method ])

where cost is the initial cost of the assetsalvage is the salvage value of the assetlife is the number of periods in the

useful life of the assetstart_period is the beginning period for which

to calculate the depreciation. The time units used to determine start_period and life must match.

end_period is the ending period for which to calculate the depreciation. The time units used to determine end_period and life must match.

factor(optional)

is the rate at which the balance declines. Omitting this argument assumes a default of 2, which is the double-declining balance factor.

method(optional)

is a logical value that determines if you want to switch to straight-line depreciation when depreciation is greater than the declining balance calculation. Use True to maintain declining balance calculation; use False or omit the argument to switch to straight-line depreciation calculation.

VDB(10000,1000,7,3,4)

VLOOKUP(search_item , search_range ,column_index )

where search_item is a value, text string, or reference

to a cell containing a value that is matched against data in the top row of search_range

search_range is the reference of the range (table) to be searched. The cells in the first column of search_range can contain numbers, text, or logical values. The contents of the first column must be in ascending order (for example, -2, -1, 0, 2..., A through Z, False, True). Text searches are not case-sensitive.

column_index is the column in the search range from which the matching value is returned. column_index can be a number from 1 to the number of rows in the search range. If column_index is less than 1, #VALUE! is returned. When column_index is greater than the number of rows in the table, #REF! is returned.

VLOOKUP("Clark",A2:E9,4)

FIGURE 305 VLOOKUP example

: 283

UM

-007

0-A

0


See also• HLOOKUP (page 254)• INDEX (page 256)• LOOKUP (page 262)• MATCH (page 263).

WEEKDAYReturns the day of the week that corresponds to a supplied date.Syntax:

WEEKDAY returns a number ranging from 1 (Sunday) to 7 (Saturday).

Examples■ The following function returns 1, indicating Sunday:

■ The following function returns 3, indicating Tuesday:

See also• DAY (page 249)• NOW (page 266)• TEXT (page 280)• TODAY (page 280).

YEARReturns the year that corresponds to the supplied date.Syntax:



See also• DAY (page 249)• HOUR (page 255)• MINUTE (page 265)• MONTH (page 266)• NOW (page 266)• SECOND (page 276)• TODAY (page 280)• WEEKDAY (page 284).

VLOOKUP("Lee",A2:E9,3)

WEEKDAY(serial_number )

where serial_number is the date as a serial number (see

NOW) or as text (for example, 06-21-94 or 21-Jun-94)

WEEKDAY(34399.92)

WEEKDAY("06/21/94")

YEAR(serial_number )

where serial_number The date as a serial number (see

NOW) or as text (for example, 06-21-94 or 21-Jun-94)

YEAR(34328)

YEAR("06/21/94")


UM

-007

0-A

0

Aumymumym

BCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

NSNS

IndexSymbols" " (null field) 187, 188.csv file (comma-separated-variable file)

Save Screen Buffer As 93unload to file 65

.dcp file (DeCipher Plus data file) 104, 115

.dlr file (DeLogger replay file)Analysis > Load Session From File 116Play command 40Spread > Load Session From File 104, 115unload to replay file 65

.dlw file (project master file) 22, 208, 209and AutoRun 179

.dx8 (dataTaker unload files) 40

.dxd file (DT800 logged alarms file) 104, 115

.dxd file (DT800 logged data file) 104, 115

.dxu (dataTaker unload files) 40

.rpt file (reports file) 200/ character (in DDE ChannelName item) 223@CurrentSessionID 57, 202@PreviousSessionID 57, 202

Numerics2000 (Windows operating system) 235

AAbout DeLogger (Help command) 135ABS (worksheet function) 240ACOS (worksheet function) 240ACOSH (worksheet function) 240Action (Reports > Log Files command) 128actions 55

action log file report 128, 199AutoRun (startup action) 179chaining 56, 199, 202creating and editing 55end_of_unload 64macro commands 184

placeholders 56saving 208, 209toolbar 171, 172triggers 55using actions to run reports 199, 200using actions to web-publish reports 232using DDE to request action lists 222, 224using DDE to run actions within DeLogger Pro 222, 224using mimic buttons to trigger actions 101

Actions (Configuration command) 55ADDRESS (worksheet function) 241administration database

See databasesadvise (DDE)

list 59, 224loop 222

alarmsexternal 56, 182internal 56, 183logging

setting default 52, 53triggering 55, 182

Alignment (Analysis > Format command) 119Alignment (Form > Format command) 79Alignment (Spread > Format command) 109Allow Compressed Mode (Chart command) 89analysis menu

See menus — Analysisanalysis window

See windows — AnalysisAND (worksheet function) 241Annunciator (Mimic command) 99appearance, customizing 29Arc Meters (Mimic command) 98archive databases 205, 226Arrange Channels (DT5/6xx Program command) 125Arrange Icons (Window command) 134array

for store-type virtual channels 215maximum size 216

Index 285

UM

-007

ANumSymNumSym


0-A

0

resetting store channel 216rolling store channel 216size 217

art (Picture folder for clip art) 18, 101ASC (worksheet function) 241ASIN (worksheet function) 241ASINH (worksheet function) 242ATAN (worksheet function) 242ATAN2 (worksheet function) 242ATANH (worksheet function) 242Attach Action (Form > Object command) 82Auto Re-Scale (Chart command) 89automatic

saves 208AutoRun startup action 179auxiliary lines

curve 87AVERAGE (worksheet function) 243

BBack One (Mimic > Arrange command) 102Background Colour (Analysis command) 118Background Colour (Form command) 78Background Colour (Spread command) 107background, customizing 29bitmap file

background image 29splash screen image 30

Border (Analysis > Format command) 119Border (Form > Format command) 80Border (Spread > Format command) 109Bring To Front (Mimic > Arrange command) 102buffer

and Unload command 66buffer (text window screen buffer) 93, 96busy indicator 170button, follow mode 86, 139Buttons (Mimic command) 101

Ccalculated-type virtual channels 218Calculation (Analysis command) 121Calculation (Form command) 82Calculation (Spread command) 111CALL (worksheet function) 244Capture Data To Disk (Text > Display Screen command) 92capture screen 239Cascade (Window command) 134CEILING (worksheet function) 245chaining actions 56ChannelID (in ChannelName DDE item) 223ChannelName (DDE item) 223

channelsprimary 212virtual

See virtual channelsCHAR (worksheet function) 245chart menu

See menus — chartChart Properties (Chart command) 86Chart Type (Spread command) 107chart window

See windows — chartCHOOSE (worksheet function) 245CLEAN (worksheet function) 246Clear (Chart command) 89Clear (dataTaker menu command) 67Clear (Edit command) 35Clear Entry Buffer (Text > Entry Screen command) 96Clear Screen Buffer (Text > Display Screen command) 93CLEAR_CHART macro 189client (DDE)

See DDEclip art 18, 101Close (File command) 23CLOSE_WINDOW macro 189CODE (worksheet function) 246COLUMN (worksheet function) 246Column Template (Form command) 78COLUMNS (worksheet function) 246Command Edit Mode (Text > Entry Screen command) 94command-line utilities (dlr2dlr.exe and dlr2txt.exe) 207commands

AnalysisBackground Colour 118Calculation 121Define Name 122Export Sheet 117Format

Alignment 119Border 119Custom Number 120Date (yyyy/mm/dd) 120Default Font 120Fixed 120Fixed (1) to (5) 120Font 119General 119Pattern 119Percent % 120Scientific 120Time (hh:mm:ss) 120

Import Sheet 117Insert Page Break 122Load Into External Spreadsheet 117Load Session From Database 116Load Session From File 116Properties 123Publish 123Remove Page Break 123Set Print Range From Selection 122Show Gridlines 118Show Headers 118


UM

-007

0-A

0

Aumymumym


NSNS

Sort 121Update Chart 117View Toolbar 118

ChartAllow Compressed Mode 89Auto Re-Scale 89Chart Properties 86Clear 89Edit Axis 89Edit Mode 85Pause 85Properties 90Publish 90Rotate 89Scale Text Down 90Scale Text Up 90Select Channels 88View Toolbar 90XY Chart 89

ConfigurationActions 55Data Hub Channels 59Database Channel Logging Sessions 60Defaults 52Reports 57Web Publish 58

ConnectionsConnect 38Disconnect 39Manual Integrity Check 39Play 40Properties 42

Database Reports 57, 127, 129, 201, 202dataTaker

Clear 67Data Logging 63Job To Run On Hard Reset 68Memory Card 71Profile 73Quit Unload 66Reset 68Run 69Run Card Program 72Status 70Test 71Unload 64Upgrade Firmware 76

EditClear 35Copy 34Copy Down 35Copy Right 35Cut 34Delete 35Find 35Go To Matching Brace 36Insert 35Paste 34Paste Values 34Redo 34Replace 35

Select All 36Undo 34

FileClose 23Customize 29Exit 33Open 22Page Setup 25Performance 24Print 26Print Preview 27Print Setup 28Project Properties 23recent project files (list) 33Register Product 33Save Project 23

FormBackground Colour 78Calculation 82Column Template 78Define Name 83Edit Mode 77Format

Alignment 79Border 80Custom Number 81Date (yyyy/mm/dd) 81Date/Time (yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss.000) 81Default Font 81Fixed 80Fixed (1) to (5) 80Font 79General 80Locale Date/Time 81Pattern 80Percent % 80Scientific 80Time (hh:mm:ss) 81

Insert Page Break 83Object

Attach Action 82Insert Button 81Insert Checkbox 81Options 82

Pause 77Properties 84Publish 84Remove Page Break 84Reset High 78Reset Low 78Set Print Range From Selection 83Show Gridlines 78Show Headers 78Validation Rule 82View Toolbar 79

HelpAbout DeLogger 135

MimicAnnunciator 99Arc Meters 98Arrange

Back One 102

Index 287

UM

-007

ANumSymNumSym


0-A

0

Bring To Front 102Forward One 102Send To Back 102

Buttons 101Delete 103Digital 100Edit Mode 102Edit Panel 102LED Indicators 100Lock 103Needle Meters 98Pause 101Picture 101Pie Meters 98Properties 103Publish 103Scale Text Down 103Scale Text Up 103Temperature Meter 99View Toolbar 103

ProgramArrange Channels 125Edit Mode 125Next Analogue Channel 125Next Digital Channel 125Next HSC Channel 125Properties 125Send To Card On Connection 124Send To Connection 124Send To Connection And Save As RESET Job 126View Toolbar 125

ReportsAlarms

Full 127Month To Date 127Today 127Week To Date 127

Database Reports 129Errors

Full 128Month To Date 128Today 128Week To Date 128

Log FilesAction 128Schedule 128

SpreadBackground Colour 107Calculation 111Chart Type 107Define Name 112Export Sheet 106Format

Alignment 109Border 109Custom Number 110Date (yyyy/mm/dd) 110Default Font 111Fixed 110Fixed (1) to (5) 110Font 109General 110

Pattern 110Percent % 110Scientific 110Time (hh:mm:ss) 110

Import Sheet 106Insert Page Break 113Load Into External Spreadsheet 106Load Session From Database 105Load Session From File 105Properties 114Publish 113Remove Page Break 113Set Print Range From Selection 113Show Gridlines 108Show Headers 108Sort 112Update Chart 107View Toolbar 108

TextDisplay Screen

Capture Data To Disk 92Clear Screen Buffer 93Display Data As 92Filter Data 91Font 92Insert Text 93Pause 93Properties 94Save Screen Buffer As 93View Toolbar 93

Entry ScreenClear Entry Buffer 96Command Edit Mode 94Go To Matching Brace 96Load DLP Text 95Open Text File 95Save Text File 95Send Highlighted 95Send Line 95Send Program 95Set User Buttons 96User Buttons 96View Toolbar 96

Splitter View 96Tools

Internal Cards 130Memory Cards 130

ViewProject Bar 37Show Alarm Events 37Show Error Events 37Show Message Events 37Status Bar 37Toolbars

Configuration 37Connection 37dataTaker 37System 37

View Events 37Window

Arrange Icons 134Cascade 134More Windows 134


UM

-007

0-A

0

Aumymumym


NSNS

Tile Horizontal 134Tile Vertical 134

comma-separated-variable fileSave Screen Buffer As 93unload to file 65

CONCATENATE (worksheet function) 246Configuration (View > Toolbars command) 37Configuration menu

See menusconfiguring

data hub connection defaults 54confirmation level (message display) 37, 167Connect (Connections command) 38CONNECT_PORT macro 184CONNECT_SITE macro 184Connection (View > Toolbars command) 37connections

database connection 42, 50external (in Extras — Data Site) 38Force the Connect (Extras) 38internal (in Extras — Data Site) 38macros for managing connections 184menu

See menusmodel-specific 40network connection

Lantronix adaptor 45TCP/IP 45UDP 45

play connectionSee connections — replay connection

replay connection 40control panel

replay 41conversation (DDE)

See DDECopy (Edit command) 34Copy Down (Edit command) 35Copy Right (Edit command) 35COS (worksheet function) 247COSH (worksheet function) 247COUNT (worksheet function) 247COUNTA (worksheet function) 247COUNTIF (worksheet function) 248Crystal Reports

formula 57, 202software 199, 201

Crystal Reports Engine 199preferred version 202

current database logging session 57, 202Custom Number (Analysis > Format command) 120Custom Number (Form > Format command) 81Custom Number (Spread > Format command) 110Customize (File command) 29customizing DeLogger’s appearance 29

background 29splash screen 30system tray icon 31toolbars 31

window tabs 30workspace state 32

Cut (Edit command) 34

Ddata

historical 40defined 40replaying 41

input activity indicator 170invalid 52, 53primary 212replay 41

displayed by mimics 97reporting on 199

replay(Extras) 40site (Extras) 38valid 52, 53virtual 212, 215

data hub 210activity indicator 170alarm indication

annunciator mimic 99digital mimic 100

and connection types (Fig.) 42and manual integrity check 39channel details saved in .dlw file 22, 208configuration saved in admin database 209, 210configuring 59

setting channel properties 213configuring connection defaults 54DDE advise loop 222Extras 62

Data Hub Channels (Configuration command) 59Data Logging (dataTaker menu command) 63data point symbols (chart window) 87Data Site (Extras) 38database

sessionslogging 60unload 64

Database Channel Logging Sessions (Configuration command) 60Database Reports (Reports command) 57, 127, 129, 202Database Reports command 201databases 226

administration databaseand secondary reports 200manual saves 208storing configuration settings

reports 57storing connections 42storing database channel logging sessions 60storing secondary reports 200

alternative 23, 227archive databases 205, 226connection 42, 50data database

Index 289

UM

-007

ANumSymNumSym


0-A

0

DDE requests 222importing into spreadsheet window 104, 115reports 127, 199

alarms 127database 129, 200Schedule and action log files 128secondary reports 200

database connection 42, 50dialog box controls (Fig.) 42five data databases 205, 226FoxPro 203, 226historical databases 205, 226Load Session From Database

into analysis window 116into spreadsheed window 105

reportsSee reports — Database Reports command

sessionscurrent (@CurrentSessionID) 57, 202previous (@PreviousSessionID) 57, 202

dataTakermenu

See menusunload files (.dx8 and .dxu) 40

dataTaker (View > Toolbars command) 37DATATAKER_HALT macro 185DATATAKER_LOG macro 185DATATAKER_RUN macro 185DATE (worksheet function) 248Date (yyyy/mm/dd) (Analysis > Format command) 120Date (yyyy/mm/dd) (Form > Format command) 81Date (yyyy/mm/dd) (Spread > Format command) 110Date/Time (yyyy/mm/dd hh:m:ss.000) (Form > Format command) 81DATEVALUE (worksheet function) 248DAY (worksheet function) 249DAYS360 (worksheet function) 249DB (worksheet function) 250DBCS (worksheet function) 250DDB (worksheet function) 250DDE 222

adviselist 59, 224loop 222

and Schedule utility (running actions) 197ChannelName item 223client 222conversation 222item 223

ChannelName 223ChannelID 223ScheduleID 223SiteName 223

multiple channels in Excel 225server 222service name 223service name (DELOGGER) 223spaces in messages 223topic 223

Default Font (Analysis > Format command) 120

Default Font (Form > Format command) 81Default Font (Spread > Format command) 111Defaults (Configuration command) 52Define Name (Analysis command) 122Define Name (Form command) 83Define Name (Spread command) 112DELAY macro 195Delete (Edit command) 35Delete (Mimic command) 103DeLogger

installingSee the Getting Started… guide supplied with your dataTaker

introduction 4DELOGGER (DDE service name) 223DeLogger Pro

installingSee the Getting Started… guide supplied with your dataTaker

DeLogger replay fileAnalysis > Load Session From File 116Play command 40Spread > Load Session From File 104, 115unload to replay file 65

Digital (Mimic command) 100Disconnect (Connections command) 39DISCONNECT macro 185Display Data As (Text > Display Screen command) 92display screen (text window) 91dlr2dlr.exe replay file utility 207dlr2txt.exe replay file utility 207dlw file (project master file) 22document windows

See windowsDOLLAR (worksheet function) 251DOS prompt 207Dynamic Data Exchange

See DDE

EEdit Axis (Chart command) 89Edit menu

See menus — EditEdit Mode (Chart command) 85Edit Mode (DT5/6xx Program command) 125Edit Mode (Form command) 77Edit Mode (Mimic command) 102Edit Panel (Mimic command) 102end_of_unload (action) 64entry screen (text window) 94ERROR.TYPE (worksheet function) 251errors

loggingsetting default 52, 53

reports 199EVEN (worksheet function) 252event logs window

See windows


UM

-007

0-A

0

Aumymumym


NSNS

EXACT (worksheet function) 252exceedency (test for virtual channel PARTIALLY_INVALID or INVALID status) 217Excel (software)

and Delogger2 macro files 224and VBA macros 224as analysis window data destination 117as DDE client 222, 224as report tool 199as spreadsheet window data destination 106as spreadsheet window data source 104, 115formula bar (inserting DDE link text) 225inserting DDE link text 225similarity to Formula One Workbook Designer 138

Excel Delogger2 macro files 224Exit (File command) 33EXP (worksheet function) 252export

folder 18, 106, 117Export Sheet (Analysis command) 117Export Sheet (Spread command) 106external alarms 56, 182external connections (in Extras — Data Site) 38Extras

Data Hub 62Data Site 38Force the Connect 38Historical Data, Replay Data 40

FF2 key (connect shortcut) 38F5 key (data hub channels shortcut) 59FACT (worksheet function) 252FALSE (worksheet function) 252file

menuSee menus

project master file (.dlw file) 22, 208, 209and administration database 226and AutoRun 179

replaySee replay — file

Filter Data (Text > Display Screen command) 91Find (Edit command) 35FIND (worksheet function) 253FINDB (worksheet function) 253firmware

folder 18, 76Fixed (1) to (5) (Analysis > Format command) 120Fixed (1) to (5) (Form > Format command) 80Fixed (1) to (5) (Spread > Format command) 110Fixed (Analysis > Format command) 120Fixed (Form > Format command) 80Fixed (Spread > Format command) 110FIXED (worksheet function) 253flag

channel logging mode defaults 53Flags column in data hub dialog box 59

FLOOR (worksheet function) 254folder 18

Export 18, 106, 117Firmware 18, 76Grab 18, 239installation 18, 22MT (multi-thread) 76Picture (clip art) 18, 101Project 18, 22structure for web publishing (Fig.) 230

follow mode button 86, 139Font (Analysis > Format command) 119Font (Form > Format command) 79Font (Spread > Format command) 109Font (Text > Display Screen command) 92Force the Connect (Extras) 38form menu

See menus — Formform window

See windows — formformat

ISO 81, 106, 110, 117, 120replay (text window display screen) 92

formulaCrystal Reports 57, 202Excel formula bar (inserting DDE link text) 225

Formula One Workbook Designer (software) 138Formula One Workbook Designer window

See windows — Formula One Workbook DesignerForward One (Mimic > Arrange command) 102FoxPro 203, 226Full (Reports > Alarms command) 127Full (Reports > Errors command) 128functions

for store channels 217See worksheet — functions

FV (worksheet function) 254

GGeneral (Analysis > Format command) 119General (Form > Format command) 80General (Spread > Format command) 110GET_TEXT macro 194GET_VALUE macro 194Getting Started… (user guides) 4global formulas 202

@CurrentSessionID 57, 202@PreviousSessionID 57, 202in report Parameter fields 57

Go To Matching Brace (Edit command) 36Go To Matching Brace (Text > Entry Screen command) 96Grab folder 18, 239

Index 291

UM

-007

ANumSymNumSym


0-A

0

HHelp menu

See menushistorical data 40

replaying 41Historical Data, Replay Data (Extras) 40historical database 205, 226HLOOKUP (worksheet function) 254HOUR (worksheet function) 255hub

See data hubHUB_SAVE macro 191

Iicon, system tray 31IF (worksheet function) 255image

background 29splash screen 30

Import Sheet (Analysis command) 117Import Sheet (Spread command) 106INCREMENT_SESSION_SUFFIX macro 193INDEX (worksheet function) 256indicator

data hub activity 170data input activity 170DeLogger busy 170

INDIRECT (worksheet function) 256input activity indicator 170Insert (Edit command) 35Insert Button (Form > Object command) 81Insert Checkbox (Form > Object command) 81Insert Page Break (Analysis command) 122Insert Page Break (Form command) 83Insert Page Break (Spread command) 113Insert Text (Text > Display Screen command) 93installation folder 18, 22installing DeLogger 4

See the Getting Started… guide supplied with your dataTakerWindows NT, 2000, XP 235

INT (worksheet function) 256integrity check 39internal

alarms 56connections (in Extras — Data Site) 38

internal alarms 183Internal Cards (Tools command) 130Internet publishing

See publishingintranet 58, 229, 231

defined 229publishing (local publishing) 230versus report publishing 232

intranet publishingSee publishing

invalid dataand alarm test 215global logging session settings 52, 53setting chart window properties 90setting form window properties 84setting mimic window properties 103setting text display screen properties 94

invalid data (virtual channel exceedency test) 217IPMT (worksheet function) 257IRR (worksheet function) 257ISBLANK (worksheet function) 258ISERR (worksheet function) 258ISERROR (worksheet function) 258ISLOGICAL (worksheet function) 258ISNA (worksheet function) 259ISNONTEXT (worksheet function) 259ISNUMBER (worksheet function) 259ISO format 81, 106, 110, 117, 120ISREF (worksheet function) 260ISTEXT (worksheet function) 260item (DDE)

See DDEiteration

Analysis > Calculation 121Form > Calculation 82, 83Spread > Calculation 111

iUser utility 207, 235

JJob To Run On Hard Reset (dataTaker menu command) 68

Kkeyboard shortcuts 239

F2 (connect) 38F5 (data hub channels) 59summary table 239

LLantronix adaptor (for DT5/6xx network connection) 45LED Indicators (Mimic command) 100LEFT (worksheet function) 260LEFTB (worksheet function) 260LEN (worksheet function) 261LENB (worksheet function) 261LN (worksheet function) 261Load DLP Text (Text > Entry Screen command) 95Load Into External Spreadsheet (Analysis command) 117Load Into External Spreadsheet (Spread command) 106Load Session From Database (Analysis command) 116Load Session From Database (Spread command) 105Load Session From File (Analysis command) 116Load Session From File (Spread command) 105Locale Date/Time (Form > Format command) 81location of new mimics 97Lock (Mimic command) 103


UM

-007

0-A

0

Aumymumym


NSNS

Lock Job (data hub option) 59, 211, 212LOG (worksheet function) 261LOG10 (worksheet function) 261logging

alarmsalarm reports 199setting default 52, 53triggering actions 53

changed values only 53channel logging mode 52, 53data database 209

size and performance 227errors

error reports 199setting default 52, 53

individual schedules 63ON/OFF (Data Logging command) 63session 40, 60sessions 60

configuring 60database connections 50macros (for managing database channel logging sessions) 192saved in admin database 209

status 63flag 53

valid/invalid data 52, 53LOOKUP (worksheet function) 262LOWER (worksheet function) 262

MMacro Builder (Fig.) 56, 181macros

action commandsSee actions — macro commands

CLEAR_CHART 189CLOSE_WINDOW 189CONNECT_PORT 184CONNECT_SITE 184DATATAKER_HALT 185DATATAKER_LOG 185DATATAKER_RUN 185DELAY 195DISCONNECT 185Excel Delogger2 macro files 224for commanding a dataTaker 185for interacting with a user 194for managing connections 184for managing database channel logging sessions 192for managing projects 190for managing windows 189for unloading data from a dataTaker 187GET_TEXT 194GET_VALUE 194HUB_SAVE 191INCREMENT_SESSION_SUFFIX 193Macro Builder 56, 181MESSAGE_BOX 195MESSAGE_LINE 195

miscellaneous 195OPEN_WINDOW 189PRINT_CHART 189PROJECT_CLOSE 191PROJECT_LOAD 190PROJECT_SAVE 190PUBLISH 190SEND_FILE 186SEND_PROGRAM 186SEND_TEXT 186SESSION 192SESSION_START 192SET_SESSION_NAME 193SET_SESSION_SUFFIX 193SHOW_WINDOW 190UNLOAD_SITE 187UNLOAD_SITE_DB 187UNLOAD_SITE_FILE 188UNLOAD_SITE_FILE_FAST 188WAIT 188

main window (project window) 136See also windows

manualintegrity check 39saves 208

Manual Integrity Check (command) 39Manual Integrity Check (Connections command) 39MATCH (worksheet function) 263MAX (worksheet function) 263Memory Card (dataTaker menu command) 71Memory Cards (Tools command) 130menus

Analysis menu 115Chart menu 85Configuration menu 51Connections menu 38dataTaker menu 63Edit menu 34File menu 21Form menu 77Help menu 135Mimic menu 97Program menu — DT5/6xx 124Program menu — DT8xx 126Reports menu 127Spread menu 104Taskbar menu 135Text menu 91Tools menu 130View menu 37Window menu 134

message display confirmation level 37, 167MESSAGE_BOX macro 195MESSAGE_LINE macro 195MID (worksheet function) 264MIDB (worksheet function) 264

Index 293

UM

-007

ANumSymNumSym


0-A

0

mimiclocation of new mimics 97menu

See menus — Mimicmoving 97nudging 97

nudge distance 97resizing 97selecting 97window

See windows — MimicMIN (worksheet function) 264MINUTE (worksheet function) 265MIRR (worksheet function) 265MOD (worksheet function) 265model-specific

connections 40replay files 40

Modem Manager MM-01 221modems

Modem Manager MM-01 221modes

follow mode (chart window) 86, 139MONTH (worksheet function) 266Month To Date (Reports > Alarms command) 127Month To Date (Reports > Errors command) 128More Windows (Window command) 134moving mimic 97MT (multi-thread) folder 76multiple channels in Excel (DDE) 225

NNA (worksheet function) 266Needle Meters (Mimic command) 98new mimics, location 97Next Analogue Channel 125Next Digital Channel (DT5/6xx Program command) 125Next HSC Channel (DT5/6xx Program command) 125NOT (worksheet function) 266Notepad (software) 53NOW (worksheet function) 266NPER (worksheet function) 267NPV (worksheet function) 267NT (Windows operating system) 235nudging mimics 97null field ("") 187, 188number, serial 266

OODBC 199ODD (worksheet function) 268OFFSET (worksheet function) 268OLE for Process Control (OPC) 233OPC 233Open (File command) 22Open Text File (Text > Entry Screen command) 95

OPEN_WINDOW macro 189Options (Form > Object command) 82OR (worksheet function) 269

PPage Setup (File command) 25panels

See mimicspartially invalid data (virtual channel exceedency test) 217partially-invalid data

and alarm test 215and resetting store channels 216setting chart window properties 90setting form window properties 84setting mimic window properties 103setting text display screen properties 94

Paste (Edit command) 34Paste Values (Edit command) 34Pattern (Analysis > Format command) 119Pattern (Form > Format command) 80Pattern (Spread > Format command) 110Pause (Chart command) 85Pause (Form command) 77Pause (Mimic command) 101Pause (Text > Display Screen command) 93Percent % (Analysis > Format command) 120Percent % (Form > Format command) 80Percent % (Spread > Format command) 110Performance (File command) 24PI (worksheet function) 269Picture (Mimic command) 101Picture folder (clip art) 18, 101Pie Meters (Mimic command) 98placeholders (macro commands) 56Play (Connections command) 40play (replay) connection 40PMT (worksheet function) 269PPMT (worksheet function) 270previous database logging session 57, 202primary channels 212Print (File command) 26Print Preview (File command) 27Print Setup (File command) 28PRINT_CHART macro 189PRODUCT (worksheet function) 270Profile (dataTaker menu command) 73program builder windows

See windows — program builderProgram menu

See menus — Programproject 13

folder 18, 22master file (.dlw file) 22, 208, 209

and administration database 226and AutoRun 179

windowSee windows


UM

-007

0-A

0

Aumymumym


NSNS

window (main window) 136Project Bar (View command) 37Project Properties (File command) 23project window

See windows — projectPROJECT_CLOSE macro 191PROJECT_LOAD macro 190PROJECT_SAVE macro 190projects

macros for managing projects 190prompt, DOS 207PROPER (worksheet function) 270Properties (Analysis command) 123Properties (Chart command) 90Properties (Connections command) 42Properties (DT5/6xx Program command) 125Properties (Form command) 84Properties (Mimic command) 103Properties (Spread command) 114Properties (Text > Display Screen command) 94Publish (Analysis command) 123Publish (Chart command) 90Publish (Form command) 84Publish (Mimic command) 103Publish (Spread command) 113PUBLISH macro 190publishing

folder structure (Fig.) 230Internet (WWW) 231intranet (local) 230

PV (worksheet function) 271

QQuery 202Quit Unload (dataTaker menu command) 66

RRAND (worksheet function) 271RATE (worksheet function) 271recalculation

Analysis > Calculation 121Form > Calculation 82Spread > Calculation 111synchronised update of calculated (virtual) channel 219

recent project files (list on File menu) 33Redo (Edit command) 34Regedit

enabling alarm mail support 237modifing auto-answer modem action response delay 48modifing default web publishing folder locations 230modifing OPC Server setup 234setting mimic nudge distance 97

Register Product (File command) 33REGISTER.ID (worksheet function) 272

Remove Page Break (Analysis command) 123Remove Page Break (Form command) 84Remove Page Break (Spread command) 113Replace (Edit command) 35REPLACE (worksheet function) 272REPLACEB (worksheet function) 273replay

connection 40control panel 41data (Extras) 40file

Analysis > Load Session From File 116as “session” 60Extras 40includes STATUS information 212model-specific 40Play command 40Spread > Load Session From File 104, 115unload to replay file 65utilities (dlr2dlr.exe and dlr2txt.exe) 207

format (text window display screen) 92session (Extras) 40

replay datadisplayed by mimics 97reporting on 199

reports.rpt file extension 200Database Reports (Reports command) 201Database Reports command 57, 127, 129, 202menu

See menus — Reportoverview (Fig.) 201publishing in HTML format 232running 199, 200secondary 200

Reports (Configuration command) 57REPT (worksheet function) 273Reset (dataTaker menu command) 68Reset High (Form command) 78Reset Low (Form command) 78resetting store virtual channels 216resizing mimics 97RIGHT (worksheet function) 273RIGHTB (worksheet function) 273rolling store virtual channels 216Rotate (Chart command) 89ROUND (worksheet function) 274ROUNDDOWN (worksheet function) 274ROUNDUP (worksheet function) 274ROW (worksheet function) 275ROWS (worksheet function) 275rpt file (report file) 200rulers, chart 140

enabling 86Run (dataTaker menu command) 69Run Card Program (dataTaker menu command) 72running reports 199, 200

Index 295

UM

-007

ANumSymNumSym


0-A

0

SSave Project (File command) 23Save Screen Buffer As (Text > Display Screen command) 93Save Text File (Text > Entry Screen command) 95saving

automatic saves 208manual saves 208

scale group 87Scale Text Down (Chart command) 90Scale Text Down (Mimic command) 103Scale Text Up (Chart command) 90Scale Text Up (Mimic command) 103Schedule (Reports > Log Files command) 128Schedule utility 196, 203ScheduleID (in ChannelName DDE item) 223Scientific (Analysis > Format command) 120Scientific (Form > Format command) 80Scientific (Spread > Format command) 110screen

buffer 93, 96text window display screen 91text window entry screen 94

screen captures 239scripting (actions) 55SEARCH (worksheet function) 275SEARCHB (worksheet function) 276SECOND (worksheet function) 276secondary reports 200Select All (Edit command) 36Select Channels (Chart command) 88selecting mimics 97Send Highlighted (Text > Entry Screen command) 95Send Line (Text > Entry Screen command) 95Send Program (Text > Entry Screen command) 95Send To Back (Mimic > Arrange command) 102Send To Card On Connection (DT5/6xx Program command) 124Send To Connection (DT5/6xx Program command) 124Send To Connection And Save As RESET Job (DT8xx Program command) 126SEND_FILE macro 186SEND_PROGRAM macro 186SEND_TEXT macro 186serial number 266server (DDE)

See DDEservice name

See DDESESSION macro 192SESSION_START macro 192sessions

configuring 60Load Session From Database

into analysis window 116into spreadsheed window 105

logging sessions 40, 60versus unload session 60

macros (for managing database channel logging sessions) 192replay (Extras) 40replay files as “sessions” 60unload 64unload sessions 61, 64, 66

Set Print Range From Selection (Analysis command) 122Set Print Range From Selection (Form command) 83Set Print Range From Selection (Spread command) 113Set User Buttons (Text > Entry Screen command) 96SET_SESSION_NAME macro 193SET_SESSION_SUFFIX macro 193shortcuts

F2 (connect) 38F5 (data hub channels) 59summary table 239

Show Alarm Events (View command) 37Show Error Events (View command) 37Show Gridlines (Analysis command) 118Show Gridlines (Form command) 78Show Gridlines (Spread command) 108Show Headers (Analysis command) 118Show Headers (Form command) 78Show Headers (Spread command) 108Show Message Events (View command) 37SHOW_WINDOW macro 190SIGN (worksheet function) 276SIN (worksheet function) 276SINH (worksheet function) 277site, data (Extras) 38SiteAdmin utility 203SiteName (in ChannelName DDE item) 223slash character (in DDE ChannelName item) 223slider, Confirmation Level 37, 167SLN (worksheet function) 277software

Crystal Reports 199, 201Engine 199preferred version 202

dlr2dlr.exe replay file utility 207dlr2txt.exe replay file utility 207Excel

and Delogger2 macro files 224and VBA macros 224as analysis window data destination 117as DDE client 222, 224as report tool 199as spreadsheet window data destination 106as spreadsheet window data source 104, 115inserting DDE link text 225similarity to Formula One Workbook Designer 138

Formula One Workbook Designer 138FoxPro 203, 226iUser utility 207, 235Notepad 53Regedit

enabling alarm mail support 237modifing auto-answer modem action response delay 48modifing OPC Server setup 234


UM

-007

0-A

0

Aumymumym


NSNS

modifying default web publishing folder locations 230setting mimic nudge distance 97

Schedule utility 196, 203SiteAdmin utility 203VBA 224, 225Windows 2000 235Windows NT 235Windows XP 235Word 53WordPad 53

Sort (Analysis command) 121Sort (Spread command) 112sound, startup 55, 179space character (in DDE messages) 223splash screen, customizing 30Splitter View (Text command) 96spread menu

See menus — Spreadspreadsheet window

See windows — spreadsheetSQRT (worksheet function) 277startup sound 55, 179state, workspace 32STATUS

dialog boxes 70information saved in replay file and database session 212STATUS10 24, 39, 212STATUS11 212STATUS14 24, 39, 212

statusdialog boxes 70flag 53logging 63

Status (dataTaker menu command) 70Status Bar (View command) 37STDEV (worksheet function) 277STDEVP (worksheet function) 277store-type virtual channels 216structure, web publishing folders 230SUBSTITUTE (worksheet function) 278SUM (worksheet function) 278SUMIF (worksheet function) 278SUMSQ (worksheet function) 279SYD (worksheet function) 279System (View > Toolbars command) 37system tray icon 31

Ttabs (window), customizing 30TAN (worksheet function) 279TANH (worksheet function) 279Taskbar menu

See menusTCP/IP (network connection) 45Temperature Meter (Mimic command) 99Test (dataTaker menu command) 71

TEXT (worksheet function) 280text menu

See menus — Texttext window

See windows — textTile Horizontal (Window command) 134Tile Vertical (Window command) 134Time (hh:mm:ss) (Analysis > Format command) 120Time (hh:mm:ss) (Form > Format command) 81Time (hh:mm:ss) (Spread > Format command) 110TIME (worksheet function) 280TIMEVALUE (worksheet function) 280Today (Reports > Alarms command) 127Today (Reports > Errors command) 128TODAY (worksheet function) 280toolbars

actions sub-bar 171, 172connections sub-bar 171, 172creating 31customizing 31enabling tooltips 31project bar 171

connections sub-barULAST 172

connections sub-bar and ULAST 172Tools menu

See menustooltips, enabling on toolbars 31topic (DDE)

See DDEtray icon 31triggering alarms 55, 182TRIM (worksheet function) 280TRUE (worksheet function) 281TRUNC (worksheet function) 281TYPE (worksheet function) 281

UUDP (network connection) 45ULAST (unload from end of last unload) 54, 64, 65

in connections sub-bar 172in DT8xx status dialog box 70in DT8xx unload dialog box 65making project-specific 54reported in connections sub-bar 172tracking 54

Undo (Edit command) 34undoing Text > Clear Entry Buffer 96

undo (Macro Builder command) 181unload

initiating 61macros for unloading data 187session 61sessions 64, 66to .csv file 65to .dlr file 65

Index 297

UM

-007

ANumSymNumSym


0-A

0

ULAST (unload from end of last unload) 54, 64, 65making project-specific 54tracking 54

Unload (dataTaker menu command) 64unload files

.dx8 and .dxu (Extras) 40UNLOAD_SITE macro 187UNLOAD_SITE_DB macro 187UNLOAD_SITE_FILE macro 188UNLOAD_SITE_FILE_FAST macro 188Update Chart (Analysis command) 117Update Chart (Spread command) 107Upgrade Firmware (dataTaker menu command) 76UPPER (worksheet function) 281USDOLLAR (worksheet function) 282User Buttons (Text > Entry Screen command) 96utility software

dlr2dlr.exe 207dlr2txt.exe 207iUser 207, 235Schedule 196, 203SiteAdmin 203

Vvalid data

global logging session settings 52, 53Validation Rule (Form command) 82VALUE (worksheet function) 282VAR (worksheet function) 282VARP (worksheet function) 282VBA (software) 224, 225VDB (worksheet function) 283View Events (View command) 37View menu

See menusView Toolbar (Analysis command) 118View Toolbar (Chart command) 90View Toolbar (DT5/6xx Program command) 125View Toolbar (Form command) 79View Toolbar (Mimic command) 103View Toolbar (Spread command) 108View Toolbar (Text > Display Screen command) 93View Toolbar (Text > Entry Screen command) 96virtual channels 212, 215

calculated channels 218data hub 215exceedency (test for PARTIALLY_INVALID or INVALID status) 217store channels 216

resetting 216rolling 216

VLOOKUP (worksheet function) 283

WWAIT macro 188Web Publish (Configuration command) 58web publishing

See publishingWeek To Date (Reports > Alarms command) 127Week To Date (Reports > Errors command) 128WEEKDAY (worksheet function) 284Window menu

See menuswindows

analysis 161chart 139

data point symbols 87rulers 140

enabling 86scale group 87

document 14event logs 167

message display confirmation level (slider) 37, 167

form 136Formula One Workbook Designer 138macros for managing windows 189main window (project window) 13, 136mimic 145

for realtime data 97for replay data 97

overview (Fig.) 14, 15program builder

DT5/6xx 164DT8xx 165

project 136project window (main window) 13, 136spreadsheet 149

chart area 151, 163text 144

display screen commands 91entry screen commands 94

Windows 2000 (operating system) 235Windows NT (operating system) 235Windows XP (operating system) 235Word (software) 53WordPad (software) 53worksheet

functionsABS 240ACOS 240ACOSH 240ADDRESS 241AND 241ASC 241ASIN 241ASINH 242ATAN 242ATAN2 242ATANH 242AVERAGE 243CALL 244


UM

-007

0-A

0

Aumymumym


NSNS

CEILING 245CHAR 245CHOOSE 245CLEAN 246CODE 246COLUMN 246COLUMNS 246CONCATENATE 246COS 247COSH 247COUNT 247COUNTA 247COUNTIF 248DATE 248DATEVALUE 248DAY 249DAYS360 249DB 250DBCS 250DDB 250DOLLAR 251ERROR.TYPE 251EVEN 252EXACT 252EXP 252FACT 252FALSE 252FIND 253FINDB 253FIXED 253FLOOR 254FV 254HLOOKUP 254HOUR 255IF 255INDEX 256INDIRECT 256INT 256IPMT 257IRR 257ISBLANK 258ISERR 258ISERROR 258ISLOGICAL 258ISNA 259ISNONTEXT 259ISNUMBER 259ISREF 260ISTEXT 260LEFT 260LEFTB 260LEN 261LENB 261LN 261LOG 261LOG10 261LOOKUP 262LOWER 262MATCH 263MAX 263MID 264

MIDB 264MIN 264MINUTE 265MIRR 265MOD 265MONTH 266NA 266NOT 266NOW 266NPER 267NPV 267ODD 268OFFSET 268OR 269PI 269PMT 269PPMT 270PRODUCT 270PROPER 270PV 271RAND 271RATE 271REGISTER.ID 272REPLACE 272REPLACEB 273REPT 273RIGHT 273RIGHTB 273ROUND 274ROUNDDOWN 274ROUNDUP 274ROW 275ROWS 275SEARCH 275SEARCHB 276SECOND 276SIGN 276SIN 276SINH 277SLN 277SQRT 277STDEV 277STDEVP 277SUBSTITUTE 278SUM 278SUMIF 278SUMSQ 279SYD 279TAN 279TANH 279TEXT 280TIME 280TIMEVALUE 280TODAY 280TRIM 280TRUE 281TRUNC 281TYPE 281UPPER 281USDOLLAR 282VALUE 282

Index 299

UM

-007

ANumSymNumSym


0-A

0

VAR 282VARP 282VDB 283VLOOKUP 283WEEKDAY 284YEAR 284

workspace state, customizing 32

XXP (Windows operating system) 235XY Chart (Chart command) 89

YYEAR (worksheet function) 284


UM

-007

Head OfficeAustralia — MelbournedataTaker Pty Ltd7 Seismic CourtRowville Victoria 3178

Tel: 03 9764 8600 + 613 9764 8600 Fax: 03 9764 8997 +613 9764 8997Email: [email protected]

OfficesUnited KingdomdataTaker LtdSheprethCambridgeshireSG8 6GB

Tel: +44 (0) 1763 264780Fax: +44 (0) 1763 262410email: [email protected]

United States of AmericadataTaker, Inc.22961 Triton Way Suite ELaguna Hills CA 92653-1230

Tel: 1-800-9-LOGGERTel: 949 452 0750 +1 949 452 0750Fax: 949 452 1170 +1 949 452 1170Email: [email protected]

Worldwide Dealer Networkwww.dataTaker.com

Your Local Dealer

DA

TA

TA

KE

R

OF

FIC

ES

www.dataTaker.com

U70A0covers.qxd 21/8/02 1:29 PM Page 2